FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center

V100R021C00

User Manual

Issue 01
Date 2021-02-05

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2021. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: https://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document describes how to install and connect cabinets, devices, pipes, and
cables for the FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center (smart module for
short), and how to commission, operate, and maintain the product, providing
operation guidance and technical support for onsite installation personnel and
technical support engineers.

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
● Hardware installation engineers
● Technical support engineers
● Commissioning engineers
● Maintenance engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk which, if not

avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not

avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal
injury.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual About This Document

Symbol Description

Supplements the important information in the main text.

NOTE is used to address information not related to personal
injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.

Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue
contains all updates made in previous issues.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05)
This issue is the first official release.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual Contents

Contents

About This Document................................................................................................................ ii

1 Safety Information.................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 General Safety.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Personnel Requirements....................................................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Electrical Safety........................................................................................................................................................................ 4
1.4 Installation Environment Requirements.......................................................................................................................... 6
1.5 Mechanical Safety................................................................................................................................................................... 8
1.6 Cooling System Safety.........................................................................................................................................................10
1.7 Battery Safety......................................................................................................................................................................... 11
1.8 Others....................................................................................................................................................................................... 14

2 Product Description.............................................................................................................. 15
2.1 Positioning............................................................................................................................................................................... 15
2.2 Features.................................................................................................................................................................................... 17
2.3 Typical Application Scenarios........................................................................................................................................... 19

3 System Architecture..............................................................................................................20
3.1 Structure System................................................................................................................................................................... 20
3.1.1 Cabinet.................................................................................................................................................................................. 20
3.1.2 Converged Cabinet............................................................................................................................................................ 22
3.1.3 Components of Single-Row Cold and Hot Aisle Containment.......................................................................... 24
3.2 Power Supply and Distribution System......................................................................................................................... 26
3.2.1 Technical Specifications................................................................................................................................................... 26
3.2.2 Working Principles............................................................................................................................................................ 28
3.2.3 Key Hardware Devices..................................................................................................................................................... 28
3.2.3.1 Power Distribution Module........................................................................................................................................ 28
3.2.3.2 6 kVA UPS......................................................................................................................................................................... 29
3.2.3.3 Battery Module............................................................................................................................................................... 30
3.2.3.4 PDU2000........................................................................................................................................................................... 31
3.2.3.4.1 Non-intelligent PDU2000........................................................................................................................................ 31
3.2.3.4.2 (Optional) Intelligent PDU2000............................................................................................................................ 32
3.2.3.5 ATS Subrack..................................................................................................................................................................... 33
3.3 Cooling System...................................................................................................................................................................... 35
3.3.1 Technical Specifications................................................................................................................................................... 35

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual Contents

3.3.2 Application Conditions..................................................................................................................................................... 38

3.3.3 Key Hardware Devices..................................................................................................................................................... 39
3.3.3.1 Indoor Unit....................................................................................................................................................................... 40
3.3.3.2 Outdoor Unit................................................................................................................................................................... 40
3.4 Monitoring System............................................................................................................................................................... 41
3.4.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................................... 42
3.4.2 System Functions............................................................................................................................................................... 43
3.4.2.1 Monitoring........................................................................................................................................................................ 43
3.4.2.2 App View........................................................................................................................................................................... 44
3.4.2.3 Alarm.................................................................................................................................................................................. 44
3.4.2.4 Historical Data Query................................................................................................................................................... 44
3.4.2.5 Linkage Control...............................................................................................................................................................45
3.4.3 Key Hardware Devices..................................................................................................................................................... 45
3.4.3.1 ECC800-Pro....................................................................................................................................................................... 45
3.4.3.1.1 Product Configuration............................................................................................................................................... 45
3.4.3.1.2 Main Control Module................................................................................................................................................ 47
3.4.3.1.3 Power Module.............................................................................................................................................................. 56
3.4.3.2 Smart Cooling Product Control Unit....................................................................................................................... 57
3.4.3.3 PAD..................................................................................................................................................................................... 58
3.4.3.4 WiFi Module.....................................................................................................................................................................59
3.4.3.5 ETH Converter................................................................................................................................................................. 60
3.4.3.6 Smart ETH Gateway...................................................................................................................................................... 62
3.4.3.7 (Optional) eLight........................................................................................................................................................... 64
3.4.3.8 Environment Monitoring System.............................................................................................................................. 66
3.4.3.8.1 (Optional) WLDS900 Water Sensor..................................................................................................................... 66
3.4.3.8.2 (Optional) Electrode Water Sensor .....................................................................................................................67
3.4.3.8.3 T/H Sensor.................................................................................................................................................................... 67
3.4.3.8.4 Temperature Sensor................................................................................................................................................... 68
3.4.3.8.5 Ambient T/H Sensor.................................................................................................................................................. 69
3.4.3.8.6 Smoke Detector........................................................................................................................................................... 70
3.4.3.9 Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock.................................................................................................................................... 71
3.4.3.10 (Optional) Room Access Control System............................................................................................................ 73
3.4.3.10.1 Access Actuator......................................................................................................................................................... 73
3.4.3.10.2 Fingerprint and Card Reader with a Keypad.................................................................................................. 78
3.4.3.10.3 Fingerprint and Card Reader................................................................................................................................ 79
3.4.3.10.4 Card Reader with a Keypad.................................................................................................................................. 80
3.4.3.10.5 Magnetic Lock........................................................................................................................................................... 81
3.4.3.11 Video Management System..................................................................................................................................... 82
3.4.3.11.1 Camera......................................................................................................................................................................... 82
3.4.3.11.2 IVS1800........................................................................................................................................................................ 83
3.4.3.11.3 VCN510........................................................................................................................................................................ 84
3.4.4 (Optional) NetEco Intelligent Data Center Management System................................................................... 86

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual Contents

3.4.4.1 System Overview............................................................................................................................................................ 86

3.4.4.2 Server................................................................................................................................................................................. 87
3.4.4.3 LAN Switch....................................................................................................................................................................... 87
3.4.5 (Optional) Edge Data Center Management System............................................................................................. 87
3.5 Surge Protection and Grounding System..................................................................................................................... 88
3.5.1 Surge Protection Solution............................................................................................................................................... 88
3.5.2 Grounding Solution........................................................................................................................................................... 88
3.6 Integrated Cabling System................................................................................................................................................ 89
3.7 Fire Extinguishing System.................................................................................................................................................. 90

4 Installation Guide..................................................................................................................91
4.1 Installation Preparations.................................................................................................................................................... 91
4.1.1 Tools and Instruments..................................................................................................................................................... 91
4.1.2 Personnel Requirements................................................................................................................................................. 94
4.1.3 Installation Environment Check................................................................................................................................... 95
4.1.4 Site Requirements............................................................................................................................................................. 97
4.1.5 Installation Scenarios....................................................................................................................................................... 97
4.1.6 Smart Cooling Product Installation............................................................................................................................. 99
4.2 Hardware Installation....................................................................................................................................................... 100
4.2.1 Transportation and Unpacking................................................................................................................................... 100
4.2.1.1 Cabinet Transportation and Unpacking............................................................................................................... 101
4.2.1.2 Smart Cooling Product Transportation and Unpacking................................................................................. 104
4.2.2 (Optional) Removing Aisle Containments............................................................................................................. 106
4.2.3 Adjusting the Positions of Aisle Side Sealing Plates........................................................................................... 111
4.2.4 Installing a Cabinet........................................................................................................................................................ 114
4.2.5 (Optional) Installing the eLight................................................................................................................................. 116
4.2.6 Installing a Smart Cooling Product........................................................................................................................... 119
4.2.6.1 Materials......................................................................................................................................................................... 119
4.2.6.2 Layout Principles.......................................................................................................................................................... 124
4.2.6.3 Installing an Outdoor Unit....................................................................................................................................... 125
4.2.6.3.1 Installation Requirements..................................................................................................................................... 125
4.2.6.3.2 Space Requirements................................................................................................................................................ 127
4.2.6.3.3 Securing an Outdoor Unit..................................................................................................................................... 129
4.2.6.4 Exhausting Nitrogen from an Indoor Unit.......................................................................................................... 130
4.2.6.5 Connecting the Refrigerant Pipe............................................................................................................................ 132
4.2.6.5.1 Laying Out Pipes Inside a Cabinet......................................................................................................................132
4.2.6.5.2 Laying Out Pipes Outside a Cabinet.................................................................................................................. 135
4.2.6.6 Connecting Water Pipes............................................................................................................................................ 139
4.2.6.6.1 (Optional) Connecting the Humidifier Water Inlet Pipe............................................................................ 140
4.2.6.6.2 Connecting the Condensate Drainpipe............................................................................................................. 143
4.2.6.7 Injecting Nitrogen to Preserve Pressure............................................................................................................... 148
4.2.6.8 Connecting Cables....................................................................................................................................................... 150
4.2.6.9 Vacuumization.............................................................................................................................................................. 155

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual Contents

4.2.7 Installing Power Supply and Distribution Devices............................................................................................... 157

4.2.7.1 Installing Lithium Batteries...................................................................................................................................... 157
4.2.7.2 Installing a PDU2000..................................................................................................................................................158
4.2.7.3 (Optional) Installing an ATS Subrack................................................................................................................... 162
4.2.8 (Optional) Installing Cable Troughs......................................................................................................................... 163
4.2.8.1 Removing a Binding Plate........................................................................................................................................ 163
4.2.8.2 Installing a 600 mm Wide Cable Trough.............................................................................................................164
4.2.8.3 (Optional) Installing an 800 mm Wide Cable Trough.................................................................................... 168
4.2.9 Installing Monitoring Devices..................................................................................................................................... 168
4.2.9.1 Installing the SIM Card and Antenna................................................................................................................... 168
4.2.9.2 Installing a PAD............................................................................................................................................................ 169
4.2.9.3 (Optional) Installing a LAN Switch....................................................................................................................... 172
4.2.9.4 Installing T/H Sensors and Aisle Temperature Sensors (02312PBL)..........................................................173
4.2.9.4.1 Layout of T/H Sensors and Temperature Sensors.........................................................................................173
4.2.9.4.2 Installing T/H Sensors............................................................................................................................................. 175
4.2.9.4.3 (Optional) Installing Temperature Sensors..................................................................................................... 178
4.2.9.5 Installing Remote T/H Sensors (33010516) for Smart Cooling Products................................................ 179
4.2.9.5.1 T/H Sensor Layout................................................................................................................................................... 179
4.2.9.5.2 Installing T/H Sensors............................................................................................................................................. 181
4.2.9.6 Installing a Camera..................................................................................................................................................... 182
4.2.9.7 Installing an IVS1800..................................................................................................................................................186
4.2.9.8 Installing a Smart ETH Gateway and an ETH Converter............................................................................... 191
4.2.9.9 Routing the Cable to a WLDS900 Water Sensor.............................................................................................. 194
4.2.9.10 Installing an Electrode Water Sensor................................................................................................................. 199
4.2.9.11 (Optional) Installing an In-Room Access Actuator....................................................................................... 200
4.2.9.12 (Optional) Installing an In-Room Double Door Magnetic Lock?............................................................. 202
4.2.9.13 (Optional) Installing an In-Room Single Door Magnetic Lock................................................................. 205
4.2.9.14 (Optional) Installing an In-Room Fingerprint and Card Reader with a Keypad................................. 208
4.2.9.15 (Optional) Installing an In-Room Fingerprint and Card Reader...............................................................210
4.2.9.16 (Optional) Installing an In-Room Card Reader with a Keypad.................................................................211
4.2.9.17 (Optional) Installing an In-Room Exit Button.................................................................................................213
4.2.9.18 (Optional) Installing an In-Room Emergency Door Release Button.......................................................213
4.2.9.19 (Optional) Installing an In-Room Camera....................................................................................................... 214
4.3 Cable Routing...................................................................................................................................................................... 215
4.3.1 System Cabling Rules.....................................................................................................................................................215
4.3.2 Cable Routes..................................................................................................................................................................... 219
4.3.3 Power Cable Routing..................................................................................................................................................... 222
4.3.4 Grounding the Smart Module.....................................................................................................................................222
4.3.5 Cable Connections to the Power Supply and Distribution System................................................................ 224
4.3.5.1 Top Cable Routing....................................................................................................................................................... 224
4.3.5.1.1 Cable Routing Description.................................................................................................................................... 224
4.3.5.1.2 (Optional) Connecting Cables to the ATS Subrack...................................................................................... 226

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual Contents

4.3.5.1.3 Connecting Input Power Cables to the Converged Cabinet...................................................................... 227

4.3.5.1.4 Connecting Output Power Cables to the Converged Cabinet.................................................................. 228
4.3.5.2 Bottom Cable Routing............................................................................................................................................... 230
4.3.5.3 Connecting PDU2000 Power Cables..................................................................................................................... 232
4.3.5.4 Connecting Signal Cables for the Intelligent PDU2000..................................................................................234
4.3.5.5 Preparing Power Cables.............................................................................................................................................237
4.3.5.6 Connecting Cables Between the Battery and the UPS................................................................................... 237
4.3.6 Management System Cable Connection................................................................................................................. 238
4.3.6.1 Connecting Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock Cables............................................................................................238
4.3.6.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the Smart ETH Gateway....................................................................... 239
4.3.6.3 Connecting IVS Cables............................................................................................................................................... 240
4.3.6.4 Connecting a Cable to the WLDS900 Water Sensor....................................................................................... 241
4.3.6.5 (Optional) Connecting Cables for the In-Room Access Control System.................................................. 242
4.3.6.6 (Optional) Connecting Cables to the ATS Subrack..........................................................................................244
4.4 Verifying the Installation................................................................................................................................................. 245

5 Power-On Commissioning................................................................................................. 250

5.1 Power-On Commissioning for the Power Supply and Distribution System................................................... 250
5.1.1 UPS Power-On Commissioning.................................................................................................................................. 251
5.1.1.1 Checking Before Power-On...................................................................................................................................... 251
5.1.1.2 Single UPS Operations............................................................................................................................................... 251
5.1.1.2.1 Starting a UPS Using Mains Power.................................................................................................................... 251
5.1.1.2.2 Shutting Down a UPS............................................................................................................................................. 253
5.1.1.2.3 Performing EPO........................................................................................................................................................ 253
5.1.1.3 Parallel System Operations...................................................................................................................................... 254
5.1.1.3.1 Starting the UPSs Using Mains Power.............................................................................................................. 254
5.1.1.3.2 Shutting Down a Parallel System....................................................................................................................... 255
5.1.1.3.3 Performing EPO........................................................................................................................................................ 257
5.1.2 Connecting the Lithium Battery Supply.................................................................................................................. 257
5.2 Power-On Commissioning for the Cooling System.................................................................................................257
5.2.1 Powering on Devices...................................................................................................................................................... 257
5.2.2 Performing Initial Configuration................................................................................................................................ 258
5.2.2.1 Setting Temperature and Humidity....................................................................................................................... 258
5.2.2.2 Setting Teamwork Control Parameters................................................................................................................ 259
5.2.2.3 Setting the Maximum Outdoor Fan Speed.........................................................................................................262
5.2.3 Commissioning the Cooling System......................................................................................................................... 262
5.3 Management System Power-On Commissioning....................................................................................................267
5.3.1 Preparations and WebUI Login.................................................................................................................................. 267
5.3.2 Preparations and App Login........................................................................................................................................ 271
5.3.3 Initial Startup Password Authentication................................................................................................................. 273
5.3.4 How Can I Set the Date and Time?.......................................................................................................................... 275
5.3.5 Adding a Southbound Device..................................................................................................................................... 276
5.3.6 Creating a Smart Module Plan View........................................................................................................................ 276

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual Contents

5.3.7 Adding a UPS2000G....................................................................................................................................................... 276

5.3.8 Commissioning Sensors................................................................................................................................................ 277
5.3.8.1 Commissioning the Smoke Detector (Connected to the AI/DI Port on the ECC800).......................... 277
5.3.8.2 Commissioning the T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 02312PBL)........................................................................ 278
5.3.8.3 Commissioning the WLD900 Water Sensor....................................................................................................... 281
5.3.9 Commissioning Cabinet Electronic Clasp Locks....................................................................................................282
5.3.10 Event Notification......................................................................................................................................................... 288
5.3.11 Video Management..................................................................................................................................................... 293
5.3.11.1 Reference Documentation......................................................................................................................................293
5.3.11.2 Networking Scenarios.............................................................................................................................................. 294
5.3.11.3 Commissioning a Camera (LAN Switch Networking Scenario)................................................................ 295
5.3.11.3.1 Commissioning a C3220 Camera..................................................................................................................... 295
5.3.11.3.2 Commissioning a C3220 Camera (SD Card Configured)......................................................................... 301
5.3.11.4 Commissioning a Camera (Smart ETH Gateway Networking Scenario)............................................... 304
5.3.11.4.1 Commissioning a C3220 Camera..................................................................................................................... 304
5.3.11.4.2 Commissioning a C3220 Camera (SD Card Configured)......................................................................... 311
5.3.11.5 Commissioning a Network Video Recorder (VCN Scenario)......................................................................313
5.3.11.5.1 Logging In to the OMU Portal.......................................................................................................................... 313
5.3.11.5.2 Initializing VCN510 Disks.................................................................................................................................... 314
5.3.11.5.3 Setting Parameters on the VCN WebUI......................................................................................................... 317
5.3.11.5.4 Setting Parameters on the VCN IVS Client................................................................................................... 320
5.3.11.6 Commissioning a Network Video Recorder (IVS1800 Scenario).............................................................. 322
5.3.11.6.1 Setting Parameters on the IVS1800 WebUI..................................................................................................322
5.3.11.6.2 Setting Parameters on the iClient.................................................................................................................... 326
5.3.12 Linkage Control............................................................................................................................................................. 332
5.3.12.1 Linking the Emergency Ventilation with Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock Open....................................334
5.3.12.2 Link Smoke Alarm with Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock Open....................................................................334
5.3.12.3 Link Fire Control with Lock Open........................................................................................................................ 335
5.3.13 (Optional) NetEco Management............................................................................................................................ 336
5.3.13.1 NetEco6000 Management..................................................................................................................................... 336
5.3.13.1.1 Connecting a Communications Cable.............................................................................................................336
5.3.13.1.2 Setting NetEco Parameters.................................................................................................................................337
5.3.13.1.3 Obtaining the NetEco Software License........................................................................................................ 338
5.3.13.1.4 Powering On a Server.......................................................................................................................................... 339
5.3.13.1.5 Logging In to the NetEco Client....................................................................................................................... 339
5.3.13.1.6 Loading a NetEco License................................................................................................................................... 340
5.3.13.1.7 Installing NE Adapters......................................................................................................................................... 341
5.3.13.1.8 Adding a Management Domain....................................................................................................................... 342
5.3.13.1.9 Adding a Smart Module...................................................................................................................................... 343
5.3.13.1.10 Creating an ECC800-Pro on the NetEco...................................................................................................... 347
5.3.13.2 CloudOpera NetEco Management...................................................................................................................... 348
5.3.13.2.1 Logging In to the EDCM (Using a Web Client)........................................................................................... 348

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual Contents

5.3.13.2.2 Installing the EDCM App..................................................................................................................................... 349

5.3.13.2.3 Allowing a User to Log in to the EDCM on a Mobile Device................................................................. 350
5.3.13.2.4 (Optional) Replacing the App Certificate on a Mobile Device.............................................................. 350
5.3.13.2.5 Logging In to the EDCM App.............................................................................................................................350
5.3.13.2.6 Setting EDCM Communication Parameters on the ECC800-Pro........................................................... 351
5.3.13.2.7 Connecting to the Network................................................................................................................................352

6 O&M....................................................................................................................................... 355
6.1 Routine Maintenance........................................................................................................................................................ 355
6.1.1 Monthly Maintenance................................................................................................................................................... 355
6.1.2 Quarterly Maintenance................................................................................................................................................. 359
6.1.3 Yearly Maintenance........................................................................................................................................................ 360
6.2 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................................................. 366
6.2.1 Power Supply and Distribution System Troubleshooting.................................................................................. 366
6.2.2 Smart Cooling Product Troubleshooting................................................................................................................. 370
6.2.3 Management System Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................373
6.3 Alarm Reference..................................................................................................................................................................375
6.4 Parts Replacement............................................................................................................................................................. 398
6.4.1 Replacing Structural System Components............................................................................................................. 398
6.4.1.1 Replacing a Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock......................................................................................................... 398
6.4.1.2 Replacing a Gas Spring.............................................................................................................................................. 399
6.4.1.3 Replacing a PDU2000.................................................................................................................................................400
6.4.2 Replacing Power Supply and Distribution System Components.................................................................... 401
6.4.2.1 Replacing a Surge Protection Module.................................................................................................................. 401
6.4.2.2 Replacing a Fuse.......................................................................................................................................................... 403
6.4.2.3 Replacing an Indicator............................................................................................................................................... 403
6.4.2.4 Replacing a UPS2000-G............................................................................................................................................ 405
6.4.2.5 Replacing a Lithium Battery.................................................................................................................................... 409
6.4.2.6 Replacing the Monitoring Board from the ATS Subrack................................................................................410
6.4.2.7 Replacing an ATS Subrack........................................................................................................................................ 411
6.4.3 Replacing Cooling System Components..................................................................................................................412
6.4.3.1 Replacing Indoor Unit Components...................................................................................................................... 412
6.4.3.1.1 Replacing an Indoor Fan........................................................................................................................................ 414
6.4.3.1.2 Replacing a Condensate Pump............................................................................................................................ 418
6.4.3.1.3 Replacing a PSU, Rectifier, or Main Control Module................................................................................... 420
6.4.3.1.4 Replacing an NTC Temperature Sensor............................................................................................................ 422
6.4.3.1.5 Replacing a Low Pressure Sensor....................................................................................................................... 423
6.4.3.1.6 Replacing a Fuse....................................................................................................................................................... 424
6.4.3.1.7 Replacing a Contactor............................................................................................................................................ 426
6.4.3.1.8 Replacing an EEV and Coil.................................................................................................................................... 427
6.4.3.2 Replacing Outdoor Unit Components.................................................................................................................. 430
6.4.3.2.1 Replacing an Outdoor Fan.................................................................................................................................... 434
6.4.3.2.2 Replacing a Compressor........................................................................................................................................ 442

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual Contents

6.4.3.2.3 Replacing a Filter Dryer......................................................................................................................................... 446

6.4.3.2.4 Replacing a High Pressure Sensor...................................................................................................................... 450
6.4.3.2.5 Replacing a Pneumatic Switch............................................................................................................................ 451
6.4.3.2.6 Replacing a Safety Valve....................................................................................................................................... 453
6.4.3.2.7 Replacing a Switch for the Outdoor Unit........................................................................................................ 455
6.4.4 Replacing Management System Components...................................................................................................... 456
6.4.4.1 Replacing an ECC800-Pro Main Control Module.............................................................................................. 457
6.4.4.2 Replacing an ECC800-Pro PSU................................................................................................................................ 458
6.4.4.3 Replacing an ECC800-Pro Antenna....................................................................................................................... 459
6.4.4.4 Replacing a SIM Card and MicroSD Card............................................................................................................ 459
6.4.4.5 Replacing a Smart ETH Gateway........................................................................................................................... 461
6.4.4.6 Replacing an ETH Converter.................................................................................................................................... 463
6.4.4.7 Replacing a Camera.................................................................................................................................................... 464
6.4.4.8 Replacing an IVS1800................................................................................................................................................ 466
6.4.4.9 Replacing a Hard Disk for the IVS1800............................................................................................................... 467
6.4.4.10 Replacing an Aisle T/H Sensor (02312PBL)..................................................................................................... 469
6.4.4.11 Replacing a Remote T/H Sensor (33010516).................................................................................................. 471
6.4.4.12 Replacing a Temperature Sensor......................................................................................................................... 472
6.4.4.13 Replacing a Smoke Sensor..................................................................................................................................... 473
6.4.4.14 Replacing a WLDS900 Water Sensor and Water Detection Rope............................................................ 475
6.4.4.15 Replacing an Electrode Water Sensor................................................................................................................ 478
6.4.4.16 Replacing an eLight Strip Light............................................................................................................................ 478
6.4.4.17 Replacing an eLight Actuator............................................................................................................................... 479
6.4.4.18 Replacing an eLight Power Supply...................................................................................................................... 480
6.4.4.19 Replacing an Access Actuator............................................................................................................................... 480
6.4.4.20 Replacing a Fingerprint and Card Reader with a Keypad........................................................................... 482
6.4.4.21 Replacing a Fingerprint and Card Reader.........................................................................................................483
6.4.4.22 Replacing a Card Reader with a Keypad........................................................................................................... 485
6.4.4.23 Replacing an Emergency Door Release Button.............................................................................................. 486

7 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................... 489

A Fluorine Pump Principles.................................................................................................. 491
B Equipment Derating Coefficients.................................................................................... 493
C Acronyms and Abbreviations........................................................................................... 494

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 1 Safety Information

1 Safety Information

1.1 General Safety

Statement
Before installing, operating, and maintaining the equipment, read this document
and observe all the safety instructions on the equipment and in this document.
The "NOTICE", "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" statements in this
document do not cover all the safety instructions. They are only supplements to
the safety instructions. Huawei will not be liable for any consequence caused by
the violation of general safety requirements or design, production, and usage
safety standards.
Ensure that the equipment is used in environments that meet its design
specifications. Otherwise, the equipment may become faulty, and the resulting
equipment malfunction, component damage, personal injuries, or property
damage are not covered under the warranty.
Follow local laws and regulations when installing, operating, or maintaining the
equipment. The safety instructions in this document are only supplements to local
laws and regulations.
Huawei will not be liable for any consequences of the following circumstances:
● Operation beyond the conditions specified in this document
● Installation or use in environments which are not specified in relevant
international or national standards
● Unauthorized modifications to the product or software code or removal of the
product
● Failure to follow the operation instructions and safety precautions on the
product and in this document
● Equipment damage due to force majeure, such as earthquakes, fire, and
storms
● Damage caused during transportation by the customer
● Storage conditions that do not meet the requirements specified in this
document

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 1 Safety Information

General Requirements
● Do not install, use, or operate outdoor equipment and cables (including but
not limited to moving equipment, operating equipment and cables, inserting
connectors to or removing connectors from signal ports connected to outdoor
facilities, working at heights, and performing outdoor installation) in harsh
weather conditions such as lightning, rain, snow, and level 6 or stronger wind.
● Before installing, operating, or maintaining the equipment, remove any
conductive objects such as watches or metal jewelry like bracelets, bangles,
and rings to avoid electric shock.
● When installing, operating, or maintaining the equipment, wear personal
protective equipment such as insulation gloves, goggles, and safety clothing,
helmet, and shoes, as shown in the following figure.

● Follow the specified procedures for installation, operation, and maintenance.

● Before handling a conductor surface or terminal, measure the contact point
voltage and ensure that there is no risk of electric shock.
● After installing the equipment, remove idle packing materials such as cartons,
foam, plastics, and cable ties from the equipment area.
● In the case of a fire, immediately leave the building or the equipment area,
and turn on the fire alarm bell or make an emergency call. Do not enter the
building on fire in any case.
● Do not stop using protective devices. Pay attention to the warnings, cautions,
and related precautionary measures in this document and on the equipment.
Promptly replace warning labels that have worn out.
● Keep irrelevant people away from the equipment. Only operators are allowed
to access the equipment.
● Use insulated tools or tools with insulated handles, as shown in the following
figure.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 1 Safety Information

● All cable holes should be sealed. Seal the used cable holes with firestop putty.
Seal the unused cable holes with the caps delivered with the cabinet. The
following figure shows the criteria for correct sealing with firestop putty.

● Do not scrawl, damage, or block any warning label on the equipment.

● When installing devices, use a torque wrench with a proper measurement
range to tighten bolts. Ensure that the wrench is not skewed and the torque
error does not exceed 10%.
● Do not work with power on during installation.
● Repaint any paint scratches caused during equipment transportation or
installation in a timely manner. Equipment with scratches cannot be exposed
to an outdoor environment for a long period of time.
● Before operations, ensure that the equipment is firmly secured to the floor or
other solid objects, such as a wall or an installation rack.
● Do not use water to clean electrical components inside or outside of a
cabinet.
● Do not change the structure or installation sequence of equipment without
permission.
● Do not touch a running fan with your fingers, components, screws, tools, or
boards before the fan is powered off or stops running.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 1 Safety Information

Personal Safety
● If there is a probability of personal injury or equipment damage during
operations on the equipment, immediately stop the operations, report the
case to the supervisor, and take feasible protective measures.
● To avoid electric shock, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits
to telecommunication network voltage (TNV) circuits.
● Do not power on the equipment before it is installed or confirmed by
professionals.

1.2 Personnel Requirements

● Personnel who plan to install or maintain Huawei equipment must receive
thorough training, understand all necessary safety precautions, and be able to
correctly perform all operations.
● Only qualified professionals or trained personnel are allowed to install,
operate, and maintain the equipment.
● Only qualified professionals are allowed to remove safety facilities and inspect
the equipment.
● Personnel who will operate the equipment, including operators, trained
personnel, and professionals, should possess the local national required
qualifications in special operations such as high-voltage operations, working
at heights, and operations of special equipment.
● Professionals: personnel who are trained or experienced in equipment
operations and are clear of the sources and degree of various potential
hazards in equipment installation, operation, maintenance
● Trained personnel: personnel who are technically trained, have required
experience, are aware of possible hazards on themselves in certain operations,
and are able to take protective measures to minimize the hazards on
themselves and other people
● Operators: operation personnel who may come in contact with the
equipment, except trained personnel and professionals
● Only professionals or authorized personnel are allowed to replace the
equipment or components (including software).

1.3 Electrical Safety

Grounding
● For the equipment that needs to be grounded, install the ground cable first
when installing the equipment and remove the ground cable last when
removing the equipment.
● Do not damage the ground conductor.
● Do not operate the equipment in the absence of a properly installed ground
conductor.
● Ensure that the equipment is connected permanently to the protective
ground. Before operating the equipment, check its electrical connection to
ensure that it is securely grounded.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 1 Safety Information

General Requirements
Use dedicated insulated tools when performing high-voltage operations.

AC and DC Power

DANGER

Do not connect or disconnect power cables with power on. Transient contact
between the core of the power cable and the conductor will generate electric arcs
or sparks, which may cause fire or personal injury.

● If a "high electricity leakage" tag is attached on the equipment, ground the

protective ground terminal on the equipment enclosure before connecting the
AC power supply; otherwise, electric shock as a result of electricity leakage
may occur.
● Before installing or removing a power cable, turn off the power switch.
● Before connecting a power cable, check that the label on the power cable is
correct.
● If the equipment has multiple inputs, disconnect all the inputs before
operating the equipment.
● A circuit breaker equipped with a residual current device (RCD) is not
recommended.
● A damaged power cable must be replaced by the manufacturer, service agent,
or professionals to avoid risks.
● High voltage operations and installation of AC-powered facilities must be
performed by qualified personnel.

Cabling
● When routing cables, ensure that a distance of at least 30 mm exists between
the cables and heat-generating components or areas. This prevents damage
to the insulation layer of the cables.
● Do not route cables behind the air intake and exhaust vents of the
equipment.
● Ensure that cables meet the VW-1 or ZB flame spread rating requirements or
higher.
● Bind cables of the same type together. When routing cables of different types,
ensure that they are at least 30 mm away from each other.
● If an AC input power cable is connected to the cabinet from the top, bend the
cable in a U shape outside the cabinet and then route it into the cabinet.
● When the temperature is low, violent impact or vibration may damage the
plastic cable sheathing. To ensure safety, comply with the following
requirements:
– Cables can be laid or installed only when the temperature is higher than
0°C. Handle cables with caution, especially at a low temperature.
– Cables stored at subzero temperatures must be stored at room
temperature for at least 24 hours before they are laid out.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 1 Safety Information

● Do not perform any improper operations, for example, dropping cables

directly from a vehicle.
● When selecting, connecting, and routing cables, follow local safety regulations
and rules.

ESD

NOTICE

The static electricity generated by human bodies may damage the electrostatic-
sensitive components on boards, for example, the large-scale integrated (LSI)
circuits.

● Wear ESD gloves or a well-grounded ESD wrist strap when touching the
device or handling boards or application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs).
● When holding a board, hold its edge without touching any components. Do
not touch the components with your bare hands.
● Package boards with ESD packaging materials before storing or transporting
them.

Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

Neutral-Ground Voltage
It is recommended that the three-phase loads be equalized and the neutral-
ground voltage be kept at less than 2 V to meet power distribution requirements.

1.4 Installation Environment Requirements

● To prevent fire due to high temperature, ensure that the ventilation vents or
heat dissipation system are not blocked when the equipment is running.
● Install the equipment in an area far away from liquids. Do not install it under
areas prone to condensation, such as under water pipes and air exhaust vents,
or areas prone to water leakage, such as air conditioner vents, ventilation

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 1 Safety Information

vents, or feeder windows of the equipment room. Ensure that no liquid enters
the equipment to prevent faults or short circuits.
● If any liquid is detected inside the equipment, immediately disconnect the
power supply and contact the administrator.
● Do not expose the equipment to flammable or explosive gas or smoke. Do
not perform any operation on the equipment in such environments.
● Ensure that the equipment room provides good heat insulation, and the walls
and floor are dampproof.
● Install a rat guard at the door of the equipment room.

Installation at Heights
● Working at heights refers to operations that are performed at least 2 meters
above the ground.
● Do not work at heights if the steel pipes are wet or other potential danger
exists. After the preceding conditions no longer exist, the safety director and
relevant technical personnel need to check the involved equipment. Operators
can begin working only after obtaining consent.
● When working at heights, comply with local relevant laws and regulations.
● Only trained and qualified personnel are allowed to work at heights.
● Before working at heights, check the climbing tools and safety gears such as
safety helmets, safety belts, ladders, springboards, scaffolding, and lifting
equipment. If they do not meet the requirements, take corrective measures or
disallow working at heights.
● Wear personal protective equipment such as the safety helmet and safety belt
or waist rope and fasten it to a solid structure. Do not mount it on an
insecure moveable object or metal object with sharp edges. Make sure that
the hooks will not slide off.
● Set a restricted area and eye-catching signs for working at heights to warn
away irrelevant personnel.
● Carry the operation machinery and tools properly to prevent them from
falling off and causing injuries.
● Personnel involving working at heights are not allowed to throw objects from
the height to the ground, or vice versa. Objects should be transported by
tough slings, hanging baskets, highline trolleys, or cranes.
● Ensure that guard rails and warning signs are set at the edges and openings
of the area involving working at heights to prevent falls.
● Do not pile up scaffolding, springboards, or other sundries on the ground
under the area involving working at heights. Do not allow people to stay or
pass under the area involving working at heights.
● Inspect the scaffolding, springboards, and workbenches used for working at
heights in advance to ensure that their structures are solid and not
overloaded.
● Any violations must be promptly pointed out by the site manager or safety
supervisor and the involved personnel should be prompted for correction.
Personnel who fail to stop violations will be forbidden from working.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 1 Safety Information

1.5 Mechanical Safety

Hoisting Devices
● Do not walk under hoisted objects.
● Only trained and qualified personnel should perform hoisting operations.
● Check that hoisting tools are available and in good condition.
● Before hoisting objects, ensure that hoisting tools are firmly secured onto a
load-bearing object or wall.
● Ensure that the angle formed by two hoisting cables is no more than 90
degrees, as shown in the following figure.

● Do not drag steel ropes and hoisting tools or bump hoisted objects against
hard objects during hoisting.

Using Ladders
● Use wooden or fiberglass ladders when you need to perform live working at
heights.
● When a step ladder is used, ensure that the pull ropes are secured and the
ladder is held firm.
● Before using a ladder, check that it is intact and confirm its load bearing
capacity. Do not overload it.
● Ensure that the ladder is securely positioned. The recommended angle for a
ladder against the floor is 75 degrees, as shown in the following figure. An
angle rule can be used to measure the angle. Ensure that the wider end of the
ladder is at the bottom, or protective measures have been taken at the
bottom to prevent the ladder from sliding.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 1 Safety Information

● When climbing a ladder, take the following precautions to reduce risks and
ensure safety:
– Keep your body steady.
– Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder from the top.
– Ensure that your body's center of gravity does not shift outside the legs
of the ladder.

Drilling Holes
When drilling holes into a wall or floor, observe the following safety precautions:

NOTICE

Do not drill holes into the equipment. Doing so may affect the electromagnetic
shielding of the equipment and damage components or cables inside. Metal
shavings from drilling may short-circuit boards inside the equipment.

● Obtain the consent from the customer and subcontractor before drilling.
● Wear goggles and protective gloves when drilling holes.
● When drilling holes, protect the equipment from shavings. After drilling, clean
up any shavings that have accumulated inside or outside the equipment.

Moving Heavy Objects

DANGER

When removing a heavy or unstable component from a cabinet, be aware of

unstable or heavy objects on the cabinet.

● Be cautious to avoid injury when moving heavy objects.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 1 Safety Information

● When moving the equipment by hand, wear protective gloves to prevent

injuries.
● Move or lift the equipment by holding its handles or lower edges. Do not hold
the handles of modules (such as power supply units, fans, and boards) that
are installed in the equipment because they cannot support the weight of the
equipment.
● Avoid scratching the cabinet surface or damaging cabinet components and
cables during equipment transportation.
● When transporting the equipment using a forklift truck, ensure that the forks
are properly positioned to ensure that the equipment does not topple. Before
moving the equipment, secure it to the forklift truck using ropes. When
moving the equipment, assign dedicated personnel to take care of it.
● Choose railways, sea, or a road with good condition for transportation to
ensure equipment safety. Avoid tilt or jolt during transportation.
● Move a cabinet with caution. Any bumping or falling may damage the
equipment.

1.6 Cooling System Safety

Welding
● At least two persons are required on a welding site.
● A welder must have a work permit.
● A welding site must be free from inflammables.
● Ensure that a fire extinguisher, wet wiper, and water container are available.
● A burning welding torch must not be placed on a component or on the floor,
and must not be placed in a metal container with acetylene and oxygen.
Otherwise, the gas may leak and cause a fire.
● High-temperature pipes after welding must be promptly cooled.
● Do not weld or cut on pressurized containers or pipes. Electric devices must be
powered off before welding.

High Temperature and Pressure

● When maintaining or replacing components, pay attention to high-
temperature components (such as the compressor, refrigerant pipe, and
electric heater) to prevent scalds.
● When maintaining or replacing components, pay attention to high-pressure
components (such as the compressor and refrigerant pipe) to prevent the
refrigerant system from being cracked or exploded due to misoperations.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 1 Safety Information

Refrigerant Frostbite
Refrigerant leakage may cause frostbite. Take protective measures (for example,
wear antifreeze gloves) when handling refrigerant.

Storage and Recycling

● Do not store devices near a heat source or under direct sunshine.
● Keep devices away from fire or high-temperature objects, especially devices
injected with pressurized nitrogen or refrigerant; otherwise, explosion or
refrigerant leakage may occur, causing personal injury.

● The sign indicates that the product cannot be disposed of with other
wastes that have a shell in European Union (EU) areas. To avoid environment
pollution and harm to human health, wastes must be classified and recycled.
This also promotes resource reuse. When recycling a device, fill in the device
information in the recycling collection system or contact your dealer for help.
The dealer can help you recycle devices in a safe and environment-friendly
way.

1.7 Battery Safety

Basic Requirements
Before operating batteries, carefully read the safety precautions for battery
handling and master the correct battery connection methods.

DANGER

● Do not expose batteries at high temperatures or around heat-generating

devices, such as sunlight, fire sources, transformers, and heaters. Excessive heat
exposure may cause the batteries to explode.
● Do not burn batteries. Otherwise, the batteries may explode.
● To avoid leakage, overheating, fire, or explosions, do not disassemble, alter, or
damage batteries, for example, insert sundries into batteries or immerse
batteries in water or other liquids.

● Wear goggles, rubber gloves, and protective clothing to prevent skin contact
with electrolyte in the case of electrolyte overflow. If a battery leaks, protect
the skin or eyes from the leaking liquid. If the skin or eyes come in contact
with the leaking liquid, wash it immediately with clean water and go to the
hospital for medical treatment.
● Use dedicated insulated tools.
● Move batteries in the required direction. Do not place a battery upside down
or tilt it.
● Keep the battery loop disconnected during installation and maintenance.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 1 Safety Information

● Use batteries of specified models. Using batteries of other models may

damage the batteries.
● Dispose of waste batteries in accordance with local laws and regulations. Do
not dispose of batteries as household waste. If a battery is disposed of
improperly, it may explode.
● The site must be equipped with qualified fire extinguishing facilities, such as
firefighting sands and powder fire extinguishers.

NOTICE

To ensure battery safety and battery management accuracy, use batteries provided
with the UPS by Huawei. Huawei is not responsible for any battery faults caused
by batteries not provided by Huawei.

Battery Installation
Before installing batteries, observe the following safety precautions:
● Install batteries in a well-ventilated, dry, and cool environment that is far
away from heat sources, flammable materials, moistures, extensive infrared
radiation, organic solvents, and corrosive gases. Take fire prevention
measures.
● Place and secure batteries horizontally.
● Note the polarities when installing batteries. Do not short-circuit the positive
and negative poles of the same battery or battery string. Otherwise, the
battery may be short-circuited.
● Check battery connections periodically, ensuring that all bolts are securely
tightened.
● When installing batteries, do not place installation tools on the batteries.

Battery Short Circuit

DANGER

Battery short circuits can generate high instantaneous current and release a great
amount of energy, which may cause equipment damage or personal injury.

To avoid battery short-circuit, do not maintain batteries with power on.

Flammable Gas

NOTICE

● Do not use unsealed lead-acid batteries.

● To prevent fire or corrosion, ensure that flammable gas (such as hydrogen) is
properly exhausted for lead-acid batteries.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 1 Safety Information

Lead-acid batteries emit flammable gas when used. Ensure that batteries are kept
in a well-ventilated area and take preventive measures against fire.

Battery Leakage

NOTICE

Battery overheating causes deformation, damage, and electrolyte spillage.

WARNING

When the electrolyte overflows, absorb and neutralize the electrolyte immediately.
When moving or handling a battery whose electrolyte leaks, note that the leaking
electrolyte may hurt human bodies.

● If the battery temperature exceeds 60°C, check for and promptly handle any
leakage.
● Electrolyte overflow may damage the equipment. It will corrode metal parts
and boards, and ultimately damage the boards.
● If the electrolyte overflows, follow the instructions of the battery
manufacturer or neutralize the electrolyte by using sodium bicarbonate
(NaHCO3) or sodium carbonate (Na2CO3).

Lithium Battery
The safety precautions for lithium batteries are similar to those for lead-acid
batteries except that you also need to note the precautions described in this
section.

WARNING

There is a risk of explosion if a battery is replaced with an incorrect model.

● A battery can be replaced only with a battery of the same or similar model
recommended by the manufacturer.
● When handling a lithium battery, do not place it upside down, tilt it, or bump
it with other objects.
● Keep the lithium battery loop disconnected during installation and
maintenance.
● Do not charge a battery when the ambient temperature is below the lower
limit of the operating temperature (charging is forbidden at 0°C). Low-
temperature charging may cause crystallization, which will result in a short
circuit inside the battery.
● Use batteries within the allowed temperature range; otherwise, the battery
performance and safety will be compromised.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 1 Safety Information

● Do not throw a lithium battery in fire.

● When maintenance is complete, return the waste lithium battery to the
maintenance office.

1.8 Others
● Exercise caution when shutting down the smart cooling product. Doing so
may cause equipment and room overheating, which will damage the
equipment.
● Exercise caution when powering off the rPDU or PDU2000. Doing so may
affect the power supply to equipment, which will interrupt services.
● Exercise caution when manually shutting down the UPS inverter for
transferring to bypass mode, or when adjusting the UPS output voltage level
or frequency. Doing so may affect the power supply to equipment.
● Exercise caution when setting battery parameters. Incorrect settings will affect
the power supply and battery lifespan.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 2 Product Description

2 Product Description

2.1 Positioning
The FusionModule800 is a smart small data center solution applied to air cooled
scenarios where the equipment room area is less than 40 m2. This solution mainly
applies to city-, district-, and county-level data centers of the government vertical
industry, small-sized second-level branches and large-sized offices in the financial
industry, and equipment rooms of small- and medium-sized enterprises. The
following figure shows the position of the FusionModule800 in the product family.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 2 Product Description

Figure 2-1 Position of the FusionModule800 in the financial industry

(1) FusionModule5000 (2) FusionModule2000

(3) FusionModule800 (4) FusionModule500

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 2 Product Description

Figure 2-2 Position of the FusionModule800 in the government vertical industry

(1) FusionModule5000 (2) FusionModule2000

(3) FusionModule800 (4) FusionModule500

2.2 Features
Integration
● The smart module integrates the cabinet system, power supply and
distribution system, cooling system, management system, surge protection
and grounding system, integrated cabling system, and fire extinguishing
system. It adopts a modular and integrated design to provide a
comprehensive solution.

High Safety and Reliability

● Electrical and extra-low voltage (ELV) cables are separately routed to
minimize the electromagnetic interference.
● The UPS is configured with a manual maintenance bypass switch. When the
equipment is working properly, the switch is locked to prevent electrical
accidents caused by misoperations.
● If the cooling system is faulty due to problems such as a power failure, the
equipment room environment is used to facilitate heat dissipation. In this way,
the ambient temperature of the equipment can be maintained in a period of
time to avoid abrupt temperature increase. This ensures the safe operation of
servers until the cooling system recovers.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 2 Product Description

Small Footprint and Energy Conservation

● No specialized equipment room is required. The smart module can be
deployed in a renovated room of an office building.
● The product can be installed on a concrete floor in a building, which simplifies
auxiliary engineering.
● The delivery cycle is short. The smart module can be installed and
commissioned quickly within three man-days (for a typical 8.5 kW/R3 module
scenario).

Easy and Quick Installation

● Standard solutions and engineering designs are adopted.
● Cabinets are assembled with the aisle containment for delivery, saving both
space and time.
● The rack-mounted indoor unit of the smart cooling product is preinstalled,
simplifying redundancy.

Architecture Compatibility
● The smart module supports T1, T1 low-temperature, and T3 environments.
● The smart module supports cold and hot aisle containment, saving energy
and reducing noise.
● Modular power distribution and smart cooling products facilitate flexible
expansion.

Fast and Flexible Deployment

● The integrated design supports the relocation of equipment with offices.
● Flexible deployment based on the dimensions of the equipment room and the
power consumption of each cabinet is supported to meet the requirements of
capacity expansion.
● IT cabinets are flexibly configured with servers and storage and network
devices to meet enterprise requirements for web application and internal
services and provide users with more space.

Comprehensive Monitoring
● Various sensors monitor the functional modules in the equipment room in
real time.
● The smart module provides a module-level display to easily manage the
functional modules locally.
● A maximum of three smart module cameras and in-room cameras can be
monitored. (Smart module cameras are installed in the smart module and the
in-room cameras are installed in the room.)
● In-room access controllers can be monitored.
● ECC800-Pros in two smart modules can be cascaded.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 2 Product Description

2.3 Typical Application Scenarios

The smart module mainly applies to government, education, medical care,
transportation, energy, finance, small- and medium-sized enterprises, and
branches of large companies.

Target markets:
● Asia Pacific, Africa (including high-temperature areas in North Africa), Europe,
and Middle East (380–415 V, 3Ph+N, 50/60 Hz power systems are supported.)

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

3 System Architecture

3.1 Structure System

Figure 3-1 Cabinet system

(1) IT cabinets (2) Camera mounting kit on (3) Gas spring

the enclosed framework

(4) Side sealing plate (5) Cabinet electronic clasp (6) Converged Cabinet
lock

3.1.1 Cabinet
Cabinets are classified into the Converged Cabinet, IT cabinet, and network
cabinet.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Cabinets used in the data center comply with the International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) 60297-1 standard and provide stable installation space for
servers, thereby ensuring the safe operation of servers.

Figure 3-2 Cabinet

Table 3-1 Cabinet technical specifications

Item Technical Specifications

Dimensions (H x ● IT cabinet: 2000 mm x 600 mm x 1350 mm

W x D) ● Network cabinet: 2000 mm x 800 mm x 1350 mm
● Converged Cabinet: 2000 mm x 600 mm x 1350 mm

Reference net ● IT cabinet: 160 kg

weight ● Network cabinet:160 kg
● Converged Cabinet: 410 kg

Color Black

Material High-intensity class A carbon cold rolled steel plate and

zinc-coated steel plate

Ventilation Front and rear ventilation channels

channel

Space for ● Each cabinet provides 42 U available space, the position

installing the IT of each U is marked on the vertical mounting bars.
cabinet and ● The maximum depth for installing devices inside the
network cabinet cabinet is 750 mm.
● Positions for vertically installing two PDU2000s are
provided at the rear of the cabinet.

Installation mode Installed on a base (concrete floor or ESD floor)

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Item Technical Specifications

Static load 1500 kg

Dynamic load 1000 kg

Protection level IP20

Figure 3-3 Mounting hole positions at the cabinet bottom

Table 3-2 Technical specifications of mounting holes at the cabinet bottom

Cabinet Model Mounting Hole (L x W)

IT cabinet 980 mm x 400 mm

Network cabinet 980 mm x 600 mm

3.1.2 Converged Cabinet

The Converged Cabinet consists of the indicator module, rack-mounted UPS
module, input and output power distribution module, monitoring module, smart
cooling product control unit, and rack-mounted smart cooling product.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Figure 3-4 Converged Cabinet

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Figure 3-5 Modules in the Converged Cabinet

(1) Indicator module (2) UPS2000-G (3) Power distribution module

(4) ECC800-Pro (5) Smart cooling product (6) Smart cooling product
control unit indoor unit

3.1.3 Components of Single-Row Cold and Hot Aisle

Containment
The components of single-row aisle containment include an enclosed framework,
door components, and binding plates (or M-shaped cable troughs).

Single-row cold and hot aisle containment

Figure 3-6 Layout of single-row cold and hot aisle containment

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Cabinet Door
● In cold and hot aisle containment, a sealed glass door is configured at the
front and a sealed sheet metal door at the rear.
● By default, the front and rear doors of a cabinet are equipped with electronic
clasp locks, which can be unlocked only by using dedicated keys.

Figure 3-7 Front door

Figure 3-8 Rear door

Cable Trough (Optional)

● Cable troughs are clamped one by one to form a whole. A cable trough is
assembled by clamping two side panels, one pallet, and one baffle (used to
separate ELV optical fiber cables from ELV network cables and electrical route
A from electrical route B).

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

● Signal cables and power cables are routed in different cable troughs to
separate electrical cables from ELV cables.
● Signal cables are installed on the top of the front door of the cabinet, and
power cables are installed on the top of the rear door of the cabinet.
● Cable troughs are installed on the top of cabinets for routing cables.

Figure 3-9 Cable trough

3.2 Power Supply and Distribution System

● The Converged Cabinet houses the UPS input and output, IT load, smart
cooling product power distribution, and management system power
distribution, and supports single and dual power inputs.
● The power distribution module, which is rack-mounted, includes the surge
protective device (SPD), UPS input, output, and maintenance bypass as well
as the power supply to IT loads and smart cooling products.
● The N architecture of the UPS system is supported. IT power distribution
supports a maximum of four cabinets.
● The air cooled smart cooling product consists of the indoor unit and outdoor
unit and is supplied with mains power.
● The management system consists of the ECC800-Pro, VCN/IVS1800 (optional),
camera (optional), cabinet electronic clasp lock, temperature sensor,
temperature and humidity sensor (T/H sensor), smoke detector, and water
sensor. They are powered by the power supply and distribution system.
● The 48 V lithium iron phosphate batteries are configured.

3.2.1 Technical Specifications

Table 3-3 Technical specifications

Category Item Specifications

Power supply Input voltage range 342–456 V

Input frequency 50/60 Hz (±3 Hz)

Power IT load power ● Normal temperature and low

consumption temperature: 8.5 kW
● High temperature: 7 kW

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Category Item Specifications

Maximum power ● Normal temperature and low

consumption of a temperature: 7 kW
single IT cabinet ● High temperature condition: 6
kW

Power supply Single power input Supported

mode
UPS selection UPS2000-G-6 kVA

Power supply and Normal temperature: N

distribution mode

Power system 380 V/400 V/415 V; 50/60 Hz; 3 Ph

+N+PE

PDU2000 Input voltage range 187 V AC–264 V AC 1 Ph

Maximum input current 32 A

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

3.2.2 Working Principles

Conceptual Diagram for the N Power Distribution System

Figure 3-10 Conceptual diagram for the N power distribution system

3.2.3 Key Hardware Devices

3.2.3.1 Power Distribution Module

Table 3-4 Power distribution module specifications

Item Specifications

System parameters Single input, IT load power ≤ 8.5 kW, two 6 kVA UPSs,
one smart cooling product; front operation, front and
rear maintenance

Dimensions (H x W x 130.5mm×442mm×450mm
D)

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Item Specifications

General input 63 A MCB

UPS input 1 x D63A/1P MCB

UPS output 1×C63A/1P MCB

UPS Bypass 1 x C63A/1P MCB

Power Distribution for 1×C40A/1P MCB+1×C25A/1P MCB

Smart Cooling Product

IT power distribution 4×C40A/1P MCB

Surge protective device 1×C32A/4P MCB

(SPD) circuit breaker

BCB box subrack 6×C125A/2P MCB

3.2.3.2 6 kVA UPS

The UPS2000-G-6KRTLL is an online transformerless UPS. It consists of main

power circuits such as EMI and PFC/INV, and the monitoring unit. The UPS
supports 48 V lithium battery input, and multiple UPSs can be connected in
parallel. T he UPS provides USB, RS232, and RS485 ports.

Figure 3-11 Front and rear views of a 6 kVA UPS

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

(1) Liquid crystal display (2) Maintenance bypass (MBS) (3) Battery
(LCD) port management
system (BMS) ports
(4) RS232 (5) RS485 communications (6) USB port
communications port ports (connect to northbound
devices)
(7) AC input and output (8) Battery input terminal (9) Parallel current
terminals (behind the (behind the cover) equalization port
cover)
(10) Emergency power- (11) Parallel communication (12) Battery PE
off (EPO) port port terminal

NOTE

● The RS485 ports support only the Modbus RTU protocol. For details, see the Modbus
development guide and Modbus user manual.
● a: The USB port supports the standard Modbus protocol and can be connected to the
NetEco through a USB cable.

3.2.3.3 Battery Module

The UPS uses 48 V lithium battery modules to provide backup power. Only the
ESM-48100B1 and ESM-48150B1D are applicable to the 6 kVA UPS. The 100 Ah
and 150 Ah battery modules have the same panels and ports but different
dimensions.

Figure 3-12 ESM-48100B1/48150B1 panel and ports

Table 3-5 Port definitions

No. Silk Screen Name

1 GND Protective ground

2 DO1 ESM dry contact output

DO2

3 COM_ IN Communications port

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

No. Silk Screen Name

4 COM_ OUT Communications port

5 RUN Running indicator

ALM Alarm indicator

CHG Charge indicator

DCHG Discharge indicator

SOC SOC indicator

6 / Buzzer

7 MANUAL ON/OFF Button for manual power-on/off

8 PWR ESMU port for connecting to an

external power source

9 + ESM positive terminal

- ESM negative terminal

3.2.3.4 PDU2000

3.2.3.4.1 Non-intelligent PDU2000

By default, IEC sockets are configured for all PDU2000s. GB sockets are optional.

Figure 3-13 Full-height PDU2000

NOTE

Figures provided in this document are for reference only.

Table 3-6 PDU2000 specifications

Type Model Output Port

IEC PDU2000-32-1PH-20/4-B9 20 x C13 + 4 x C19

(full-height)

GB PDU2000-32-1PH-20/4-B2 20×10A+4×16A
(full-height)

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

3.2.3.4.2 (Optional) Intelligent PDU2000

The intelligent PDU2000 accurately and effectively monitors the real-time status
changes of the current, voltage, power, and electric energy of electrical devices in
the data center.
The intelligent PDU2000 needs to support the following monitoring functions:
● Detect and display the input current.
● Detect and display the total input current.
● Detect and display the input voltage; display the voltage and current
alternately.
● Provide remote input management.
● Remotely query the input voltage, total input current, input power, and input
energy through a serial port.
● Remotely query the PDU status through a serial port. The status that can be
queried includes normal input power, overcurrent, overvoltage, and
undervoltage, as well as the communication status (normal or abnormal) of
the monitoring board.
● Remotely set the input overcurrent warning threshold, overvoltage alarm
threshold, and undervoltage alarm threshold through a serial port, or locally
set these parameters.
● Working status indicator: The PDU has a built-in input status indicator, which
indicates the working status of the PDU.
● Input alarm: If any of input overcurrent, overvoltage, and undervoltage occur,
the working status indicator indicates the fault, and an alarm is reported over
the Modbus port.

Figure 3-14 Intelligent PDU2000

Table 3-7 Technical specifications of the intelligent PDU2000

Item Specifications

Function Supports single-phase AC 200–240 V

power supply, twenty 10 A outputs,
and four 16 A outputs.

Dimensions (H x W x D) 1732 mm x 50 mm x 45 mm

Output quantity and system 20 x C13 + 4 x C19

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Item Specifications

Monitoring function Monitors the input power, voltage,

current, power factor, and electric
energy

3.2.3.5 ATS Subrack

Figure 3-15 ATS subrack

(1) Dual input indicator (2) Monitoring board (3) Route II switch button

(4) Route I/II status display (5) Handle

window

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Figure 3-16 ATS monitoring board

Table 3-8 LED indicator status description

No. Indicat Name Description
or

1 RUN ATS running ● Steady green: working properly

status ● Steady yellow: warning or minor
indicator alarm
● Steady red: major or critical alarm

2 AUTO ATS working ● Steady green: automatic control

mode indicator mode
● Steady red: manual mode or non-
firefighting power disconnection

3 I Route I power ● Steady green: normal

status ● Steady red: abnormal
indicator

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

No. Indicat Name Description

or

4 / Route I switch ● Steady green: route I switched on

status ● Off: route I switched off
indicator
● Steady red: route I switched on
abnormally

5 / Route II switch ● Steady green: route II switched on

status ● Off: route II switched off
indicator
● Steady red: route II switched on
abnormally

6 II Route II power ● Steady green: normal

status ● Steady red: abnormal
indicator

3.3 Cooling System

3.3.1 Technical Specifications

All models (indoor and outdoor units) of this product meet the environmental
protection requirements. The environmental protection mark is as follows.

Figure 3-17 Environmental protection mark

Table 3-9 Indoor unit technical specifications

Item NetCol5000-A013HX0E1 (Excluding Heater and
Humidifier)

Power system 208 V AC–240 V AC 50 Hz/60 Hz 1 Ph+N+PE/2 Ph+PE

Voltage tolerance If upstream voltage fluctuation exceeds the rated

voltage±10%, you are advised to add a voltage
regulator. Otherwise, the smart cooling product may
generate alarms frequently and fail to work properly.

Frequency tolerance ±3Hz

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Item NetCol5000-A013HX0E1 (Excluding Heater and

Humidifier)

Certification Normal-temperature model: REACH, RoHS, CE, CCC,

and CQC
Low-temperature model: REACH, RoHS, CE, CCC, CQC,
and EAC
High-temperature models: REACH, RoHS, CE, SASO

Maximum current 3.3A

Cooling mode Air cooled

Refrigerant R410A

Cooling capacity 12.5kWa

Humidification No
function

Humidification -
capacity

Heating function No

Heating capacity -

Air supply mode Horizontal air supply

Maximum airflow 2600m3/h

Condensate pump Yes

Power supply mode Single power supply

Dimensions (H x W x 486mm×442mm×800mm
D)b

Package dimensions 710mm×610mm×1000mm

(H x W x D)

Net weight/Gross 49.4kg/66.8kg

weightb

IP rating IP20

a: The cooling capacity of the smart cooling product is obtained when the
indoor dry bulb temperature is 37.8°C, the indoor wet bulb temperature is
20.8°C, and the outdoor dry bulb temperature is 35°C. The actual cooling
capacity varies depending on the indoor and outdoor ambient temperatures and
relative humidity.
b: The outdoor unit dimensions include the dimensions of the control unit. The
net weight and gross weight also include the weight of the control unit.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Table 3-10 Technical specifications of normal-temperature outdoor units

Item NetCol500-A018 NetCol500-A021 NetCol500-A020
(Normal- (Low- (High-
Temperature Temperature Temperature
Outdoor Unit) Outdoor Unit) Outdoor Unit)

Power system 208–240 V AC, 220–240 V AC, 220–240 V AC,

50/60 Hz, 1 PH+N 50/60 Hz, 1 PH+N 50/60 Hz, 1 PH+N
+PE +PE +PE

Maximum 24A 30A 30A

operating current

Number of fans One 1 2

Dimensions (H x 966mm×1057mm 1350mm×1270m 1327mm×966mm

W x D) ×339mm m×730mm ×320mm

Package 1210mm×1105m 1530mm×1355m 1485mm×1082m

dimensions (H x m×435mm m×777mm m×435mm
W x D)

Net weight/Gross 83kg/99kg 196kg/229kg 101kg/114kg

weight

Certification REACH, RoHS, CE, REACH, RoHS, CE, REACH, RoHS, CE,
CCC, and CQC CCC, CQC, and and SASO
EAC

Environment type Class B Class B Class B

Protection level IPX4 IPX4 IPX4

Outdoor unit application environments are classified by severity as follows:

● Class A (controlled environment): indoor environments where the ambient
temperature and humidity are controlled, including rooms where people live
● Class B (uncontrollable environment): indoor environments where the
ambient temperature and humidity are not controlled or general outdoor
environments with simple shielding measures where the humidity reaches
100% occasionally
● Class C (harsh environment): sea environments, or outdoor land environments
or environments with simple shielding measures, which are within 3.7 km
away from the sea or within 1.2 km away from a pollution source
● Class D (marine environment): environments within 500 m away from the
coast

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

3.3.2 Application Conditions

Operating Environment

Table 3-11 Operating environment

Item Specifications

Indoor unit 0–40°C

operating
temperature

Indoor unit 5%–95% RH (non-condensing)

operating humidity

Outdoor unit For high-temperature outdoor units: –10°C to +55°C

operating For normal-temperature outdoor units: –20°C to +45°C
temperature
For low-temperature outdoor units: –40°C to +45°C

Storage Without refrigerant: –40°C to +70°C

temperature With refrigerant: –40°C to +55°C

Storage humidity 5%–95% RH (non-condensing)

Altitude 1000–4000 m. The performance of the smart cooling

product is derated when the altitude ranges from 1000 m
to 4000 m. The maximum outdoor operating temperature
decreases 1°C and the nominal cooling capacity decreases
by 1% for each additional 200 m.

Installation Requirements

Table 3-12 Installation requirements

Installation Mode Rack-mounted

Vertical Difference ● Outdoor unit placed higher than the indoor unit: ≤
Between the Indoor 30 m
and Outdoor Units ● Indoor unit placed higher than the indoor unit: ≤ 8
m

Maximum Equivalent 80 m. If the length exceeds 80 m, contact Huawei

Length of One-way technical support.
Pipe

Thermal Insulation ≥ 13 mm
Foam Thickness

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Water Supply The inlet water pressure should be in the range of

Requirements 0.1–0.7 MPa, and the temperature should be in the
range of 1°C–40°C.
The wet film humidifier should use tap water that
meets the following requirements:
● Non-freezing and nephelometric turbidity units
(NTU) < 3
● No visible substances
● 6.5 ≤ pH value ≤ 8.5
● Total hardness (in CaCO3) ≤ 450 mg/L
For details, refer to the GB 5749-2006 Standards
for Drinking Water Quality.

Drainage The distance between the upper drainage of the

Requirements water pump and the cabinet installation floor should
not exceed 4 m.
(BSPT 1/2 inch drainpipe connectors with external
threads are provided in standard configuration.
Drainpipes and BSPP 1/2 inch connectors with
internal threads should be prepared by the customer.)

Ports

Table 3-13 Ports

Item Specifications

Refrigerant gas ● L ≤ 60 m, reserved port: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), thread

pipe connection
● 60 m < L ≤ 80 m, reserved port: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm),
thread connection

Refrigerant liquid ● L ≤ 60 m, reserved port: 3/8 inch (9.52 mm), thread

pipe connection
● 60 m < L ≤ 80 m, reserved port: 1/2 inch (12.77 mm),
thread connection

Humidifier water Reserved port: BSPP 1/2 inch, thread connection

inlet pipe

Pipe and cable Top or bottom routing

routing

3.3.3 Key Hardware Devices

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

3.3.3.1 Indoor Unit

The indoor unit consists of the EC fan, evaporator, electronic expansion valve,
electric heater (optional), wet film humidifier (optional), light load dehumidifier,
and condensate pump.

Figure 3-18 Indoor unit

3.3.3.2 Outdoor Unit

The outdoor unit consists of the DC variable-frequency compressor, oil separator,
gas-liquid separator, filter dryer, fan, and refrigerant pump (only for the low-
temperature outdoor unit).

Figure 3-19 Exterior of the outdoor unit of a normal-temperature model

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Figure 3-20 Exterior of the outdoor unit of a high-temperature model

Figure 3-21 Exterior of the outdoor unit of a low-temperature model

3.4 Monitoring System

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

3.4.1 Overview
The management system implements data collection and management for various
processes and infrastructure of the smart module.

The ECC800-Pro manages the real-time status, alarms, and configuration

information about the devices inside the smart module. It also provides a
graphical user interface (GUI) for ease of operating and maintaining devices inside
the smart module.

Figure 3-22 Management system network diagram

Table 3-14 Network diagram description

Device Maximum Quantity Port

Camera 3 FE

VCN/IVS1800 1 FE

Smart ETH gateway 8 FE

Access actuator 2 (One access actuator connects to FE

at most one magnetic lock, one
access control device, one exit
button, and one emergency door
release button.)

NetCol5000-A013 smart 4 FE
cooling product

UPS2000 4 RS485

Smoke detector 1 DI

T/H sensor 8 RS485

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Device Maximum Quantity Port

Temperature sensor 18 AI

Water sensor 1 DI

SPD 1 DI

Cabinet electronic clasp 24 RS485

lock

WiFi module 1 USB

The management system provides a GUI to implement comprehensive

management functions based on requirements. The system can monitor the
following equipment:
● Power equipment: Such as the smart cooling product and UPS
● Environment equipment: such as the smoke detector and water sensor
● Video equipment: camera and VCN/IVS1800 (network video recorder). Room-
level cameras and smart module-level cameras can be monitored at the same
time.
● Access control equipment: A standard room-level access management system
is integrated to manage and monitor key information such as door status,
card swiping, and permission setting.

Figure 3-23 Layout of the access control system

NOTE

The access actuator should be installed near the door, have a maximum of 3.5 m cabling
distance away from the magnetic lock, and have a maximum of 5 m cabling distance away
from other switches and the access control device.

3.4.2 System Functions

3.4.2.1 Monitoring
● Temperature and humidity monitoring: Detects and collects statistics on the
ambient temperature and humidity inside the smart module.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

● Water leakage monitoring: Detects water leakage at the bottom of the smart
module and provides real-time alarm signals.
● Smoke monitoring: Detects smoke in the smart module and provides real-
time alarm signals.
● Power distribution monitoring: Monitors the input voltage, frequency, and
current of the UPS inside the smart module.
● Smart cooling product monitoring: Monitors the temperature and humidity of
supply air and return air in real time; allows users to configure the supply air
temperature setpoint in a unified manner so they do not need to set it for
each smart cooling product; monitors and displays the fan speed and running
percentage; displays the cooling load rate in percentage; monitors and
displays the operating status of compressors.
● Video surveillance: Connects to three cameras and provides PoE power supply;
accesses real-time video images on the WebUI and invokes historical
monitoring data.

3.4.2.2 App View

● Generates a 2.5D layout view that matches the actual layout of the smart
module, including the power distribution module, IT cabinet, and T/H sensor.
In addition, the ambient temperature and humidity inside the smart module
are displayed on the home screen of the app.
● Displays the real-time status monitoring data and alarms of the aisle
temperature and humidity on the floor plan.
● Facial recognition is supported through an app installed on a tablet computer.
After facial recognition information is added, click Facial Enter to start the
facial recognition. If you do not have facial recognition permission or an error
occurs during facial recognition, you can use the user name and password
login manner.
● After logging in to the app installed on the tablet, you can open the cabinet
door on the corresponding screen.

3.4.2.3 Alarm
● The system monitors the status of smart cooling products, power distribution,
and environment. If a fault or parameter error occurs, the system generates
an alarm in real time. You can view the alarm cause and solution in the alarm
details.
● Alarms can be classified into four severities: critical, major, minor, and
warning. The alarm severities can be user-defined.
● Active alarms can be filtered by device and alarm severity.
● Alarms can be linked with the eLight. The eLight light colors vary with alarm
severities.
● Alarm notifications can be sent by email and SMS.
● A maximum of 500 concurrent active alarms are supported.

3.4.2.4 Historical Data Query

● Historical alarm: You can view the alarms that have been generated in the
system. The historical alarm information includes the device name, alarm
name, alarm severity, alarm generation time, and alarm clearance time.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

● Performance data statistics: You can view historical data of devices to help
analyze data or problems.
● Operation log: You can view logs of key operations, such as user login,
parameter modification, data export, device upgrade, and access control
events.
● Data export: You can export historical data of the ECC800-Pro and some
southbound devices.

3.4.2.5 Linkage Control

● Supports the linkage logic of aisle smoke alarms or high temperature alarms.
By default, the IT cabinet doors are opened through linkage by default.
NOTE

The aisle smoke sensor alarm cannot trigger the customer's fire extinguishing system. Only
dry contact alarm signals are provided.
● If the protected area of the fire extinguishing system is in the smart module,
when a smoke alarm is generated, the door of the linked cabinet is not
opened. If the door is opened, an alarm (door status alarm) is generated.
● If the protected area of the fire extinguishing system is outside the smart
module, when a smoke alarm is generated, key hardware devices on the rear
door of the linked cabinet are opened.

3.4.3 Key Hardware Devices

3.4.3.1 ECC800-Pro

3.4.3.1.1 Product Configuration

The ECC800-Pro data center controller is used to monitor the devices and
environment in the smart module. It consists of the power module and main
control module. You can insert and remove the power module.

Figure 3-24 ECC800-Pro

(1) Power module (2) Main control module

Table 3-15 ECC800-Pro environmental specifications

Item Specifications

Operating –20°C to +50°C

temperature

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Item Specifications

Storage temperature –40°C to +70°C

Relative humidity 5%–95% RH (non-condensing)

Altitude 0–4000 m (When the altitude is between 3000 m and

4000 m, the temperature decreases by 1°C for each
additional 200 m.)

Table 3-16 ECC800-Pro structural specifications

Item Specifications

Dimensions (L x W x H) 442 mm x 330 mm x 43.6 mm

Weight 6.3 kg (with a single power module

and a main control module)

Color Black

Installation requirements Can be installed in a 1 U space in a

standard 19-inch cabinet

Environmental protection RoHS5, REACH, WEEE

Figure 3-25 ECC800-Pro (rear view)

(1) 53.5V DC_OUT1 (2) 53.5V DC_OUT2 (3) AC_INPUT1

(4) AC_INPUT2

Power Port
The ECC800-Pro provides four power ports, including two AC input ports
(AC_INPUT1 and AC_INPUT2) and two DC output ports (DC_OUTPUT1 and
DC_OUTPUT2). Table 3-17 provides the power port pin definitions.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Table 3-17 Power port pin definitions

Port Type Pin Description
sequence

AC Pin1 L

Pin2 PE

Pin3 N

DC Pin1 48V+

Pin2 48VGND

3.4.3.1.2 Main Control Module

Figure 3-26 ECC800-Pro collector main control module

(1) USB (2) Status indicator (3) AIDI_1 (4) AIDI_2

(5) COM1/AIDI_4 (6) COM3/12V (7) WAN1 (8) LAN1/POE

(9) LAN2/POE (10) WAN2 (11) COM4/CAN (12) COM2/AIDI_5

(13) AIDI_3 (14) DO/12V (15) RF_Z (802.15.4) (16) WLAN (reserved)

(17) 4G (18) SW button

NOTE

The WLAN port is reserved and cannot be connected to a WLAN antenna for WLAN
communication.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Figure 3-27 ECC800-Pro main control module (side view)

(1) SIM card slot (2) Micro SD card slot (reserved)

Specifications

Table 3-18 Technical specifications of the ECC800-Pro main control module

Item Specifications

Power input ● Supports one AC input or two AC inputs

● Rated voltage: 200–240 V AC
● Rated frequency: 50/60 Hz

Power output ● Output voltage: 42–58 V DC (rated voltage: 53.5 V DC)

● Output power of two power module supplies: 2000 W (200–
240 V AC); 940 W (linear derating at 85–175 V AC)
● Output power of a single power module supply: 1000 W
(200–240 V AC); 470 W (linear derating at 85–175 V AC)

WAN port ● Supports two WAN ports. WAN1 is used to connect to the
management system, and WAN2 is used for maintenance.
The ports support autonegotiation of 10/100/1000 Mbit/s
communication rates.
● Connect shielded network cables to the WAN ports.

LAN port ● Supports two LAN ports, which can be connected to the
LAN. The ports support autonegotiation of 10/100/1000
Mbit/s communication rates.
● Connect shielded network cables to the LAN ports.

RS485 serial ● Output voltage: 13–15 V DC (rated voltage: 14.5 V DC)

port ● Four RS485 ports with the default communications rate of
expansion 9600 bit/s
● COM1–COM3 ports provide 12 V DC power.
● The power supply can be switched on or off and is on by
default.

PoE expansion Supports two PoE (GE) ports for expansion of the PoE bus, and
supports network isolation and ring network.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Item Specifications

AIDI ● Output voltage: 13–15 V DC (rated voltage: 14.5 V DC)

expansion ● Provides five universal AIDI ports for connecting to sensors
(RJ45) such as smoke sensors, water sensors, and NTC sensors.
AIDI_1 to AIDI_3 are full-function AIDI ports, and AIDI_4 to
AIDI_5 are simplified AIDI ports without type identification.
● The power supply can be switched on or off and is on by
default.

DO expansion ● Output voltage: 13–15 V DC (rated voltage: 14.5 V DC)

(RJ45) ● Supports one active DO port.
● The power supply can be switched on or off and is on by
default.

Fault isolation There are three groups of 12 V ports. A group has a maximum
current of 660 mA, a route has a maximum current of 800 mA,
and the maximum total current is 2 A.
Group 1: 12 V of the AIDI_1 and DO/12V ports
Group 2: 12 V of the AIDI_2, COM1/AIDI_4, and COM3/12V
ports
Group 3: 12 V of the AIDI_3 and COM2/AIDI_5 ports

Wireless Supports wireless communication that complies with

communicatio IEEE802.15.4.
n

4G Supports the 4G module, SMS sending, and 3G communication,

and provides a standard SIM card slot.
1. China: 2G and 4G networks support China Unicom or China
Mobile SIM cards, and 3G networks support only China
Unicom SIM cards.
2. Outside China: Select SIM cards according to the following
wireless modes and frequency bands:
● 4G: LTE-FDD, covering frequency bands B1, B3, B5, B7, B8
and B20; LTE-TDD, covering frequency bands B38, B40,
and B41
● 3G: WCDMA, covering frequency bands B1, B5, and B8
● 2G: GSM, covering frequency bands 900 MHz/1800 MHz
NOTE
● The prerequisite for using a SIM card is that the site has signal
coverage.
● Due to the performance limitation of the wireless module, China
Telecom SIM cards are not supported.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Item Specifications

USB ● Supports USB 2.0 and 5 V, 1 A power supply.

● After installing the WiFi module, connect the WiFi module
to the ECC800-Pro using the app on the mobile phone or
pad to view the basic information about the smart module,
such as layout, resources, energy efficiency, environment,
and alarms.
● You can insert a USB flash drive to export historical data
and configuration files and import configuration files.

SW button ● Restores the default IP address, factory settings, and user

information.
● Supports RF_Z (802.15.4) networking.

Table 3-19 ECC800-Pro RF_Z parameters

Item Specifications

RF_Z operating 2405–2480 MHz

frequency

RF_Z EIRP (max.) 8 dBm

Table 3-20 ECC800-Pro 4G parameters

Item Specifications

Operating frequency ● 4G: LTE-FDD, covering frequency bands B1, B3, B5,
B7, B8 and B20; LTE-TDD, covering frequency bands
B38, B40, and B41
● 3G: WCDMA, covering frequency bands B1, B5, and
B8
● 2G: GSM, covering frequency bands 900 MHz/1800
MHz

EIRP (max.) 23 dBm

Communications Port
The ECC800-Pro provides the following communications ports. Figure 3-28 shows
the pins of the RJ45 port.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Figure 3-28 RJ45 port pins

There are four GE ports, that is, two WAN ports (WAN1 and WAN2) and two LAN
ports (LAN1/POE and LAN2/POE).

Table 3-21 GE port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin Pin1 GE1+

sequence
Pin2 GE1-

Pin3 GE2+

Pin4 GE3+

Pin5 GE3-

Pin6 GE2-

Pin7 GE4+

Pin8 GE4-

Indicator Green Linked, steady on

indicator

Yellow ACT data communication, blinking

indicator

Table 3-22 COM1/AIDI_4, COM2/AIDI_5 port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin Pin1 RS485+

sequence
Pin2 RS485-

Pin3 12V DC_OUT

Pin4 RS485+

Pin5 RS485-

Pin6 DI-

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Item Description

Pin7 DI+

Pin8 GND

Indicator Green Power output indicator

indicator ● Steady on: The 12 V DC output is normal.
● Off: No 12 V DC output is provided.

Table 3-23 COM3/12V port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin Pin1 RS485+

sequence
Pin2 RS485-

Pin3 12V DC_OUT

Pin4 RS485+

Pin5 RS485-

Pin6 -

Pin7 -

Pin8 GND

Indicator Green Power output indicator

indicator ● Steady on: The 12 V DC output is normal.
● Off: No 12 V DC output is provided.

Table 3-24 COM4/CAN port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin Pin1 RS485+

sequence
Pin2 RS485-

Pin3 -

Pin4 RS485+

Pin5 RS485-

Pin6 -

Pin7 CAN_H

Pin8 CAN_L

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

The following provides the AIDI_1, AIDI_2 and AIDI_3 ports pin definitions.

NOTE

● Pins 1, 2, 4, and 5 identify sensor types.

● Pin 3 and Pin 8 are power output ports.
● Pin 6 and Pin 7 collect sensor data. Pin 7 can detect current type sensors (4–20 mA). Pin
6 and Pin 7 can detect the output status of passive dry contact type sensors. Pin 3 and
Pin 7 can detect temperature sensors.

Table 3-25 AIDI_1, AIDI_2 and AIDI_3 ports pin definitions

Item Description

Pin Pin1 Type_1

sequence
Pin2 Type_2

Pin3 12V DC

Pin4 Type_3

Pin5 Type_4

Pin6 DI-

Pin7 DI+

Pin8 GND

Indicator Green Power output indicator

indicator ● Steady on: The 12 V DC output is normal.
● Off: No 12 V DC output is provided.

Table 3-26 DO/12V port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin Pin1 -
sequence
Pin2 -

Pin3 12V DC_OUT

Pin4 -

Pin5 -

Pin6 DO_OUT+

Pin7 DO_OUT-

Pin8 GND

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Item Description

Indicator Green Power output indicator

indicator ● Steady on: The 12 V DC output is normal.
● Off: No 12 V DC output is provided.

Table 3-27 USB port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin sequence Pin1 5V

Pin2 DM

Pin3 DP

Pin4 GND

Indicators

Table 3-28 Indicators on the ECC800-Pro main control module

Indicator Color Name Status Description

RUN Green Running status Steady on The power supply is normal,

indicator the program is being loaded.

Off The power supply is

abnormal.

Blinking at The software runs properly

long (the indicator blinks at 0.5
intervals Hz, on for 1s and then off
for 1s) or the ECC800-Pro
registers with the NetEco
successfully.

Blinking at The ECC800-Pro does not

short register with the NetEco
intervals (the indicator blinks at 5 Hz,
on for 0.125s and then off
for 0.125s).

ALM Red Alarm indicator Steady on A system failure alarm is

generated.

Off The system is normal.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Indicator Color Name Status Description

RF_Z Green Communication Blinking at A network is set up, and no

status indicator long node access is allowed (the
intervals indicator blinks at 0.5 Hz, on
for 1s and then off for 1s).

Blinking at A network is set up, and

super node access is allowed (the
short indicator blinks at 10 Hz, on
intervals for 0.05s and then off for
0.05s).

SW Button

Table 3-29 SW button description

Function Operation Description Indicator Status
Description

Wireless In non-wireless network (802.15.4) The RF_Z indicator is

network RF_Z pairing mode, press and hold down blinking at super
(802.15.4) the button for 3s to 5s to enter the short intervals.
pairing wireless network pairing mode.

In wireless network (802.15.4) The RF_Z indicator is

pairing mode, press and hold down blinking at long
the button for 3s to 5s to exit the intervals.
pairing mode; or the system
automatically exits the pairing mode
after 30 minutes without pressing
the button.

Press and hold down the button for The RF_Z indicator is
more than 8s to clear network steady on.
parameters.

WLAN enabling Press the button for less than 3s to None

enable WLAN.

Restoring the Press and hold down the button for None
default IP 1 minute.
address, factory
settings, and
user information

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

3.4.3.1.3 Power Module

Indicator

Table 3-30 PSU indicator description

Indicator Color Name Status Description

Green Power Steady on The converter has a power

indicator input.

Off The converter has no power

input or is faulty.

Blinking at The converter is being queried

long (the indicator blinks at 0.5 Hz,
intervals on for 1s and then off for 1s).

Blinking at The converter application

short program is being loaded (the
intervals indicator blinks at 4 Hz, on for
0.125s and then off for 0.125s).

Yellow Alarm Steady on The converter generates a

indicator forewarning indicating that
power will be limited due to
ambient overtemperature, or
generates a protection
shutdown alarm due to
ambient overtemperature or
undertemperature.

Power input overvoltage or

undervoltage protection

Reverse DC input connection

Slight current imbalance

Output overvoltage

Hibernation

Off The converter generates no

protection alarms.

Blinking at The communication between

long the converter and the outside is
intervals interrupted (the indicator blinks
at 0.5 Hz, on for 1s and then
off for 1s).

Red Fault Steady on The converter locks out due to

indicator output overvoltage.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Indicator Color Name Status Description

The converter delivers no

output due to internal faults.

Off The converter is working

properly.

3.4.3.2 Smart Cooling Product Control Unit

The control unit of the smart cooling product consists of a main control board and
a display unit that is integrated in the Converged Cabinet. The controller
implements functions such as logic control, data collection, control signal sending,
alarm reporting, data storage, and teamwork control. The smart cooling product
connects to the ECC over the FE port using the MAC protocol, and the ECC
connects to the NMS to realize remote control.

Main Functions
● Single unit control: When only one unit is running, the controller provides
logic control over components in the unit to meet the indoor temperature and
humidity requirements.
● Teamwork control: When multiple smart cooling products work cooperatively,
the controller optimally distributes the heat load, greatly lowering the power
consumption. Multiple smart cooling products provide backup for higher
reliability.
● Remote management: You can monitor, manage, and upgrade one or more
smart cooling products using the remote management function provided by
Huawei.
● Configuration synchronization: You can synchronize parameters between
smart cooling products on the touchscreen (optional) of the Converged
Cabinet, ECC800-Pro WebUI, or ECC800-Pro app.
● One-click export: You can export the alarms and logs of a smart cooling
product on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.
● Software upgrade: You can perform a remote upgrade on the touchscreen
(optional) of the Converged Cabinet, ECC800-Pro WebUI, or ECC800-Pro app.
● Alarm details query: You can view the possible causes of alarms and handling
suggestions on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Features
● The controller is highly precise and responsive.
● Automatically stores operation logs, 1500 historical alarms, and 30-day
temperature and humidity curves and displays these data on the touchscreen
(optional) of the Converged Cabinet.
● Provides protection functions such as automatic recovery after power failure
and shutdown for protection in the case of abnormal drainage, improving the
system reliability.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

● Displays the operating status and duration of the components of the smart
cooling product in real time on the touchscreen (optional) of the Converged
Cabinet.
● Provides RS485 and FE ports that support the MAC-Modbus protocol.
● Uses FE ports for teamwork control networking using the MAC protocol,
offering a higher transmission rate.

3.4.3.3 PAD
The PAD allows the wireless access from the data center management system. You
can monitor the equipment in the data center and environmental parameters in
real time over the app. The recommended model is T5-10.

Figure 3-29 PAD

Table 3-31 PAD structural specifications

Item Specifications

Dimensions (L x W x 243 mm x 164 mm x 7.8 mm

H)

Weight About 460 g

Table 3-32 PAD technical specifications

Item Specifications

Touchscreen 10.1-inch, 1920 x 1200 resolution, IPS screen, and multi-

touch

Storage ● Machine: 32 GB
● Memory: 3 GB
● Extension card: Micro SD, a maximum of 256 GB
(non-standard configuration)

Button/Port ● Touch button + power switch and volume button

● 3.5 mm stereo headphones port
● Micro SD card port
● MicroUSB port

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Item Specifications

Camera ● Rear camera: 8-megapixel, F2.4 aperture, automatic

focus
● Front camera: 2-megapixel, F2.4 aperture, fixed focus
● Sensor type: BSI
● Flash: not supported
● Video recording: rear camera up to 1080 pixels at 30
FPS; front camera up to 720 pixels at 30 FPS
● Zoom mode: digital zoom
● Photo resolution: rear camera up to 8 M (3264 x 2448
pixels); front camera up to 1.9 M (1600x1200 pixels)

Battery ● Materials: Li-polymer

● Capacity: 5100 mAh (typical value) or 4980 mAh
(rated value)
● WiFi connection/web page browse time: about 6.5
hours
● Power adapter charge time: about 3.5 hours (5 V 2 A
adapter)

3.4.3.4 WiFi Module

The WiFi module provides WiFi signals for equipment such as pads and mobile
phones to interact with the host computer.

Figure 3-30 WiFi module

Table 3-33 Technical specifications

Item Specifications

Wireless IEEE 802.11n, IEEE 802.11g, and IEEE 802.11b

standard

Network ● 11n: up to 150 Mbps

bandwidth ● 11g: up to 54 Mbps
● 11b: up to 11 Mbps

Frequency band 2.4–2.4835 GHz

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Item Specifications

Wireless 20 dBm (MAX EIRP)

transmission
power

Supported Windows 2000/XP/Vista/Linux/Win 7

operating
system

Port USB 2.0 Hi-Speed connector

Voltage range 5.0 V DC±5%

Operating –20°C to +70°C

temperature

Storage –40°C to +90°C

temperature

Relative 10%–90% RH (non-condensing)

humidity

Storage 5%–90% RH (non-condensing)

humidity

Power < 0.8 W

3.4.3.5 ETH Converter

The ETH converter is used to convert the Modbus–RTU protocol or CAN protocol
to the Modbus-MAC protocol for connecting to the PoE bus.

Figure 3-31 ETH converter

(1) Status indicator (2) BLINK button (3) COM1 communications

port

(4) COM2 communications (5) 48 V power port (6) PoE port

port

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Specifications

Table 3-34 ETH converter technical specifications

Item Specifications

Power ● DC input: terminal, with an input voltage of 36 V DC–60 V DC

input ● PoE power supply: one PoE port, 10/100M communication rate,
complying with IEEE802.3at

RS485/CA Provides two RS485/CAN ports. The default communications rate

N for the RS485 port is 9600 bit/s, and that for the CAN port is 125
kbit/s. Both ports match the RJ45 terminal shared by RS485 and
CAN.

BLINK If you press the BLINK button, the RUN indicator blinks
button intermittently at super short intervals (blinking at super short
intervals for 0.5s and then off for 0.5s) for 10 seconds.

E-label Supported

Indicators

Table 3-35 ETH converter indicators

Indicat Color Name Status Description
or

PWR Green Power input Steady on The power input is normal.

status
indicator Off There is no power input.

RUN Green Operating Off The power supply is

status abnormal.
indicator
Blinking at The ETH converter
long successfully registers with
intervals the ECC800-Pro and the
software runs properly (the
indicator blinks at 0.5 Hz, on
for 1s and then off for 1s).

Blinking at The communication fails or

short the ETH converter fails to
intervals register with the ECC800-Pro
(the indicator blinks at 4 Hz,
on for 0.125s and then off
for 0.125s).

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Indicat Color Name Status Description

or

Blinking The indicator blinks at super

short intervals for 0.5s
(blinking at 10 Hz, on for
0.05s and then off for 0.05s)
and then turns off for 0.5s.
The cycle lasts for 10s.

ALM Red Alarm Steady on A system failure alarm is

indicator generated.

Off No system alarm is

generated.

3.4.3.6 Smart ETH Gateway

A smart ETH gateway allows the extension of the 53.5 V DC power supply and FE
communication for the ECC800-Pro and can be flexibly deployed in a smart
module.

Figure 3-32 Smart ETH gateway

(1) PWR_IN cascading (2) FE_1 cascading (3) POE_1–2 ports (4) POE_3–4 ports
power port signal port

(5) 48V_OUT1 power (6) 48V_OUT2 power (7) FE_2 cascading (8) PWR_OUT
output port output port signal port cascading power port

(9) BLINK button (10) Status indicator

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Specifications

Table 3-36 Technical specifications for a smart ETH gateway

Item Specifications

Power input PWR_IN D-type power input terminal, for power cascading, input
voltage range: 45–55 V DC
Power of a single smart ETH gateway: max (2.7 A, 48 V DC);
power of cascaded smart ETH gateways: max (25 A, 48 V DC)

Power ● PWR_OUT D-type power output terminal, for power

output cascading, output voltage range: 45–55 V DC
● 48V_OUT1 and 48V_OUT2, terminal (1 A, 48 V DC), output
voltage range: 45–55 V DC

FE port Two FE ports, RJ45 terminal with an indicator, 10/100M

communication rate, for the cascading between smart ETH
gateways and the communication with the upper computer

PoE port Four PoE ports, RJ45 terminal with an indicator, 10/100M
communications rate, complying with IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u,
IEEE802.3af/at

BLINK If you press the BLINK button, the RUN indicator blinks
button intermittently at super short intervals (blinking at super short
intervals for 0.5s and then off for 0.5s) for 5 seconds.

Indicators

Table 3-37 Indicators on a smart ETH gateway

Indica Color Name Status Description
tor

PWR Green Power Steady on The power input is normal.

input status
indicator Off There is no power input.

RUN Green Module Off The power supply is

running abnormal.
status
indicator Blinking at The smart ETH gateway
long successfully registers with
intervals the ECC800-Pro and the
software runs properly
(the indicator blinks at 0.5
Hz, on for 1s and then off
for 1s).

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Indica Color Name Status Description

tor

Blinking The indicator blinks at

super short intervals for
0.5s (blinking at 10 Hz, on
for 0.05s and then off for
0.05s) and then turns off
for 0.5s. The cycle lasts for
5s.

ALM Red Alarm Steady on The PoE output current is

indicator overloaded.

Off The PoE output is normal

or not connected.

3.4.3.7 (Optional) eLight

The eLight system consists of the eLight power system, eLight actuator, eLight
strip light, and cables.

Figure 3-33 eLight strip light

Figure 3-34 eLight actuator

NOTE

The appearance of the eLight actuator depends on the actual delivery.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Table 3-38 Description of the eLight strip light colors

Scenario Light Color Remarks

Non-associated Blue -
alarm severity NOTE
On the ECC800-Pro WebUI, set
Associated Alarm Severity to None.

Associated alarm Mapping between smart module Critical and major

severity alarm severities and strip light alarms are
colors: associated by
● Critical: red default. Alarms of
any severity can be
● Major: orange associated manually.
● Minor: yellow Alarms are
● Warning: white associated with the
eLight on both ends.
● No alarm: strip light off If associated alarms
at multiple severities
appear, the strip light
color indicates only
the highest alarm
severity.

eLight fault The eLight disconnects from the -

ECC800-Pro and blinks in red.

Table 3-39 eLight technical specifications

Item Specifications

eLight power supply ● Rated input voltage: 220/230/240 V AC

● Frequency: 50/60 Hz
● Output: ≥ 93 W, 24 V DC
● Certification: CE

eLight actuator ● Rated input voltage: 24 V DC

● Two output channels. The I output is connected to
the RGBW flexible strip light, and supplies different
voltages depending on host instructions so that the
light can be in different colors. The II output
supplies a fixed voltage of 24 V DC.
● Modbus communications protocol, RS485 port, two
RJ45 ports
● Certification: CE

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Item Specifications

eLight strip light ● Rated input voltage: 24 V DC

● Light type: RGBW LED strip light, in different colors
depending on instructions
● Power: RGB fully on under the maximum working
condition, power P ≤ 12 W/m
● Installation mode: snap-fit in a sheet metal light slot
● Certification: CE and CCC

IP rating ≥ IP20

Environment ● Operating temperature range: 4°C to 40°C

● Humidity range: 5%–95%, non-condensing

3.4.3.8 Environment Monitoring System

3.4.3.8.1 (Optional) WLDS900 Water Sensor

The WLDS900 water sensor with the BOM number of 33010352 consists of a
water detection cable, a water detector, and a conversion cable.

Figure 3-35 WLDS900 water sensor

Table 3-40 Technical specifications of the WLDS900 water sensor

Item Specification

Operating 12 V DC (9–16 V DC)

voltage

Operating –20°C to +70°C

temperature

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Item Specification

Storage –40°C to +85°C

temperature

Humidity 10%–80% RH (non-condensing)

3.4.3.8.2 (Optional) Electrode Water Sensor

The electrode water sensor with the BOM number of 33010444 contains electrode
probes and cables.

Figure 3-36 Electrode water sensor

Table 3-41 Technical specifications of the electrode water sensor

Item Specification

Operating –40°C to +80°C

temperature

Storage –40°C to +80°C

temperature

Service life 10 years

3.4.3.8.3 T/H Sensor

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Figure 3-37 Appearance

(1) RS485-OUT (2) RS485-IN (3) DIP switch (4) Button

(5) NTC1–3 (6) NTC4–6 (7) Display

T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 02312PBL)

Table 3-42 T/H sensor specifications

Item Temperature Humidity

Measurement –40°C to +70°C 1%–99% RH

range

Measurement ≤ ±1°C (25°C) ≤ ±5% RH (25°C, 20%–80%

precision RH)

Extended Provides two RJ45 ports to connect to six NTC temperature

temperature sensors, each RJ45 port connecting to three NTC
collection port temperature sensors.

Signal port RS485

Power supply 5–16 V DC (typical value 12 V DC)

Power < 280 mW

consumption

Storage –40°C to +70°C

environment

Weight About 85 g

3.4.3.8.4 Temperature Sensor

The temperature sensor (BOM number: 33010348) is used for surface temperature
measurement, industrial process control, and measurement instruments.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Figure 3-38 Temperature sensor

Table 3-43 Temperature sensor specifications

Item Specifications

Measurement range –20ºC to +70ºC

Measurement precision ±1ºC (25ºC)

Operating temperature –10ºC to +55ºC

Operating voltage 10–16 V DC

Storage temperature –40ºC to +70ºC

3.4.3.8.5 Ambient T/H Sensor

Figure 3-39 Appearance

The T/H sensor (BOM number: 33010516) uses an RJ45 port.

NOTE

The appearance of the T/H sensor depends on the onsite delivery.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Figure 3-40 RJ45 port pins

Table 3-44 RJ45 port pin definitions

Pin Description

Pin1 or Pin 4 A

Pin2 or Pin 5 B

Pin3 V+

Pin6 V-

Pin7 Reserved

Table 3-45 T/H sensor specifications

Item Specifications

Temperature measuring range –20°C to +80°C

Temperature accuracy ±0.5°C (25°C)

≤ ±1°C (full measuring range)

Operating temperature –20°C to +80°C

Operating voltage 9–16 V DC

Storage temperature –40°C to +80°C

Output Two RJ45 ports, bidirectional cascading

3.4.3.8.6 Smoke Detector

A smoke detector detects smoke around cabinets.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Figure 3-41 Smoke detector

Table 3-46 Smoke detector technical specifications

Item Specifications

Operating voltage 9–27 V

Alarm current < 20 mA

Indication Monitoring: The red indicator blinks

once every 3 to 8 seconds.
Alarm reporting: The red indicator is
steady on.

Operating temperature –10°C to +55°C

Ambient humidity ≤ 95% RH

Dimensions (H x W x D) 31 mm x 75 mm x 51 mm (with the

base)

Weight 50 g

3.4.3.9 Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock

The cabinet electronic clasp lock is used to manage access control. It can be
automatically unlocked, or manually locked and unlocked.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Figure 3-42 Cabinet electronic clasp lock

(1) LED indicator (2) DIP switch (3) RJ45 power port

Table 3-47 RJ45 port definitions

No. Pin Description Description

1 RS485+ RS485+

2 RS485- RS485-

3 +12 V power supply +12VDC

4 RS485+ RS485+

5 RS485- RS485-

6 - -

7 - -

8 Ground GND

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Table 3-48 LED indicator status

Indi Color Name Operat Status Description
cato ion
r

RUN Green Module / Blinki ● The door lock is paired

running ng with the host, and the
indicator power supply is normal:
The indicator blinks at
0.5 Hz (on for 1s and
then off for 1s).
● The door lock fails to
pair with the host: The
indicator blinks at 4 Hz
(on for 0.125s and then
off for 0.125s).

Off The power supply is

abnormal.

Press Blinki ● The indicator blinks at

SW. ng super short intervals for
interm 0.5s, and then off for
ittentl 0.5s.
y at ● The indicator blinks at
super super short intervals
short (blinking at 10 Hz, on for
interv 0.05s and then off for
als 0.05s). The cycle lasts for
5s.

ALM Red Alarm / Stead A system failure alarm is

indicator y on generated.

Off The system is normal.

3.4.3.10 (Optional) Room Access Control System

3.4.3.10.1 Access Actuator

The access actuator is the control component for the aisle door in a smart module.
It connects to the ECC800-Pro controller over FE and wireless networking
(802.15.4). It opens the magnetic lock by detecting the card swiping information
of the card reader, door open button information, and fire linkage information. It
has access right management, access event record, and alarm record functions.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Figure 3-43 Access actuator

(1) 48 V power port (2) POE port (3) RS485 port COM2

(4) RS485 port COM1 (5) Address DIP switch (6) Status indicator

(7) BLINK button (8) WG_2 Wiegand interface (9) WG_1 Wiegand interface

(10) AI/DI_2 dry contact (11) AI/DI_1 dry contact (12) LOCK/GND/GATE/COM door
(Reserved port for linkage (Reserved port for exit status or magnetic lock port
control or third-party fire button)
extinguishing system dry
contacts)

Specifications

Table 3-49 Access actuator technical specifications

Item Specifications

Power input ● DC input: Terminal, with input voltage of 36–60 V DC

● POE input: One POE port that complies with IEEE802.3at.

POE port FE communication, 10/100M communications rate

Wireless One wireless communication port that complies with

communicat IEEE802.15.4, mutual backup with FE communication
ion

AI/DI port Two AI/DI ports, can connect to the fire alarm and exit button

DO/DI port ● One 12 V DC power output that controls magnetic locks,

terminal
● One DI input port for connecting to the door status switch

RS485 serial Two RS485 ports (one route) with the default communications
port rate of 9600 bit/s, physical port cascading supported (reserved
expansion function)

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Item Specifications

Wiegand Two Wiegand interfaces, 12 V DC card reader operating power

interface output; two routes of card readers (non-fingerprint readers) can
operate at the same time.

BLINK ● Press the button for less than 1 second to start blinking.
button ● Hold down the button for 1–5 seconds to search for a network
and start networking.
● Hold down the button for more than 10 seconds to clear
network parameters.

Address DIP 4-pin address DIP switch

switch

E-label Supported

Indicators

Table 3-50 Access actuator indicator description

Indicator Color Name Status

PWR Green Power input status ● Steady on: The

indicator power input is
normal.
● Off: There is no
power input.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Indicator Color Name Status

RUN Green Communication status ● Off: The power is

indicator abnormal or the
board program is
loading.
● Blinking at long
intervals: The access
actuator
successfully registers
with the ECC800-
Pro and the
software runs
properly (the
indicator blinks at
0.5 Hz, on for 1s
and then off for 1s).
● Blinking at short
intervals: The
communication fails
or the access
actuator fails to
register with the
ECC800-Pro (the
indicator blinks at 4
Hz, on for 0.125s
and then off for
0.125s).
● Blinking: The
indicator blinks at
super short intervals
for 0.5s (blinking at
10 Hz, on for 0.05s
and then off for
0.05s) and then
turns off for 0.5s.
The cycle lasts for
5s.

ALM Red Alarm indicator ● Steady on: A system

failure alarm is
generated.
● Off: No system
alarm is generated.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Indicator Color Name Status

RF_Z Green Wireless ● Steady on: No

communication status network parameters
indicator exist, or a network
is to be created.
● Blinking at long
intervals: A network
is set up, and no
node access is
allowed (the
indicator blinks at
0.5 Hz, on for 1s
and then off for 1s).
● Blinking at super
short intervals: A
network is set up,
and node access is
allowed (the
indicator blinks at
10 Hz, on for 0.05s
and then off for
0.05s).
● Blinking
intermittently at
super short
intervals: The access
actuator is
searching for a
network (the
indicator blinks at
super short intervals
for 0.5s and then
turns off for 0.5s).

Communications Ports
The access actuator provides one DO port (LOCK/GND) and one DI port (GATE/
COM). Table 3-51 lists the LOCK/GND/GATE/COM port pin definitions.

Table 3-51 LOCK/GND/GATE/COM port pin definitions

Item Description

LOCK/GND LOCK 12 V_OUT

(control
magnetic GND GND
locks) pin
sequence

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Item Description

GATE/COM GATE DI1

(door
status) pin COM COM
sequence

3.4.3.10.2 Fingerprint and Card Reader with a Keypad

Figure 3-44 Fingerprint and card reader with a keypad

(1) Fingerprint reader (2) LED indicator

Table 3-52 Specifications for the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad
Item Specifications

Dimensions (L x W x H) 156 mm x 53 mm x 38 mm

Rated operating voltage 12 V DC±15%

Rated operating current 300 mA±15%

Card type supported IC card

Authorized storage A maximum of 3000 authorized users, with a

maximum of 6000 fingerprints

Communications mode RS485 and Wiegand communications ports

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Table 3-53 Access control device operating status

Item New Version

Standby LED indicator The indicator is steady

blue.

Fingerprint reader The indicator is off.

Unauthorized fingerprint LED indicator The indicator blinks blue,

collection red, blue, red, and blue
in order.

Fingerprint reader The indicator turns on

(white).

Buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds three.

Authorized fingerprint LED indicator The indicator blinks blue,

collection red, and blue in order.

Fingerprint reader The indicator turns on

(white).

Buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds once.

Card swiping LED indicator The indicator blinks blue,

red, and blue in order.

Buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds once.

3.4.3.10.3 Fingerprint and Card Reader

Figure 3-45 Fingerprint and card reader

(1) Fingerprint reader (2) LED indicator

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Table 3-54 Fingerprint and card reader

Item Specifications

Dimensions (L x W x H) 156 mm x 53 mm x 38 mm

Rated operating voltage 12 V DC±5%

Rated operating current 300 mA±5%

Card type supported IC card

Authorized storage A maximum of 3000 authorized users, with a

maximum of 6000 fingerprints

Communications mode RS485 and Wiegand communications ports

Table 3-55 Access control device operating status

Item New Version

Standby LED indicator The indicator is steady

blue.

Fingerprint reader The indicator is off.

Unauthorized fingerprint LED indicator The indicator blinks blue,

collection red, blue, red, and blue
in order.

Fingerprint reader The indicator turns on

(white).

Buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds three.

Authorized fingerprint LED indicator The indicator blinks blue,

collection red, and blue in order.

Fingerprint reader The indicator turns on

(white).

Buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds once.

Card swiping LED indicator The indicator blinks blue,

red, and blue in order.

Buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds once.

3.4.3.10.4 Card Reader with a Keypad

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Figure 3-46 Card reader with a keypad

Table 3-56 Technical specifications of a card reader with a keypad

Item Specifications

Dimensions (L x W x H) 114 mm x 63 mm x 25 mm

Operating voltage Operating voltage range: 10.8–13.2 V DC; rated

voltage: 12 V DC

Operating current Static standby current: 80 mA; dynamic operating

current (card swiping, key pressing): 150 mA;
minimum input current: 12 V DC/300 mA

Communication mode Wiegand communications port

3.4.3.10.5 Magnetic Lock

Figure 3-47 Double door magnetic lock

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Figure 3-48 Single door magnetic lock

3.4.3.11 Video Management System

The video surveillance subsystem consists of the camera and network video
recorder and implements real-time monitoring, video storage, and video playback.

3.4.3.11.1 Camera
The C3220 camera is a two-megapixel infrared zoom dome camera that can be
ceiling-mounted.

Figure 3-49 C3220 camera

Table 3-57 C3220 camera technical specifications

Item Specifications

Image sensor 1/2.7'' two-megapixel progressive scan CMOS

Minimum illumination ● Color: 0.002 lux (F1.2, AGC ON, 1/30s shutter
speed)
● Black/White: 0.0005 lux (F1.2, AGC ON, 1/30s
shutter speed); 0 lux (infrared illuminator
enabled)

Wide dynamic range 120 dB

Focal length 2.8–12 mm

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Item Specifications

Video compression H.265/H.264/MJPEG

standard

Maximum resolution 1920x1080

Power supply 12 V DC, PoE

IP rating IP67

Vandal resistant rating IK10

3.4.3.11.2 IVS1800

Figure 3-50 Appearance

Table 3-58 Performance specifications

Category Item IVS1800-C08-04T IVS1800-C08-04T (64CH)

(16CH)

Device Networ 16-channel 1080p, up 64-channel 1080p, up to 320

performa k video to 160 Mbit/s access Mbit/s access bandwidth
nce inputs bandwidth Up to 160 Mbit/s access
bandwidth with intelligent
services enabled

Video 16-channel 1080p, up 64-channel 1080p, up to 320

transfer to 160 Mbit/s Mbit/s forwarding bandwidth
forwarding bandwidth Up to 160 Mbit/s forwarding
bandwidth with intelligent
services enabled

Playbac 16-channel 1080p, up 32-channel 1080p, up to 160

k/ to 80 Mbit/s playback Mbit/s playback bandwidth
Downlo bandwidth
ad

Platform IP 16 cameras to one 64 cameras to one IVS1800

performa cameras IVS1800
nce connect
ed

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Table 3-59 Hardware specifications

Category Item Specifications

Storage Hard disk 8

capacity quantity

Hard disk SATA3.0

port

Hard disk Enterprise-level disks: 4 TB, 6 TB, 8 TB, or 10 TB

type Monitoring-level disks: 4 TB or 6 TB

Controller Processor Hi3559A

Memory 8 GB DDR4

External Network Two 10/100/1000 Mbit/s Ethernet ports

ports port

USB ports Three USB ports (two USB 2.0 ports on the front
panel and one USB 3.0 port on the rear panel)

Audio 1 channel, RCA port

input

Audio 1 channel, RCA port

output

Alarm port 4-channel alarm input, 2-channel alarm output

Other Power 124 W

specificatio consumpti
ns on (8 hard
disks
included)

Power 110–220 V AC
supply

Weight 6.60 kg
(hard disks
excluded)

Dimensions 86 mm x 442 mm x 467 mm

(H x W x
D)

3.4.3.11.3 VCN510

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Figure 3-51 Appearance

Table 3-60 Performance specifications

Item Specifications

Device access and video storage Supports a maximum of eight video

access channels or 128 Mbit/s video
access bandwidth.

Video forwarding Supports a maximum of 32 video

forwarding channels or 256 Mbit/s
video forwarding bandwidth.

Video playback and download Supports a maximum of eight video

playback and download channels or
128 Mbit/s video playback and
download bandwidth.

Ingress and egress bandwidth The ingress bandwidth does not

exceed 128 Mbit/s.
The egress bandwidth does not exceed
256 Mbit/s.

Table 3-61 Hardware specifications

Item Specifications

Number of disks 2

Whether the hard disk supports hot No

swap

Supported hard disk type 3 TB, 4 TB, 6 TB, or 8 TB SATA disks

CPU type and maximum number of 1 x ARM Cortex A17 Quad-core @Max.
supported CPUs 1.4 GHz

Memory capacity 1 GB

Network port Two GE network ports

Power parameters ● One power module

● AC power (100 V AC to 240 V AC;
50 or 60 Hz)

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Item Specifications

Weight in full configuration (including ≤ 5 kg

disks)

Maximum power consumption < 60 W

(including hard disks)

Dimensions (H x W x D) 43.6 mm x 442 mm x 310 mm (1 U,

excluding the panel)
43.6 mm x 442 mm x 320 mm (1 U,
including the panel)

3.4.4 (Optional) NetEco Intelligent Data Center Management

System

3.4.4.1 System Overview

With a flexible structure and modular design, the NetEco can manage facilities of
one data center or centrally manage facilities of multiple data centers in different
regions.
The management system provides a GUI to implement comprehensive
management functions based on requirements. The system mainly monitors
following devices:
● Power equipment: smart cooling product, Power distribution module, UPS,
and so on
● Environment equipment: water sensor, temperature and humidity sensor, and
so on
● Video equipment: camera, and so on
● Access control equipment: A standard access management system is
integrated to manage and monitor key information such as door status, card
swiping, and permission setting.
● Standard network management interface: The NetEco provides SNMP
interfaces to communicate with third-party NMSs. The system can be
customized to support other protocols for the access from different devices.

Figure 3-52 Networking diagram

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

3.4.4.2 Server
The NetEco can be deployed on one of the following servers according to the
management capability requirement.

Table 3-62 Server

Model Configuration

TaiShan 200 (Model 2280) 2 x Kunpeng 920 [email protected] GHz, 4 x 32

standard configuration GB memory, 2 x 1.2 TB + 8 x 1.8 TB drives

TaiShan 200 (Model 2180) basic 1 x Kunpeng 920 [email protected] GHz, 2 x 32

configuration GB memory, 2 x 1.2 TB drives

2288X V5-H22X-standard 2 x 5218 [email protected] GHz CPU, 4 x 32 GB

configuration memory, 2 x 1.2 TB + 8 x 1.8 TB SAS drives

2288X V5-H22X-basic 2 x 4208 [email protected] GHz CPU, 2 x 32 GB

configuration memory, 2 x 1.2 TB SAS drives

3.4.4.3 LAN Switch

Select LAN switches based on site requirements.

Table 3-63 LAN switch

Model Maximum Number of Ports

S5331-H24P4XC Twenty-four 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet ports, four

10GE SFP+ ports

S5731-H24P4XC Twenty-four 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet ports, four

10GE SFP+ ports

3.4.5 (Optional) Edge Data Center Management System

The edge data center management system monitors the running status of the
entire network on the GIS home page. After an abnormal site is detected, you can
double-click it to access the site monitoring page. Environment, energy
consumption, key device, alarm, and security monitoring is provided on the site
monitoring page.

● Environment monitoring: Monitors the temperature, humidity, water, and

smoke.
● Energy consumption monitoring: Displays the PUE and load rate of sites in
real time.
● Key device monitoring: Monitors the UPS, air conditioners, and related power
distribution devices in real time, and displays the energy flow diagram and air
conditioner link diagram.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

● Alarm monitoring: Displays site alarm information in real time and quickly
locates device faults.
● Security monitoring: Monitors the cabinet door status and cameras in sites.

Figure 3-53 Networking mode

3.5 Surge Protection and Grounding System

3.5.1 Surge Protection Solution

The smart module is mainly used for building data centers. Its power distribution
system is a subsystem of the building power distribution system. Class I surge
protective devices (SPDs) of the power system are provided by the general low-
voltage power distribution room or cabinet of the building.

3.5.2 Grounding Solution

Equipotential Grounding for Cabinets in the Module
A general ground bar is configured in the Converged Cabinet. The ground
terminals in other cabinets are connected to the general ground bar by cables
with a cross-sectional area no less than 16 mm2. The general ground bar is
connected to the floor ground bar (FEB) or collective ground bar (25 mm x 3 mm
copper bar laid along cable trays or walls) of the equipment room by ground
cables with a cross-sectional area no less than 35 mm2.

NOTE

The AC input power is from the upstream power distribution system. The cross-sectional
areas of ground cables are determined according to IEC 60364-5-54.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Figure 3-54 Equipotential connection of the cabinet system

(1) General ground bar

Cabinet Grounding
● Metal components and parts of cabinets are properly connected. A structural
connection area is protected and applied with antioxidants. An area protected
with painting should ensure proper metal surface contact for two connected
components. The DC resistance is within 0.1 ohm between any two connected
metal components. Use a ground cable to connect two metal components
that cannot be directly connected, such as cabinets and cabinet doors. A cable
for connecting these two metal components has a minimum cross-sectional
area of 6 mm2.
● A ground bar or main ground point is provided in each cabinet for equipment
grounding. The ground bar does not have to be insulated.
● The ground terminal should be greater than or equal to M8. A yellow ground

label such as is attached close to the main ground terminal for

cabinets.
● Connect equipotential cables to metal components without carrying currents
in the module, such as metal doors and windows, cable trays, and ESD floor
supports. Each equipotential cable has a minimum cross-sectional area of 6
mm2.

3.6 Integrated Cabling System

Power Cable
Power cables include the input power cables for the Converged Cabinet, power
cables from the UPS to the busbar and BCB box, power cables from the BCB box
to lithium batteries, smart cooling product power cables, PDU2000 power cables,
AC power cables (such as the ECC800-Pro power cables and IVS power cables).

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 3 System Architecture

Ground Cable
Ground cables include those for the Converged Cabinet, IT cabinet, lithium battery,
and smart cooling product.

Signal Cable
Signal cables include the signal cables for the Converged Cabinet, UPS, from
lithium batteries to the UPS, and between lithium batteries, as well as the signal
cables for the smart cooling product, water sensor, T/H sensor, smoke detector,
video, and intelligent spring lock.

3.7 Fire Extinguishing System

Huawei provides only sensors for the fire extinguishing system in the smart
module. Other components need to be prepared by the customer.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

4 Installation Guide

4.1 Installation Preparations

4.1.1 Tools and Instruments

This section lists the tools and instruments required for installation.

NOTICE

● Use insulated tools. The following figure is for reference only.

● After installing power terminals, periodically check whether they are tightened,
and whether rust, corrosion, or other foreign objects exist. If necessary, clean
the terminals and tighten the bolts. If the battery bolts are loosely connected,
the voltage drop may be too high, or the battery may be burnt when the
current is large.

Table 4-1 General tools and instruments

Name, Specifications, and Appearance

Protective gloves Marker Measuring tape (5 Level

m)

Step ladder (2 m) Phillips Flat-head Torque wrench

screwdriver (M4, screwdriver (2-5
M6, and M8) mm)

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Name, Specifications, and Appearance

Adjustable wrench Socket wrench Hex key (5 mm) Laser locator

(6") M6/M8/M12

Right angle Electrician's knife Impact tool Utility knife

Needle-nose Diagonal pliers RJ45 crimping Insulation tape

pliers tool

Wire stripper Hydraulic pliers Wire clippers Crimping tool

Power cable Power cable Clamp meter Multimeter

cutter crimping tool

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Name, Specifications, and Appearance

Electroprobe Cable tie Rubber mallet Heat-shrink

tubing

Electric Heat gun Hammer drill -

screwdriver

Table 4-2 Tools and instruments for installing smart cooling products
Name, Specifications, and Appearance

Flashlight Hacksaw Pallet truck Electronic balance

Antifreeze gloves Cutter Welding torch 5% silver welding

rod

Oxygen Acetylene Hot melt device Clamp meter

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Name, Specifications, and Appearance

Pipe bender Insulation gloves Pressure gauge (1 Rubber hose (3

PCS)a PCS)a

Nitrogenb Reducing valvec Vacuum pumpd Water pipe thread

sealante

a. Pressure gauge and rubber hose: dedicated for R410A. The measuring range
of the pressure gauges must be at least 4.0 MPa, and the rubber hoses must
withstand a pressure of at least 4.5 MPa. Ensure that the rubber pipes match
the 1/4 inch needle valves inside the unit. If necessary, prepare needle valve
adapters.
b. Dry nitrogen.
c. Nitrogen reducing valve: A reducing valve must be installed on the head of
the nitrogen cylinder, and the reducing valve range must be at least 4.0 MPa.
d. Vacuum pump airflow: 2–4 L/s; absolute vacuum: ≤ 60 Pa.
e. For equipment with humidifiers, ensure that the water pipe thread sealant
can resist temperatures higher than 85°C and the following requirements are
met:
● Applicable to all pipe materials
● Anaerobic metal pipe thread sealant with PTEF as the padding
● Maximum gap: 0.5 mm
● Pressure resistance: above 1.6 MPa
● Compliant with the industry standard JB∕T7311-2008 Technical Specification
for the Application of Anaerobic Glue in Engineering Machinery

4.1.2 Personnel Requirements

Only trained and qualified personnel who fully understand basic safety
precautions are allowed to install and operate a modular data center.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

CAUTION

Huawei will not be liable for any consequence caused by the violation of this
document.

The requirements are as follows:

● Customers' installation personnel must be trained by Huawei and understand
how to install and operate a modular data center.
● The number of installation personnel varies based on the project progress and
installation environment. Typically, two to three persons are required.

4.1.3 Installation Environment Check

Ensure that the installation environment meets the requirements before
installation.

Table 4-3 Installation environment checklist

Check Item Specifications Check Result

Bearing capacity ● Standard live load of the computer □ Passed □ Failed

room: 8–12 kN/m2
● Suspended load of the main
equipment room: 1.2 kN/m2
● Standard live load of the battery
room: 16 kN/m2

Levelness Allowed deviation: 3/2000 mm □ Passed □ Failed

Equipment room ≥ 2.6m □ Passed □ Failed

height

Equipment room 8-30 m2 □ Passed □ Failed

area

Door size Height > 2.2 m; width > 0.9 m □ Passed □ Failed

Elevator Elevator bearing capacity > 1.5 t □ Passed □ Failed

Elevator internal size: height > 2.4 m,
depth > 1.4 m
Elevator door size: height > 2.2 m; width
> 0.9 m

Power supply 380 V AC/400 V AC/415 V AC, 3 Ph, 50 □ Passed □ Failed

Hz/60 Hz

Lighting ● Equipment room: 500 lx □ Passed □ Failed

● Monitoring center: 500 lx
● Test area: 500 lx

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Check Item Specifications Check Result

Floor drain DN50 or larger, made of cast iron or □ Passed □ Failed

stainless steel

Grounding A general ground bar is configured in □ Passed □ Failed

the Converged Cabinet. The general
ground point in each cabinet connects
to the general ground bar in the
Converged Cabinet. The general ground
bar in the Converged Cabinet connects
to the floor ground bar or collective
ground bar.

Water port Condensate drain outlet: for draining □ Passed □ Failed

condensate from the smart cooling
product.

Humidifier water pipe port: Connects to □ Passed □ Failed

external water pipes to supply water to
the humidifier.

NOTE

If any of the requirements is not met, contact Huawei technical support.

NOTICE

The UPS can generate large leakage currents. A circuit breaker equipped with an
RCD is not recommended. If leakage protection is required, select a recommended
upstream circuit breaker for the smart module.

Table 4-4 Recommended circuit breaker (NetCol500)

Load Recommende One Cooling Terminal Earth

d Cable and Only Smart Specification Leakage
Circuit Cooling s Circuit
Breaker Product Breaker
Specification
s

≤ 8.5 kW Circuit MCB D63/3P - 100 mA

breaker
specifications

Input power 5 x 8 AWG 10 mm2 cord -

cable end terminal
specifications

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

NOTE

The customer needs to purchase power cables based on site requirements.

4.1.4 Site Requirements

NOTE

● The cabinet layouts shown in the figures are for ease of description and do not provide
reference for engineering layout.
● If the site conditions do not meet the space requirements, contact Huawei technical
support.

Figure 4-1 Site space requirements

4.1.5 Installation Scenarios

NOTE

The component layout illustrates only the positions of components. The actual component
installation positions prevail.

Different quantities of batteries can be installed in the Converged Cabinet

depending on configurations. Figure 4-2 shows the recommended layout.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-2 Component layout in the Converged Cabinet

You are advised to number cabinets and PDU2000s based on Figure 4-3.
NOTE

● The following describes how to number cabinets and PDU2000s in a scenario with five
cabinets.
● (1), (2), and (3) refer to the cabinet number, and A and B refer to the PDU2000 number.
● You are advised to number cabinets from left to right.
● The Converged Cabinet does not have to be numbered.
● PDU2000s are deployed at the cabinet rear door and are recommended to be numbered
from exterior to interior.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-3 Number example

4.1.6 Smart Cooling Product Installation

Installation Dimension
Smart cooling product outdoor units are available in three models, NetCol500-
A018, NetCol500-A020, and NetCol500-A021, Figure 4-4, Figure 4-5 and Figure
4-6 show the dimensions of NetCol500-A018, NetCol500-A020, and NetCol500-
A021.

NOTE

NetCol500-A018, NetCol500-A020, and NetCol500-A021 are installed in the same way. This
manual uses figures of NetCol500-A018 as examples.

Figure 4-4 Installation dimensions of NetCol500-A018

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-5 Installation dimensions of NetCol500-A020

Figure 4-6 Installation dimensions of NetCol500-A021

Unit
1 MPa ≈ 10 bar

1 MPa ≈ 145 psi

1 MPa ≈ 10.2 kgf/cm2

4.2 Hardware Installation

The angle of door opening by the gas spring is 110°. Ensure that the door opening
angle is less than 110°.

4.2.1 Transportation and Unpacking

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 100

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

4.2.1.1 Cabinet Transportation and Unpacking

Context
● Only trained personnel are allowed to move the cabinet. Remove the packed
cabinet from the pallet using a pallet truck and move the cabinet to the
installation position.
● To prevent the cabinet from falling over, secure it to the pallet truck using
ropes before moving it.
● To prevent shocks or falls, move the cabinet gently. After placing the cabinet
in the installation position, unpack it and take care to prevent scratches. Keep
the cabinet steady during unpacking.
● If the cabinet installation environment is in poor condition, to well store the
cabinet after it is unpacked, take measures to prevent dust. You can wrap the
cabinet with the original plastic coat.

NOTICE

Do not tear down the transparent film from the glass door during the installation.
The film will be removed after the entire module is installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Use a pallet truck to transport the cabinet to the installation position.
Step 2 Check that the cabinet package is intact.
Step 3 Cut off and remove the binding straps, and remove the packing.
Step 4 Remove the pallet from a common cabinet (IT cabinet and network cabinet).
1. Remove the plastic bag and take out the fitting box.
2. Check the cabinet exterior for damage. If any damage is found, notify the
carrier immediately.
3. Check against the packing list that the equipment and fittings are correct and
complete. If some fittings are missing or do not comply with the packing list,
record the information and contact your local Huawei office immediately.
4. After checking that the cabinet is intact, remove the screw assemblies that
secure the cabinet to the pallet, as shown in Figure 4-7.

NOTICE

Set the screw assemblies aside for they will be used in installation steps.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-7 Removing an ordinary cabinet

5. Remove the cabinet from the pallet and move the cabinet to the installation
position.

NOTICE

To avoid personal injury, prevent the cabinet from falling over during
transportation.

Step 5 Remove the pallet from the Converged Cabinet.

1. Remove the plastic bag and take out the fitting box, ramps (optional), and
sliders.
NOTE

Obtain the paper documents about the UPS from the fitting box.
2. After checking that the Converged Cabinet is intact, remove the L-shaped
brackets that secure the cabinet to the pallet.
a. Open the front and rear doors of the cabinet, and remove the cabinet
lower sealing plates.
b. Remove the L-shaped brackets.
c. Reinstall the cabinet lower sealing plates, and close the front and rear
doors of the cabinet.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 102

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-8 Removing the cabinet lower sealing plates

Figure 4-9 Removing the L-shaped brackets

Figure 4-10 Installing the cabinet lower sealing plates

3. Connect the ramps to the rear door side of the pallet and extend the ramps,
and then clamp the sliders at the bottom of the ramps, as shown in Figure
4-11. (Optional)

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 103

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-11 Installing ramps

4. Raise the six leveling feet to the highest point using an adjustable wrench,
and push the cabinet to the installation position over castors. (Optional)

----End

4.2.1.2 Smart Cooling Product Transportation and Unpacking

Checking the Outdoor Unit Upon Arrival

Step 1 After the outdoor unit is delivered onsite, check the overtemperature mark.

Overtemperature marks are attached to the outer package and indicate whether
the ambient temperature during transportation exceeds the threshold. If yes, the
corresponding temperature mark background turns black, as shown in Figure
4-12.

Figure 4-12 Overtemperature mark

● If none of the three marks turn black, the transportation meets requirements
and the outdoor unit can be installed after its package is removed as
instructed in Unpacking the Outdoor Unit.
● If the mark with 60 turns black, unpack the outdoor unit and open its top
cover, front panel, and left front panel. Then check whether there is trace of
liquid around the safety valve connector. If yes, replace the safety valve. If no,
install the outdoor unit. For position of safety valve, see the overtemperature
mark.
● If the marks with 60, 65 turn black or all the marks turn black, ask Huawei to
confirm whether the unit can be used.

----End

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Unpacking the Outdoor Unit

Step 1 Verify that the outdoor unit package is intact. If any damage is found, notify the
carrier immediately.
Step 2 Remove the package.
1. Remove the straps, outer packing materials, cushioning materials, and then
plastic film.
2. Check that the outdoor unit exterior is intact and free of collision and
scratches. If any damage is found, notify the carrier immediately.
Step 3 Check the type and quantity of fittings against the packing list. If some fittings are
missing or do not comply with the packing list, record the information and contact
your local Huawei office immediately.
Step 4 After checking that the outdoor unit is intact, remove the four bolts that secure
the outdoor unit to the pallet, as shown in Figure 4-13.

Figure 4-13 Removing an outdoor unit

Step 5 If necessary, hoist the outdoor unit according to Figure 4-14, Figure 4-15, and
Figure 4-16 onsite. (Optional)

Figure 4-14 Hoisting a NetCol500-A018 outdoor unit

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-15 Hoisting a NetCol500-A020 outdoor unit

Figure 4-16 Hoisting a NetCol500-A021 outdoor unit

----End

4.2.2 (Optional) Removing Aisle Containments

Prerequisites
The cabinets have been transported to the destination place and unpacked.

Context
If the site elevator is too small to transport a cabinet, remove the aisle
containment from the cabinet. Reassemble them after transporting them to the
installation position. Then perform subsequent operations.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

NOTICE

The cabinet front door is made of glass. Pay attention to the following during
transportation:
● Move the cabinet with caution.
● Ensure that the glass door does not collide with sharp objects.
● Place the glass door stably and reliably.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the front and rear doors of the cabinet.
Step 2 (Optional) Cut off the cable tie on the PAD cable in the Converged Cabinet, and
pull the cable into the cabinet through the front door.

NOTICE

Record the PAD cable route because you need to bind the PAD cable along the
original route in subsequent installation.

Figure 4-17 Removing the PAD cable

Step 3 Loosen the gas spring nuts using an adjustable wrench and remove the gas
springs.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-18 Removing the gas springs

Step 4 Remove the ground cable from the Converged Cabinet.

Step 5 Lift the cabinet doors off the hinges. Remove the front and rear doors.

NOTICE

● The cabinet front door is heavy. Arrange at least two persons to carry the door.
● Before removing a cabinet door, disconnect the ground cable between the
cabinet door and the cabinet.

Figure 4-19 Removing the cabinet doors

Step 6 Remove the top plate from the cabinet using a Phillips screwdriver.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 108

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-20 Removing the top plate

Step 7 (Optional) Remove the screws from the air director in the Converged Cabinet, and
pull out the air director.

Figure 4-21 Removing the air director

Step 8 Remove the screws securing the aisle containment to the cabinet using a Phillips
screwdriver, and remove the aisle containment from the cabinet.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-22 Removing an aisle containment

Step 9 Remove other aisle containments in the same way.

Step 10 Move the removed air directors, glass doors, gas springs, top plates, aisle
containments, and cabinets to the specified installation position using an elevator.
Step 11 Assemble the removed components with the cabinets by referring to Step 8–Step
2.

NOTICE

During the process of reinstalling an air director, when pushing the air director
into the aisle containment, align the positioning poles (shown by [1] in Figure
4-23) at the bottom of the left and right sides of the air director with the
positioning holes in the aisle.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-23 Positioning pin on an air director

(1) Positioning pin

----End

4.2.3 Adjusting the Positions of Aisle Side Sealing Plates

Context
● The Converged Cabinet has been configured with aisle side sealing plates on
both sides before delivery. The Converged Cabinet is often placed in the
middle of the smart module. Therefore, to ensure smooth airflow in the smart
module, remove the aisle side sealing plates from the Converged Cabinet
before installing the cabinet.
● An IT cabinet is not configured with aisle side sealing plates before delivery. If
you need to place the IT cabinet at an end of the row, install aisle side sealing
plates on the cabinet side facing the aisle exterior.
● Totally there are six aisle side sealing plates to be removed from the
Converged Cabinet.
● Each end cabinet needs to be installed with three aisle side sealing plates.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the aisle side sealing plates from the Converged Cabinet.

NOTICE

Store the removed materials properly for future use.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-24 Removing aisle side sealing plates from the Converged Cabinet

Step 2 Remove other aisle side sealing plates in the same way.

Step 3 Secure the sealing plate fasteners to the aisle frame of the end cabinet using M5
tapping screws.

NOTICE

● The sealing plate fasteners are packed in the accessory package of the
Converged Cabinet.
● Align the sealing plate fasteners with those in front of the appropriate sealing
frame.
● Install other aisle sealing plate fasteners in the same way.

Figure 4-25 Installing sealing plate fasteners for an end cabinet

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Step 4 Install floating nuts for the end cabinet.

NOTE

● The floating nuts are packed in the IT cabinet.

● Install floating nuts for other aisle side sealing plates in the same way.

Figure 4-26 Installing floating nuts

Step 5 Install aisle side sealing plates on the end cabinet side facing the aisle exterior
using the screws removed in Step 1.

Figure 4-27 Installing aisle side sealing plates for an end cabinet

Step 6 Install aisle side sealing plates on the aisle exterior side of the other end cabinet in
the same way.

----End

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

4.2.4 Installing a Cabinet

Prerequisites
The floor levelness meets engineering requirements.

Context
To position cabinets, perform the following steps:
1. Determine the position of an end cabinet based on the engineering layout
diagram.
2. Place the end cabinet at the correct installation position.
3. Use the end cabinet as a basis and place other cabinets at their installation
positions.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the cabinet position based on the engineering layout diagram.

Step 2 Place the end cabinet at the correct installation position.

Step 3 Level the cabinet using a wrench.

NOTICE

● Use a measuring tape to check that the vertical distance between the top of
the 2000 mm high cabinet and the floor is 2000 mm (+3 mm). Then use a level
to check that the cabinet is level.
● If the leveling height of the cabinet does not meet the requirements, the
cabinet cannot be opened or closed properly.

NOTE

● To ensure the cabinet steadiness, adjust all the six anchor bolts at the bottom of the
cabinet in place.
● After leveling the anchor bolts in the first and last rows, use a flat-head screwdriver to
level the anchor bolts in the middle row until they are in close contact with the ground.
● Do not remove the anchor bolts. Otherwise, rework is required if the cabinet height
does not meet requirements.
● Anchor bolt adjustment method: Wrench an anchor bolt clockwise to elevate a cabinet
leg, or wrench an anchor bolt anticlockwise to lower it. The anchor bolts can be
adjusted within a range of 0-8 mm.
● Levelness check standard: Ensure that the cabinet is level in width and depth directions
when leveling the cabinet. Put a level at the bottom of the cabinet in width and depth
directions and check that the air bubble is in the middle between the two lines marked
on the glass tube.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-28 Leveling a cabinet

Step 4 Combine cabinets.

1. Level the cabinets adjacent to the end cabinet using the method in Step 3.
2. Remove the screws securing connecting kits from the cabinet, take off the
connecting kits, and properly store the removed screws.

NOTE

– The connecting kits of the Converged Cabinet are bound to the upper right
positions on the front and rear door posts of the cabinet. Remove the connecting
kits before installing them.
– The connecting kits of other cabinets are secured to the front door posts of the
cabinets. Remove the connecting kits before installing them.

Figure 4-29 Combining cabinets

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

3. Combine adjacent cabinets by installing the connecting kits at the

combination positions on the front and rear doors of the cabinets with screws
Step 5 Install other cabinets in the same way.

----End

4.2.5 (Optional) Installing the eLight

Prerequisites
The cabinet door has been installed.
The eLight is installed on the top interior of the cabinet door.

NOTE

The cabinet appearance is for reference only.

Preparations
Tools: Phillips screwdriver, step ladder
Materials: eLight and its accessories
The BOM number of the eLight system is 52220928.

Procedure
Step 1 Install the strip light.
NOTE

If the strip light is longer than the aisle, cut the strip light to an appropriate length, remove
the protective cap from the end of the strip light, and install the cap at the cutting position
of the strip light.
1. Reserve the end with a wiring terminal on the top of the IT cabinet at an end
of the row.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-30 Routing a strip light extension cable

(1) Strip light extension cable (2) ETH converter

2. Route the strip light from the top of the cabinet at one end to the top of the
cabinet at the other end, and secure the strip light using the fastener.

Step 2 Pull the strip light and extension cable straight and interconnect the terminals.

Figure 4-31 Installing a strip light

NOTE

● The figure is for reference only.

● The eLight strip light can be installed only for a maximum of nine cabinets.

Step 3 Install the eLight actuator and power module.

1. Open the rear door of the end cabinet.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

2. Align one end of the support with the notch on the rear door side of the top
panel, and hook the other end of the support to the long strip hole on the top
panel, as shown by (1) in Figure 4-32.
3. Secure the support using two screws at the notch on the rear door side of the
top panel, as shown by (2) in Figure 4-32.

Figure 4-32 Install a mounting support for the eLight actuator and power
module.

4. Clamp the eLight actuator and power module onto the mounting kit.

Figure 4-33 Installing the eLight actuator and power module

(1) eLight actuator (2) eLight power module

Step 4 Connect cables to the eLight system.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-34 Cable connection for the eLight system

NOTE

Whether the PE cable to the power module needs to be connected depends on the actual power
port.

----End

4.2.6 Installing a Smart Cooling Product

4.2.6.1 Materials

(Optional) Refrigerant R410A

If the one-way length of the pipe connecting the indoor and outdoor units is less
than or equal to 30 m, no R410A refrigerant needs to be purchased. If the length
is greater than 30 m and less than or equal to 80 m, R410A refrigerant needs to
be purchased.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 119

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

NOTICE

Do not use unqualified refrigerant. Huawei will not be liable for any equipment
damage caused by unqualified refrigerant.

Customers can purchase this material from Huawei or other vendors. Verify that
the refrigerant is authentic in the following ways:

1. Dial the refrigerant manufacturer's hotline to confirm the refrigerant

authenticity.
2. Place the refrigerant tank indoors for 24 hours. Use a point thermometer to
measure the outer surface temperature of the refrigerant tank, and connect a
pressure gauge to the tank to measure the internal pressure, as shown in
Figure 4-35. Find the saturation pressure corresponding to the measured
outer surface temperature from Table 4-5. If the deviation between the
saturation pressure and the measured internal is greater than 0.2 MPa, the
refrigerant does not meet the requirements, and needs to be replaced.

Figure 4-35 Checking the refrigerant

Table 4-5 Mapping between the saturation pressure and the saturation
temperature for R410A

Saturation Gauge Saturation Gauge Saturation Gauge

Temperatu Pressure Temperatu Pressure Temperatu Pressure
re (°C) (MPa) re (°C) (MPa) re (°C) (MPa)

0 0.7 19 1.31 38 2.21

1 0.73 20 1.35 39 2.27

2 0.75 21 1.39 40 2.33

3 0.78 22 1.4 41 2.39

4 0.81 23 1.47 42 2.45

5 0.84 24 1.51 43 2.51

6 0.87 25 1.56 44 2.57

7 0.9 26 1.60 45 2.63

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Saturation Gauge Saturation Gauge Saturation Gauge

Temperatu Pressure Temperatu Pressure Temperatu Pressure
re (°C) (MPa) re (°C) (MPa) re (°C) (MPa)

8 0.93 27 1.65 46 2.7

9 0.96 28 1.69 47 2.76

10 0.99 29 1.74 48 2.83

11 1.02 30 1.79 49 2.9

12 1.05 31 1.84 50 2.97

13 1.09 32 1.89 51 3.04

14 1.12 33 1.94 52 3.11

15 1.16 34 1.99 53 3.19

16 1.19 35 2.04 54 3.26

17 1.23 36 2.1 55 3.34

18 1.27 37 2.15 - -

NOTE

1 MPa ≈ 10 bar ≈ 145 psi ≈ 10.2 kgf/cm2

Oil Trap
Figure 4-36 shows the oil trap specifications.

Figure 4-36 Oil trap (unit: mm)

(Optional) Gas Pipe, Liquid Pipe, and Thermal Insulation Foam

Table 4-6 lists the specifications for pipes and thermal insulation foam.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Table 4-6 Specifications

Item Specifications

Gas pipe ● L ≤ 60 m, 5/8 inch (15.88 mm), wall thickness: 1.0 mm; pressure
withstanding capacity ≥ 4.5 MPa
● 60 m < L ≤ 80 m, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), wall thickness: 1.2 mm;
pressure withstanding capacity ≥ 4.5 MPa

Liquid ● L ≤ 60 m, 3/8 inch (9.52 mm), wall thickness: 0.75 mm; pressure
pipe withstanding capacity ≥ 4.5 MPa
● 60 m < L ≤ 80 m, 1/2 inch (12.77 mm), wall thickness: 1.0 mm;
pressure withstanding capacity ≥ 4.5 MPa

Thermal ≥ 13 mm
insulation
foam

Water pipe
Figure 4-37 shows how to connect a drainpipe.

Figure 4-37 Connecting a drainpipe

(1) Drainpipe connector: BSPT (2) Rigid pipe conversion (3) Rigid pipe: made of PP-R or
1/2-inch, delivered with the adapter: BSPP 1/2 inch, other material
smart cooling product connected to a rigid pipe with
inner screw threads

(4) Pagoda conversion adapter: (5) Hose clamp (6) Hose: made of EPDM or
BSPP 1/2 inch, connected to a other material
pipe with inner screw threads

NOTE

The object shown in the broken line box is the drainpipe connector with outer screw
threads delivered with smart cooling products. The hose clamp (part 5) is used in standard
configuration. Other parts are not configured and need to be purchased onsite.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 122

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Pipe Support
Figure 4-38 shows a support for a refrigerant or water pipe. Select supports based
on site conditions.

Figure 4-38 Pipe support (unit: mm)

NOTE

● The height of a U-shaped pipe clamp equals the pipe diameter with thermal insulation
foam minus 5 mm. The pipe supports are to be purchased by the customer.
● The recommended material for pipe supports and clamps is 304 stainless steel.
● Install a support every 1500 mm in the straight sections of pipes, and 500 mm away
from each bending point in the turning section.

Cable

NOTICE

● The site ground resistance must be less than 0.1 ohm.

● The fireproof level of the cables must be at least VB.

Table 4-7 lists the cables to be connected onsite. When connecting cables, fit
them with protective hoses.

Table 4-7 Cable specifications

Application Specifications Remarks

Scenario

Outdoor unit Electrical power cable, 600 V, ZA-RVV, 3 The length is

power cable x 6 mm2, black (three core wires: determined by site
(optional) brown, blue, green-and-yellow), 46 A, survey.
outdoor cable, CE

Common terminal, single-wire cord end Delivered with the

terminal, 6 mm2, 0.02 m, 30 A, insertion fittings
depth 12 mm, black

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 123

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Application Specifications Remarks

Scenario

Naked crimping terminal: OT, 6 mm2, Delivered with the

M6, 50 A, tin plating, 12-10 AWG, fittings
yellow

Signal cable to Electrical power cable, 300 V, SJTW, The length is

the indoor and 16-22 AWG, black (three core wires: determined by site
outdoor units black, white, green), 10 A, shielded survey.
(optional) outdoor cable, UL

Naked crimping terminal, single-wire Delivered with the

cord end terminal, 1.5 mm2, 7.5 A, tin fittings
plating, insertion depth 12 mm, black

Naked crimping terminal: OT, 1.5 mm2, Delivered with the

M4, 18 A, tin plating, 22-16 AWG, red fittings

4.2.6.2 Layout Principles

The layout principles are as follows:

● If the outdoor unit is placed higher than the indoor unit, the maximum height
deviation between them should be less than or equal to 30 meters. Install an
oil trap every 5–6 meters in the vertical direction along the gas pipe.
● If the indoor unit is placed higher than the outdoor unit, the maximum height
deviation between them should be less than or equal to 8 meters.

NOTICE

● The height deviation refers to the distance from the stop valves of the indoor
unit to the stop valves of the outdoor unit.
● is a sign of a tilt, and it indicates that the scale of the pipe tilting is 1:200.
The pipe tilting direction should be consistent with the hypotenuse of the right
triangle.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 124

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-39 Layout of upward piping

(1) Oil trap (2) Tilted gas pipe (3) Indoor unit (4) Tilted liquid pipe

Figure 4-40 Layout of downward piping

(1) Oil trap (2) Tilted gas pipe (3) Indoor unit (4) Tilted liquid pipe

4.2.6.3 Installing an Outdoor Unit

4.2.6.3.1 Installation Requirements

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Precautions
● An outdoor unit must be installed by professionals. Incorrect installation will
cause fire, electric shocks, damage, and water leaks.
● When a smart cooling product requires to be moved or reinstalled, ask for
professionals. Do not perform operations by yourself.
● Do not store an outdoor unit in a damp basement or expose it in rain,
because the humidity will cause short circuits.

Environmental Requirements
● To avoid fire disaster, install an outdoor unit in a dry and well-ventilated place
without flammable gas leakage.
● Select a place away from direct sunshine and radiation from other heat
sources. If the sunshine or heat radiation cannot be avoided, cover the
outdoor unit.
● Do not install an outdoor unit in a place with much salt or corrosive gas.
● When installing the outdoor unit, ensure that the air intake vent and air
exhaust vent of the condenser are not dirty or blocked. Install an outdoor unit
in clean areas that are away from residential areas.
● At a high place with strong winds, install the outdoor unit against a wall to
ensure the normal operating of fans. Install baffle plates when necessary, take
this measure to prevent wind from blowing down the outdoor unit.
● Try to install an outdoor unit against a wall. If the site conditions cannot meet
the requirements and the local outdoor temperature may be below –10°C
(NetCol500-A018), 0°C (NetCol500-A020), or –10°C (NetCol500-A021),
prepare and install an air baffle by referring to Figure 4-43. The air baffle
height and width should be greater than or equal to the outdoor unit height
and width, respectively.
● If the site installation environment is complicated and the preceding
conditions are not met, contact Huawei technical support.

Concrete Base Requirements

Install an outdoor unit on the base to prevent it from falling down in an
earthquake or a strong wind. You can prepare a concrete base onsite by referring
to Figure 4-41.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-41 Concrete base requirements

4.2.6.3.2 Space Requirements

Single Outdoor Unit

● A single outdoor is recommended to be installed against a wall, as shown in
Figure 4-42.

Figure 4-42 Space requirements for installing single outdoor unit

If the outdoor unit cannot be installed against a wall or the local outdoor
temperature may be below –10°C (NetCol500-A018) or 0°C (NetCol500-A020)
or –10°C (NetCol500-A021), place an air baffle at the air intake side of the
outdoor unit based on the Figure 4-43.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-43 Space requirements for installing an air baffle

● Installing an outdoor unit on a wall, as shown in Figure 4-44.

Figure 4-44 Requirements for installing an outdoor unit on a wall

NOTE

● The bearing capacity of the support platform is more than 320 kg.
● Reserve no less than 300 mm from the left or right side of the outdoor unit for
maintenance personnel to walk.
● Grid structure is recommended to avoid the air exhaust and intake of the smart
cooling product being affected by the guardrail structure.
● The picture is only for reference, adjust based on the on-site situation if necessary.

(Optional) Multiple Outdoor Units

When multiple outdoor units are to be installed, if they cannot be installed against
a wall or the local outdoor temperature may be below –10°C (NetCol500-A018) or
0°C (NetCol500-A020) or –10°C (NetCol500-A021), place an air baffle at the air
intake side of each outdoor unit.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 128

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-45 Space requirements for installing multiple outdoor units

4.2.6.3.3 Securing an Outdoor Unit

Prerequisites
● The M10 expansion bolts used for securing an outdoor unit have been
prepared.
● The concrete groundwork is prepared.

Context

NOTICE

● Move the outdoor unit close to the installation position before unpacking. You
are recommended to stand the outdoor unit during transportation. If tilt is not
avoidable, the tilt degree cannot exceed 15°.
● Do not hold the fan guard on the shell. Otherwise, it will be deformed.
● Do not touch the blades using hand or any other object.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the four mounting holes of the outdoor unit based on the installation
dimensions and drill holes in the concrete base.
Step 2 Align the outdoor unit mounting holes with the holes in the concrete base, and
secure the outdoor unit to the concrete base using four M10 expansion bolts, as
shown in Figure 4-46.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-46 Installing an outdoor unit

NOTE

It is recommended that the NetCol500-A021 outdoor unit be secured to the concrete

foundation using M8 expansion bolts.

----End

4.2.6.4 Exhausting Nitrogen from an Indoor Unit

Context
Nitrogen is exhausted from the indoor unit through both the gas pipe needle valve
and liquid pipe needle valve of the indoor unit stop valve. Figure 4-47 shows a
smart cooling product stop valve.

Figure 4-47 Stop valve

(1) Needle valve nut (2) Rear cover nut (3) Black plastic nut

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the rear cover nut from the stop valves using an adjustable wrench

Step 2 Open the stop valves on the gas pipe and liquid pipe of the indoor unit in turn
using a 5 mm hex key.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-48 Open a stop valve plug

Step 3 Remove the needle valve bonnets at the gas pipe and liquid pipe of the indoor
unit, connect rubber hoses and pressure gauges to the needle valves on the gas
pipe and liquid pipe, and gently exhaust nitrogen, as shown in Figure 4-49.

CAUTION

When connecting the rubber hose, the pressure gauge valve should be closed.
When exhausting nitrogen, ensure that the rubber hose is secured. Otherwise,
personal injury will be caused as a result of the air current impact.

NOTICE

There should be a great sound of airflow during the exhausting.

Figure 4-49 Exhausting nitrogen from an indoor unit

(1) Pressure gauge (2) Gas pipe needle valve (3) Liquid pipe needle valve

NOTE

When exhausting nitrogen, do not remove the valve plug in case of losing it.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Step 4 After the airflow sound disappears, reinstall the needle valve bonnet.

----End

4.2.6.5 Connecting the Refrigerant Pipe

4.2.6.5.1 Laying Out Pipes Inside a Cabinet

The gas pipe and liquid pipe used inside cabinets have been delivered to the site
as a pipe assembly, as shown in Figure 4-50.

Figure 4-50 Pipe assembly

(1) Liquid pipe (2) Gas pipe (3) Sheet metal

NOTE

● Figure 4-50 describes how to route pipes inside a cabinet for the scenario with double
smart cooling products with top pipe routing. If there is only one smart cooling product,
only one assembly of gas pipe and liquid pipe is included.
● Secure the entire pipe assembly to the cabinet interior onsite, route pipes from the top
or bottom based on site requirements.

Top Pipe Routing

NOTICE

● When routing pipes from the top, do not route the pipes over servers or other
devices to protect the servers or other devices from being affected by pipe
leaks.
● Secure pipe fasteners to the cabinet.

● Laying out pipes inside the Converged Cabinet

Figure 4-51 shows the pipe layout.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 132

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-51 Top pipe routing inside the converged cabinet

● (Optional for installing the second smart cooling product) Laying out pipes
inside the IT cabinet
a. Remove the ten cable rings from the side-routed pipe in the rear of the IT
cabinet, as shown in Figure 4-52.

Figure 4-52 Removing cable rings

b. Lay out pipes inside the IT cabinet, as shown in Figure 4-53.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-53 Top pipe routing inside the IT cabinet

Bottom Pipe Routing

● Laying out pipes inside the converged cabinet
Figure 4-54 shows the pipe layout.

Figure 4-54 Bottom pipe routing inside the converged cabinet

● (Optional for installing the second smart cooling product) Laying out pipes
inside the IT cabinet
Figure 4-55 shows the pipe layout.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-55 Bottom pipe routing inside the IT cabinet

4.2.6.5.2 Laying Out Pipes Outside a Cabinet

Prerequisites
Check that the nuts on the needle valve and rear cover of the smart cooling
product are tightened.

Context
Tools: adjustable wrench (250 mm x 30 mm), hex key (5 mm), torque wrench
(17#/19#/27#/30#/36#)

DANGER

Before welding, exhaust all nitrogen from the refrigerant pipe to avoid explosion
and personal injury.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

NOTICE

● When connecting the indoor and outdoor units, seal the pipe after the welding
break exceeds 15 minutes to prevent dust and water from entering the pipe.
● To avoid burning the bottom panel, top panel, side panel, internal components,
other pipes, thermal insulation foam, power cables, and labels, take protective
measures, such as spreading a piece of wet cloth, around the welding position.
● During and after the welding, avoid exposing the refrigerant pipe for over 15
minutes because this may influence the system reliability.
● Take appropriate sealing and protective measures when routing welded pipes
through holes to prevent air channel leaks and copper pipe damage. Otherwise,
other components may be damaged by impurities.
● Avoid elbows and ensure that the connection between the indoor and outdoor
units is the shortest.
● The refrigerant pipe should be wrapped with thermal insulation foam.
● When a low-temperature outdoor unit is configured, the stop valve of the
indoor unit should be wrapped with thermal insulation foam.

Procedure
Step 1 Route pipes based on the engineering requirements and weld pipes in the medium
segment by referring to Figure 4-57.

NOTICE

Exercise caution during welding to avoid burning components, such as rubber

rings, inside the cabinet.
During the welding, charge a little nitrogen into the pipes to avoid internal
oxidation, as shown in Figure 4-56.
● When welding a gas pipe, gently inject nitrogen into the pipe at the gas pipe
needle valve.
● When welding a liquid pipe, gently inject nitrogen into the pipe at the liquid
pipe needle valve.

Figure 4-56 Welding pipes

● When the direction of the refrigerant pipe is changed, add a support at the
position that is 500 mm away from the changing point.
● If the refrigerant pipe is straight, add a support every 1500 mm.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-57 Support positions for refrigerant pipes

NOTE

Ask the site engineering personnel to prepare and install pipe supports. For details about
the pipe support requirements, see Pipe Support in 4.2.6.1 Materials.

Step 2 Route pipes inside the cabinet. For details, see 4.2.6.5.1 Laying Out Pipes Inside a
Cabinet.

Step 3 Connect the indoor unit stop valve.

NOTICE

Connect the liquid pipe stop valve first, and then the gas pipe stop valve.

1. Remove the black plastic nut from the liquid pipe stop valve using an
adjustable wrench. Check that the PTFE washer on the stop valve and the
inner protruding surface of the active connector nut are free of impurities and
scratches. Clean up impurities using alcohol or a wet cloth. For any scratch,
contact Huawei technical support for replacement.
2. Hold the copper pipe after the pipe nut with one hand and keep the pipe nut
and the stop valve screw thread on the same center line. Secure the pipe nut
to the stop valve with the other hand and tighten the nut using a torque
wrench, as shown in Figure 4-58.

NOTICE

– Tighten the liquid pipe stop valve using a 27# torque wrench to a torque
of 35-37 N·m. Tighten the gas pipe stop valve using a 36# torque wrench
to a torque of 50-52 N·m.
– When tightening a stop valve using a torque wrench, secure the hex nut of
the active connector at the welded copper pipe to prevent the copper pipe
from turning and further deforming as the stop valve is being tightened.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 137

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-58 Connecting indoor unit stop valves

CAUTION

Wrap the stop valves of the liquid pipe and gas pipe, and the connecting pipe
for the stop valves with thermal insulation foam (thickness: 5 mm).

3. Tighten the pipe nut, needle valve nut, and rear cover nut based on the
torque listed in Table 4-8.

NOTICE

Ensure that you tighten the nut to the specified torque. The failure torque for
the nut of the liquid pipe stop valve is 70 N·m and that for the nut of the gas
pipe stop valve is 100 N·m. The torque greater than the failure torque will
damage the screw thread.

Table 4-8 Torque requirements

Item Pipe Nut Needle Valve Nut Rear Cover Nut

Nut Tighteni Nut Size Tighteni Nut Size Tighteni

Size ng ng ng
Torque Torque Torque
(N·m) (N·m) (N·m)

Liquid pipe 27# 35-37 17# 10 19# 15-17

stop valve

Gas pipe 36# 50-52 17# 10 30# 20-22

stop valve

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Step 4 Take out the outdoor unit stop valve pipe from the outdoor unit fitting bag and
connect the pipe by referring to Step 3.1, Step 3.2, and Step 3.3. Figure 4-59
shows the valve installation.

NOTICE

● Connect the liquid pipe stop valve first, and then the gas pipe stop valve.
● The NetCol500-A018 has been charged 6 kg of refrigerant before delivery, the
NetCol500-A020 has been charged 5.3 kg of refrigerant before delivery, and the
NetCol500-A021 has been charged 12 kg of refrigerant before delivery.
● After the outdoor unit stop valve pipe is installed, the stop valve plug should be
closed. Open the stop valve plugs of the outdoor unit gas pipe and liquid pipe
after vacuumization is complete to avoid refrigerant leaks.

Figure 4-59 Pipe ports on the outdoor unit

Step 5 Weld the routed pipe and the pipe port reserved outside the cabinet.

----End

4.2.6.6 Connecting Water Pipes

The water pipes to be connected onsite include humidifier water inlet pipes and
condensate drainpipes. Route pipes from the top or bottom based on site
requirements.

Figure 4-60 shows the holes in the bottom of the smart cooling product.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-60 Holes in the smart cooling product

(1) Water inlet hole (2) Strong-current cable hole (3) Water outlet hole

(4) Signal cable hole (5) Gas pipe stop valve (6) Liquid pipe stop valve

4.2.6.6.1 (Optional) Connecting the Humidifier Water Inlet Pipe

Context
This section applies only to models with humidifiers.
The smart cooling product water inlet pipe inside the cabinet can be routed from
the bottom or top. Determine the pipe routing mode based on site conditions.
Figure 4-61 shows how to connect a water inlet pipe.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-61 Connecting a water inlet pipe

(1) Outer thread connector: G (2) Adapter with inner screw (3) Pipe: matched with the
3/4 inch, reserved for the smart threads: G 3/4 inch. Plastic adapter
cooling product humidifier materials and metal materials
are recommended

Procedure
Step 1 Take the water inlet pipe out of the smart cooling product fitting bag. Route the
pipe through the water inlet hole at the bottom and connect the pipe to the water
inlet solenoid valve, as shown in Figure 4-62.

NOTICE

Check that the water inlet solenoid valve is tightened with two to three circles of
screw threads exposed.

Figure 4-62 Installing the humidifier water inlet pipe

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

NOTICE

The other end is a reserved G 1/2 inch connector with inner screw threads.
Connect the other end to a hose or rigid pipe based on site requirements.

Step 2 Connect the external water inlet pipe and route pipes inside the cabinet according
to the actual conditions.
● Figure 4-63 shows the top routing of the water inlet pipe.

Figure 4-63 Top routing of the water inlet pipe

● Route the bottom water inlet pipe.

a. Break the rubber ring on the water pipe hole at the bottom of the
cabinet.
b. Figure 4-64 shows the bottom routing of the water inlet pipe.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-64 Bottom routing of the water inlet pipe

NOTICE

After routing water pipes, secure them to the pipe assembly using cable ties, and
seal the cable hole using firestop putty.

----End

4.2.6.6.2 Connecting the Condensate Drainpipe

Context
The smart cooling product condensate drainpipe inside the cabinet can be routed
from top or bottom. Determine the pipe routing mode based on site conditions.
● In top pipe routing, connect the drainpipe to the check valve and then to the
cabinet top. The drain outlet reserved on the top of the cabinet connects to
an external pipe over the drainpipe connector in the fitting bag.
● In bottom pipe routing, the drainpipe connects to an external pipe over the
drainpipe connector in the fitting bag.
Figure 4-65 shows how to connect a drainpipe.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-65 Connecting a drainpipe

(1) Drainpipe connector: BSPT (2) Rigid pipe conversion (3) Rigid pipe: made of PP-R or
1/2-inch, delivered with the adapter: BSPP 1/2 inch, other material
smart cooling product connected to a rigid pipe with
inner screw threads

(4) Pagoda conversion adapter: (5) Hose clamp (6) Hose: made of EPDM or
BSPP 1/2 inch, connected to a other material
pipe with inner screw threads

NOTE

The object shown in the broken line box is the drainpipe connector with outer screw
threads delivered with smart cooling products. The hose clamp (part 5) is used in standard
configuration. Other parts are not configured and need to be purchased onsite.

Top Pipe Routing

Step 1 Connect the check valve to the other end of the drainpipe, as shown in Figure
4-66.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-66 Connecting a drainpipe

Step 2 Secure the check valve and sheet metal to the right rack rail of the cabinet, as
shown in Figure 4-67.
Step 3 Connect the top drainpipe, as shown in Figure 4-67.

NOTICE

● An arrow on the check valve body indicates the flow direction. Ensure that the
water flow direction is consistent with the direction of the arrow when the
drainpipe connects to the check valve.
● It is recommended that the check valve be installed in a position lower than
the smart cooling product; otherwise, water leaked from the check valve may
affect the running of the smart cooling product.
● After routing pipes, secure them to the pipe component using cable ties.
● The drainpipe inside the indoor unit should be wrapped with the thermal
insulation pipe in accessories.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-67 Top routing of the drainpipe

----End

Bottom Pipe Routing

Step 1 Take out a drainpipe connector from the fitting bag and put the connector on the
other end of the drainpipe, as shown in Figure 4-68.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-68 Connecting a drainpipe

Step 2 Route the bottom drainpipe.

NOTICE

● The smart cooling product fitting bag contains drainpipe connectors. Choose
hoses or rigid pipes based on site requirements.
● The drainpipe inside the indoor unit should be wrapped with the thermal
insulation pipe in accessories.

1. Break the rubber ring on the water pipe hole at the bottom of the cabinet.
2. Figure 4-69 shows the bottom drainpipe routing.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-69 Bottom drainpipe routing

NOTICE

After routing water pipes, secure them to the pipe assembly using cable ties, and
seal the cable hole using firestop putty.

----End

4.2.6.7 Injecting Nitrogen to Preserve Pressure

Context

NOTICE

● The leakage test with nitrogen described in this section is dedicated for testing
the leaks of the indoor unit and the pipes connected to it.
● The measuring range of the pressure gauge must be greater than or equal to
4.0 MPa, and the tolerance range of the rubber hose must be greater than or
equal to 4.5 MPa.
● During the pressure preservation process, do not remove the rubber hose and
pressure gauge; otherwise, nitrogen may leak.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 148

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Open the stop valves for the gas pipe and liquid pipe of the indoor unit.

NOTICE

Before opening the indoor unit stop valves, ensure that the stop valves for the gas
pipe and liquid pipe of the outdoor unit are closed.

Step 2 Connect the pressure gauge, rubber hose, and nitrogen cylinder. A reducing valve
must be installed on the head of the nitrogen cylinder, as shown in Figure 4-70.
The outlet pressure of the reducing valve must not exceed 3.0 MPa.

NOTICE

If the outlet pressure of the reducing valve is greater than 3.0 MPa, components
may be damaged.

Figure 4-70 Leakage test with nitrogen

(1) Nitrogen cylinder (2) Reducing valve (3) Low pressure gauge

(4) High pressure gauge (5) Gas pipe needle valve (6) Liquid pipe needle valve

Step 3 Inject 3.0 MPa nitrogen and preserve the pressure for 24 hours. The system
pressure should stay constant under unchanging ambient temperature conditions.
If there is considerable temperature change and the pressure changes, perform the
test again.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Step 4 If welding defects exist, locate and repair the leak point. If the pressure does not
change, exhaust the nitrogen through the injection needle valves.

----End

4.2.6.8 Connecting Cables

The indoor unit uses the single-phase power supply from the smart cooling
product control unit. The outdoor unit is energized by the power distribution box
(PDB) in the Converged Cabinet.

Figure 4-71 shows the front panel of the smart cooling product control unit,
Figure 4-72 shows the rear panel, and Figure 4-73 shows the electrical ports on
the indoor unit.

Figure 4-71 Front panel of the smart cooling product control unit

(1) Ground point (2) Rectifier (3) PSU

(4) FE_2 port for connecting a (5) FE_1 port for connecting a (6) CAN_IN (input port of the
smart ETH gateway PoE or smart ETH gateway PoE or teamwork CAN and
LAN ports on the ECC LAN ports on the ECC northbound RS485 port)

(7) RS485/12 V port for (8) USB (9) DP

connecting the T/H sensor

(10) COM/FE (11) CAN_OUT (output port of (12) SW

the teamwork CAN and
northbound RS485 port)

Figure 4-72 Rear panel of the smart cooling product control unit

(1) J5 port (reserved) (2) J1 port (3) J2 port

(4) OUT1 port (5) J3 port (6) OUT2 port (reserved)

(7) INPUT1 port (8) J4 port (9) INPUT2 port (reserved)

(10) J6 port (reserved)

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-73 Electrical ports on the indoor unit

(1) Electric heater contactor (required if an (2) Wiring terminals for customer
electric heater is configured)

(3) Fan fuse base (4) Power transfer terminal for fan

(5) Signal cable wiring terminal

Figure 4-74 shows the cable connections to the smart cooling product.

NOTICE

● After connecting the T/H sensors in the aisle in series, connect them to the
RS485 port on the front panel of the smart cooling product control unit.
● Do not pull cables J1, J2, J3, and J4 and their terminals casually. Ensure that the
cables are connected securely.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-74 Cable connections to the smart cooling product

Table 4-9 Cable connection description

No. Cable Name From To Cable
Specifications

1 Outdoor unit L (converged cabinet L, N, and PE 3 x 6 mm2

power cable XT2-5, XT2-6, XT2-7 ports on the
and XT2-8 correspond electric control
to outdoor units 4, 3, 2, box of the
and 1, respectively.), N outdoor unit.
bar, PE bar

2 Control unit L and N on the indoor INPUT1 port 2 x 1.5 mm2

input power unit on the control
cable unit

3 Signal cable X2.1, X2.2, and X2.3 P, Q, and E 3 x 16 AWG,

for the indoor ports on the indoor ports on the with the shield
and outdoor unit electric control layer that can
units box of the be grounded
outdoor unit

4 J1 cable X101, X102, X103, and J1 port on the -

X104 ports on the control unit
indoor unit

5 J2 cable X101, X102, X103, and J2 port on the -

X104 ports on the control unit
indoor unit

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 152

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

No. Cable Name From To Cable

Specifications

6 Control unit X1.1, X1.2, X1.3, and OUT1 port on -

output power FU1-FU3 ports on the the control
cable indoor unit unit

7 J3 cable X101, X102, X103, and J3 port on the -

X104 ports on the control unit
indoor unit

8 J4 cable X101, X102, X103, and J4 port on the -

X104 ports on the control unit
indoor unit

9 Temperature/ RS485/12V port on the T/H sensor Two shielded

Humidity control unit twisted pairs,
(T/H) sensor 26 AWG
cable

10 ECC800-Pro FE-1 port on the ● If the smart Four shielded

cable control unit ETH twisted pairs,
gateway is 24 AWG
configured,
connect the
cable to the
PoE port on
the smart
ETH
gateway.
● If no smart
ETH
gateway is
configured,
connect the
cable to the
WAN_2
port on the
ECC800-Pro.

11 Ground cable Ground point on the IT cabinet 4 mm2

control unit ground copper
bar

12 Indoor unit L (converged cabinet L, N, and PE 3×4mm2

power cable XT2-9, XT2-10, XT2-11 ports on the
and XT2-12 correspond indoor unit
to indoor units 4, 3, 2,
and 1, respectively.), N
bar, PE bar

(Optional)

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

The following figures show the power and signal cable routing of indoor units.
● Figure 4-75 shows the power and signal cable routing of the second indoor
unit.

Figure 4-75 Cable routing of the second indoor unit

● Figure 4-76 shows the power and signal cable routing of the third indoor
unit.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-76 Cable routing of the third indoor unit

4.2.6.9 Vacuumization

Prerequisites
● Check that all pipe connectors are correct, and the refrigerant pipe tilts and
has supports.
● All pipes have been checked for leaks, and all pipes are not bent by a large
angle.
● Check that the hose clamps and cable ties of the drainpipe are secured. Water
pipe joints have been sealed by sealant.
● The refrigerant pipe and water pipe are wrapped with thermal insulation
foam.
● Check that all nitrogen has been exhausted from the indoor unit.
● Ensure that stop valves for the gas pipe and liquid pipe of the indoor unit are
open.
● Verify that stop valves for the gas pipe and liquid pipe of the outdoor unit are
closed.

Context
Tools: pressure gauge (measuring range ≥ 4.0 MPa), rubber hose (withstanding a
pressure of at least 4.5 MPa), vacuum pump.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the pressure gauge and vacuum pump and check that the pressure gauge
valves are all open.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 155

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-77 Vacuumization

(1) Vacuum pump (2) Pressure gauge (3) Gas pipe needle (4) Liquid pipe needle
valve valve

Step 2 In the beginning, the vacuum pump makes loud noises and exhausts white smoke
from the exhaust vent. After 10 minutes, if it still exhausts white smoke, observe it
for another 10 minutes because the cooling system may not be sealed properly or
there may be too much water in the cooling system.
Step 3 After 20 minutes, the pressure gauge pointer should be in the negative area and
the vacuum pump makes small noises. Close and open the pressure gauge
alternatively for several times. The position of the pressure gauge pointer and the
noises made by the vacuum pump do not change. Otherwise, the cooling system
may not be sealed properly.
Step 4 Check that the time for pumping out the air is 80 minutes or longer after making
sure that the cooling system does not leak, and that the pressure displayed on the
vacuum pump is less than or equal to 60 Pa (absolute pressure). When the
pressure stops dropping, pump for another 10 minutes.
Step 5 After vacuumization, close all valves of the pressure gauge and the vacuum pump
without disconnecting it. Preserve the pressure for 10 minutes, and verify that the
absolute pressure of the cooling system is not greater than 90 Pa.
NOTE

If the pressure gauge cannot display 60 Pa (absolute pressure), perform vacuum pumping
so that the pressure gauge stays at the smallest scale and preserve the pressure for 1 hour.
Then, check whether the pressure displayed on the gauge has an obvious increase.

Step 6 After making sure that the pressure gauge has no obvious increase, open the stop
valves for the gas pipe and liquid pipe of the outdoor unit.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 156

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

NOTICE

● After the outdoor unit stop valve is opened, the refrigerant in the outdoor unit
flows to the engineering pipe and indoor unit pipe. When performing other
operations, be careful to prevent refrigerant from spraying out.
● After the vacuumization and before removing the rubber hose, ensure that
there is positive pressure inside the refrigerant pipe of the indoor unit.

Step 7 Remove the hose, pressure gauge, and vacuum pump.

Step 8 Install needle valve nut and rear cover nut of indoor unit and outdoor unit.

Step 9 Wrap the gas pipe stop valve, liquid stop valve and the pipes connected to the
stop valve with stop valve sponge (the thickness is 5 mm).

----End

4.2.7 Installing Power Supply and Distribution Devices

4.2.7.1 Installing Lithium Batteries

Procedure
Step 1 Install and check according to the installation guide. If there are no floating nuts
on both sides of the rack, install the floating nuts delivered with the cabinet.

Step 2 Push an ESM into the cabinet and fasten the ESM.

Figure 4-78 Installing an ESM

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 157

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

NOTICE

● The weight of an ESM-48100B1 is about 44 kg. Check the load-bearing

capability of the rack tray before installation.
● The depth of an ESM-48100B1 is 396 mm. Check the rack depth before
installation.
● The ESM can be installed in a 19-inch rack with guide rails and a tray. Check
whether the load-bearing capability meets requirements.
● If multiple ESMs are installed, certain clearances should be reserved. The space
for each ESM should be at least 3 U. The ESMs cannot be directly stacked or
vertically placed.
● Install ESMs from bottom to top. It is advised to install ESMs on four layers.

Figure 4-79 Correct installation

----End

4.2.7.2 Installing a PDU2000

Context
The PDU2000 can be half-height, full-height, or horizontal. Select the PDU2000
model based on the project configuration.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 (Optional) Install a half-height PDU2000.
1. Open the rear door of the cabinet.
2. Secure the half-height PDU2000 to the installation position using screws.

Figure 4-80 Installing a PDU2000 (in the Converged Cabinet with lithium
batteries)

NOTE

The preceding figure shows how to install the PDU2000 inside the Converged Cabinet
where the customer installs their equipment.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-81 Installing a PDU2000 (in the IT cabinet with the second or third
smart cooling product)

Step 2 (Optional) Install a non-intelligent full-height PDU2000.

1. Open the rear door of the cabinet.
2. Secure the PDU2000.

Figure 4-82 Installing a PDU2000

Step 3 (Optional) Install an intelligent full-height PDU2000.

1. Open the rear door of the cabinet.
2. Install a mounting kit for the PDU2000.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 160

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-83 Installing a mounting kit

3. Secure the PDU2000 to the installation position using screws.

Figure 4-84 Installing a PDU2000

Step 4 (Optional) Install a horizontal PDU2000.

1. Open the rear door of the cabinet.
2. Secure the horizontal PDU2000 to the installation position using screws.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 161

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-85 Installing a PDU2000 (in the Converged Cabinet with lithium
batteries)

----End

4.2.7.3 (Optional) Installing an ATS Subrack

1. Install guide rails.
2. Install the subrack.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 162

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-86 Installing an ATS Subrack

NOTE

The ATS subrack needs to be installed at the 33–40 U position in the IT cabinet to the
right of the converged cabinet.

4.2.8 (Optional) Installing Cable Troughs

If cable troughs are configured, perform the following steps to install them.

4.2.8.1 Removing a Binding Plate

Prerequisites
A cable trough is determined to be installed.

Context
Install a binding plate at the top of the cabinet.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-87 Binding plate installation position

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the two M5 tapping screws from the binding plate and then remove the
binding plate from the cabinet top.

Figure 4-88 Removing a binding plate

Step 2 Remove other binding plates in the same way.

----End

4.2.8.2 Installing a 600 mm Wide Cable Trough

Context
Install two 600 mm wide cable troughs on the top of every 600 mm wide cabinet.
When installing cable troughs, first install two cable troughs at the top of the end
cabinet, and then install the other cable troughs at the top of other cabinets along
the aisle in sequence.

Figure 4-89 shows a 600 mm wide cable trough. Its BOM number is 21501142.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-89 600 mm wide cable trough

(1) Partition plate (2) Side panel (3) Supporting plate

When installing cable troughs, be aware of PDU2000 cables at the top of the
cabinet:
● After cable troughs above the front and rear doors are installed, place the
PDU2000 cables in the cable trough above the rear door.
● After PDU2000 cables are placed, bind the cables to the cable trough using
cable ties.
● Install cable troughs based on the colors of binding plates at the cabinet top.
Install strong-current power cable troughs at red binding plates and weak-
current power cable troughs at blue binding plates.

Procedure
Step 1 Keep a vertical plate of the cable trough flush with the top surface of the cabinet
and clamp the clasps into the square holes in the first row counting from the front
door to the rear door, as shown in Figure 4-90.

Figure 4-90 Clamping a vertical plate

Step 2 Rotate the vertical plate by 90 degrees to stand it on the top plate of the cabinet,
as shown in Figure 4-91.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-91 Rotating the vertical plate by 90 degrees

Step 3 Install the other vertical plate into the mounting hole in the second row counting
from the front door to the rear door in the same way. Tighten one M5x10 tapping
screw inside each of the two vertical plates using a long-handled Phillips
screwdriver, as shown in Figure 4-92.

Figure 4-92 Installing the other vertical plate

Step 4 Press a supporting plate along the two vertical plates down to the place between
the four clasps and the cable bridge, as shown in Figure 4-93. Ensure that the
supporting plate is fully into the clasps.
NOTE

When installing the supporting plate, do not remove the grommet strip on the U-shaped trough.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 166

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-93 Installing a supporting plate

Step 5 Install a partition plate. Press both sides of the V-shaped partition plate with
hands to decrease the angle to a proper degree, and clamp the clasps at the
bottom into the square holes nearby, as shown in Figure 4-94. (By default, insert
the clasps into the two adjacent square holes in the middle. In actual conditions,
determine the square holes as required.)

Figure 4-94 Installing a partition plate

Step 6 Install adjacent cable troughs in the same way.

Step 7 Rotate the interconnecting wrench and clamp it into the clasps until the wrench is
horizontal, as shown in Figure 4-95. This operation interconnects the cable
troughs.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-95 Installing an interconnecting wrench

(1) Interconnecting wrench

Step 8 Install the cable trough above the rear door in a similar way.

----End

4.2.8.3 (Optional) Installing an 800 mm Wide Cable Trough

Install an 800 mm wide cable trough (BOM number: 21501140) on the top of an
800 mm wide cabinet. The installation method is similar to the method for
installing a 600 mm wide cable trough. For details, see 4.2.8.2 Installing a 600
mm Wide Cable Trough.

4.2.9 Installing Monitoring Devices

4.2.9.1 Installing the SIM Card and Antenna

If a subscriber identity module (SIM) card and an antenna are configured, perform
the following steps to install them.

Procedure
Step 1 Record the positions of the signal cables connected to the panel of the ECC800-
Pro main control module, and then disconnect the signal cables.
Step 2 Remove the ECC800-Pro main control module, and then insert the SIM card into
the left slot of the ECC800-Pro main control module.
NOTE

The SIM card needs to support LTE, WCDMA, or GSM.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 168

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-96 Removing an ECC800-Pro main control module

Figure 4-97 Installing a SIM card

Step 3 Reconnect the signal cable to the panel of the ECC800-Pro main control module
based on the recorded position.

Step 4 Install the antenna.

1. Attach the antenna to the middle of the cabinet top.
2. Route the antenna cable into the cabinet through the signal cable hole at the
top of the cabinet and then to the appropriate port on the ECC800-Pro.
3. Connect the antenna cable to the antenna port on the ECC800-Pro.

Figure 4-98 Installing an antenna cable

----End

4.2.9.2 Installing a PAD

Prerequisites
Cabinets have been combined.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 169

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Context
The PAD needs to be installed on the door of the Converged Cabinet.

Figure 4-99 PAD installation position

(1) PAD installation position

Procedure
Step 1 Adjust the width and height of the PAD support to match the dimensions of the
PAD to be installed.

Figure 4-100 Adjusting screws

(1) Screws

Step 2 Remove nuts from the PAD support, insert the support into the mounting holes on
the cabinet front door, and reinstall the nuts to secure the support to the front
door.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 170

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-101 Removing the nut

Step 3 Route the PAD power cable to the cable hole in the PAD mounting support and
connect the cable to the PAD.

Step 4 Adjust the feet above the PAD support and clamp the PAD to the PAD support.

NOTICE

Ensure that the PAD is installed securely and reliably.

Figure 4-102 Installing a PAD

Step 5 Connect the cable from the USB port on the ECC800-Pro to the charging port on
the PAD.

NOTICE

If the PAD screen needs to remain on for a long time during usage, adjust the
brightness to below 80%.

----End

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 171

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

4.2.9.3 (Optional) Installing a LAN Switch

Context
The LAN switch needs to be installed in the 38 U position on the top of the front
of the IT cabinet to the right of the Converged Cabinet.

Figure 4-103 Position for the LAN switch

Procedure
Step 1 Locate the LAN switch installation position in the IT cabinet, and install guide rails
and floating nuts.
Step 2 Install the mounting ears delivered with the LAN switch, and secure the LAN
switch to the rack rails in the front of the cabinet.
NOTE

This section describes only the installation method. The actual product appearance prevails.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 172

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-104 Installing a LAN switch

Step 3 Connect the LAN switch power cable to the PDU2000.

Step 4 Connect any port among the 1–24 ports of the LAN switch to the WAN_1 port on
the ECC800-Pro using a network cable.
Step 5 Insert the power modules into the power slots of the 24-port LAN switch, and
tighten the captive screws on the power module panel.

Figure 4-105 Installing the power modules for a 24-port LAN switch

NOTE

Two power modules need to be installed for a 24-port LAN switch onsite.

----End

4.2.9.4 Installing T/H Sensors and Aisle Temperature Sensors (02312PBL)

4.2.9.4.1 Layout of T/H Sensors and Temperature Sensors

NOTE

The figures are for reference only. Install the devices based on site requirements.
● If the total number of IT cabinets and network cabinets is less than six, two
aisle T/H sensors are configured. Install them on the front and rear posts of
the Converged Cabinet.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 173

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-106 T/H sensor configuration

● If the total number of IT cabinets and network cabinets is greater than six,
four aisle T/H sensors are configured. Install two sensors on the front and rear
right posts of the Converged Cabinet, and the other two on the front and rear
right posts of the IT cabinet where the second or third NetCol is installed.
– If the total number of IT cabinets and network cabinets is less than six,
the second NetCol is installed in the IT cabinet to the right of the
Converged Cabinet.
– If more than six IT cabinets and network cabinets are configured, the
second or third NetCol is installed in the middle cabinet between the
Converged Cabinet and the farthest cabinet.

Figure 4-107 T/H sensor configuration (for an even number of cabinets)

Figure 4-108 T/H sensor configuration (for an odd number of cabinets)

– Each IT cabinet or network cabinet is configured with two temperature

sensors.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 174

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-109 Temperature sensor configuration (example 1)

Figure 4-110 Temperature sensor configuration (example 2)

4.2.9.4.2 Installing T/H Sensors

Procedure
Step 1 Install T/H sensors.
1. Open the front door of a cabinet.
2. Install the T/H sensor base at the right post position of the IT cabinet about
1.6 m high above the floor in the aisle, and then clamp the T/H sensor onto
the base.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 175

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-111 Installing an T/H sensor in an aisle

Step 2 Set device addresses for the T/H sensors.

Set the device address for a T/H sensor by operating the DIP switch on the sensor.
Toggle switches 1–6 are used to set the device address, toggle switch 7 is reserved,
and toggle switch 8 is used to switch the temperature display mode. The device
address is set in binary mode. 1 is the least significant bit, and 6 is the most
significant bit. ON indicates 1, and OFF indicates 0. The address range is 1 to 4.

Figure 4-112 DIP switch definitions for T/H sensors

NOTE

The numbers 1–4 indicate the DIP switch settings of the T/H sensors.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 176

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Table 4-10 T/H sensor Dip switch

T/H Sensor Toggl Toggl Toggl Toggl Toggl Toggl Toggl Toggl
Address e e e e e e e e
Switc Switc Switc Switc Switc Switc Switc Switc
h1 h2 h3 h4 h5 h6 h7 h8

1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Step 3 Connect the communications cables to the T/H sensors.

NOTE

The figure shows the layout of eight cabinets. The actual cable connections depend on the
onsite configuration.

Figure 4-113 Cable connections to T/H sensors and temperature sensors

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-114 Cable connections to T/H sensors

(1) ECC800-Pro (2) T/H sensor 2 (3) T/H sensor 1 (4) Temperature sensor

----End

4.2.9.4.3 (Optional) Installing Temperature Sensors

Procedure
Step 1 Bind the temperature sensors to the right posts of the front and rear doors about
1.6 m above the floor using cable ties.
NOTE

● When installing a temperature sensor, bind the cable behind the sensor to the cabinet and
keep them 20 mm away from the sensor probe.
● Temperature sensors must not be in touch with metal parts or cabinets.
● Ensure that the temperature sensor on the rear door of the cabinet is installed on the side
without a PDU2000.
● Verify that the temperature sensors face the inside of the cabinet to ensure accurate
measurement of cabinet interior temperatures.
● Install other temperature sensors based on the layout.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 178

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-115 Installing temperature sensors

----End

4.2.9.5 Installing Remote T/H Sensors (33010516) for Smart Cooling

Products
T/H sensor configuration depends on the number of smart cooling products. (For
example, if there are three smart cooling products, three T/H sensors are
configured.)

4.2.9.5.1 T/H Sensor Layout

NOTE

● The figure is for reference only. Install the devices based on site requirements.
● The NetCol remote T/H sensors are attached to the leftmost and rightmost IT cabinets
near aisle columns.
● Installing a T/H sensor when only one NetCol is configured

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-116 T/H sensor configuration

A: Position for installing the T/H sensor for the NetCol at the bottom of the Converged
Cabinet, 28 U

● Installing T/H sensors when two NetCols are configured (Optional)

Figure 4-117 T/H sensor configuration

● Installing T/H sensors when three NetCols are configured (Optional)

a. Configure T/H sensors in scenario 1.

Figure 4-118 T/H sensor configuration

b. Configure T/H sensors in scenario 2.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 180

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-119 T/H sensor configuration

A: Position for installing the T/H sensor B: Position for installing the T/H sensor
for the NetCol at the bottom of the for the NetCol at the bottom of the IT
Converged Cabinet, 28 U cabinet, 28 U

C: Position for installing the T/H sensor

for the NetCol at the top of the IT
cabinet, 14 U

4.2.9.5.2 Installing T/H Sensors

Procedure
Step 1 Attach the T/H sensor to an appropriate position on the IT cabinet door frame
based on site requirements.
NOTE

The installation position of the T/H sensor can be adjusted as required.

Step 2 Set the DIP switch address of the T/H sensor to 11.

Table 4-11 DIP switch setting on a T/H sensor

Address DIP Switch Sequence No.

1 2 3 4 5 6

11 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF

NOTICE

● The default addresses of T/H sensors purchased from Huawei are 1.

● After the addresses are set, set Cold-aisle sensor to Enable on the ECC800-Pro
WebUI. Otherwise, the T/H sensors will not work. The path is as follows:
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Running Parameters >
Temperature and Humidity Parameters.

Step 3 Connect the T/H sensor cable. Connect the T/H sensor to the NetCol control unit
in series.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 181

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-120 Connecting the T/H sensor cable

----End

4.2.9.6 Installing a Camera

Prerequisites
● A camera and tools for installing it have been prepared.
● The network cable used for camera communication has been prepared.

Context
This section describes how to install and commission a camera. Two persons are
required for the commissioning.

NOTE

For the camera installation method, see the documents delivered with the camera.

Install the camera at the front right position in the aisle and ensure that the
camera can monitor the entire front area of the smart module, especially PAD
operations.

Procedure
Step 1 Align the mounting holes in the dome camera base with those in the mounting
plate, and screw the camera to the mounting plate, as shown in Figure 4-121.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 182

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-121 Installing a Camera

NOTE

This camera model provides triple-axis adjustment design. Connect the auxiliary video cable
delivered with the camera to a display device such as the monitor. Rotate the camera 0-355
degrees horizontally, 0-75 degrees vertically, or 0-355 degrees in the revolving direction to
achieve an appropriate angle. Figure 4-122 shows the adjustment methods.

Figure 4-122 Triple-axis adjustment

Step 2 Install the mounting plate with the camera at the top of the front door of the end
cabinet, as shown in Figure 4-123.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 183

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-123 Installing a camera mounting plate

Step 3 Connect the camera monitoring cable. Connect one end of a network cable to the
Ethernet port on the camera and the other end to any network port on the smart
ETH gateway (with PoE power supply).

NOTICE

Device cables not mentioned in the document do not need to be connected onsite
and should be insulated only.

Step 4 Adjust monitoring images, as shown in Figure 4-124.

1. Determine an appropriate installation angle and enable manual iris control.
2. Power on the ECC800-Pro to energize the camera.
3. Appoint one person to log in to the camera control software and observe the
image on the monitor, and another person to rotate the lens to cover the
target area.
4. Appoint one person to observe the image displayed on the monitor and
another person to adjust the Zoom screw (T to W) to achieve an appropriate
angle of coverage.
5. Assign one person to observe the image on the monitor, and another person
to adjust the focus bolt (∞-N) for a clear picture.
6. After the adjustment, enable automatic iris control and tighten the lens
adjustment pole.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 184

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-124 Adjusting focal length

(1) Lens adjustment pole

NOTE

Use a flat-head screwdriver to loosen the screw during first adjustment of focal length.

Step 5 Before installing the inner cover, adjust the infrared light panel of the camera to
keep the photoresistor vertical with the camera base, as shown in Figure 4-125.
This prevents the blockage of the infrared light and photoresistor.

Figure 4-125 Installing an inner cover

Step 6 Install the front cover of the camera in the direction shown in Figure 4-126, and
tighten the screws on the front cover.

NOTICE

Before installing the camera front cover, remove the protective film from it.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 185

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-126 Installing a front cover

----End

4.2.9.7 Installing an IVS1800

Context
By default, the IVS1800 is delivered without disks. After the IVS1800 is delivered to
the site, install hard disks as required and then install the IVS1800 in the cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Install hard disks.
1. Use a PH2 screwdriver to remove the two black screws on the rear of the
chassis cover, and take off the chassis cover.

Figure 4-127 Removing the chassis cover

2. Remove two black screws on each side of the chassis and the silvery white
one on top of the hard disk tray, raise the hard disk tray by 45 degrees, and
take out the upper and then lower layers of hard disk tray.

Figure 4-128 Removing the hard disk tray

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 186

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

3. Place the hard disks with ports facing upwards and align the screw holes on
the hard disk tray with the hard disks and fasten the screws. Before the
installation, ensure that the fastener of the hard disk tray is on a different
side from the hard disk port, as shown in the lower left figure.

Figure 4-129 Installing hard disks

4. Insert the hard disk tray back at 45 degrees with the opening of its locking
buckle facing downwards, hold the screw in the red-framed part to lower the
hard disk tray until it is level, and fasten the black screws on the left and right
sides and the white screw on the top.

Figure 4-130 Fastening the screw on the panel and the screws on the hard
disk tray

5. Connect data and power cables to hard disks. Connect hard disk cable ports
P0–P3 to hard disks on the lower-layer hard disk tray and ports P4–P7 to hard
disks on the upper-layer, as shown in the lower left figure.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 187

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-131 Connecting data and power cables to hard disks

6. Close the chassis cover, and use a PH2 screwdriver to fasten the rear screws.

Figure 4-132 Closing the chassis cover

Step 2 Install the device.

NOTE

● Before installing the IVS1800 in a cabinet, install guide rails to hold the device. If guide
rails have been installed in the cabinet, check whether they match the device and
whether they block the air intake or exhaust vents of the chassis as the fan is located on
the side. If the vents are blocked, change the guide rails.
● Huawei provides guide rails that can be adjusted from 500 mm to 800 mm for
additional purchase if required for IVS1800 installation.
● Do not attach rubber feet on the IVS1800 to save space during cabinet installation.
1. Confirm the installation location of guide rails in the cabinet. Install cage nuts
(two at the front and three at the back on each side) to secure the guide rails
at the proper position in the cabinet, as shown in the lower left figure. The
lower right figure shows how to install cage nuts.
1. Insert a cage nut into the square hole from the inside of the cabinet and
clamp it to the lower frame of the square hole.
2. Use a mounting bar to pull the cage nut until it clamps the upper frame of
the square hole.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 188

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-133 Installing a cage nut

2. Install guide rails. Horizontally place a guide rail to the installation location
through the positioning block at the front of the guide rail and the
positioning hook at the rear of the guide rail. Fasten four M6 screws (two on
each side) to fix the front end and six M6 screws (three on each side) to fix
the rear end, as shown in the lower right figure.

CAUTION

Before installing a guide rail, check the (F/L, F/R) labels on the guide rail to
identify whether it is for the left or right and which part is the front or rear.
F/L indicates the front end of the left guide rail, and F/R indicates the front
end of the right guide rail.

Figure 4-134 Installing a guide rail

3. Install a filler panel for guide rails. Fasten the M6 screws to install the filler
panel for the guide rails.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 189

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-135 Installing a filler panel for guide rails

4. Install the cage nuts that secure the IVS1800. The cage nut installation
locations are the first and sixth holes along the guide rails, as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 4-136 Installing cage nuts

5. Install mounting ears. Use a PH2 screwdriver to secure the mounting ears to
both sides of the front panel of the device with four screws on each side.
When the device is near the front door of the cabinet, fasten screws in hole
groups 1 and 2; when the device is near the rear door, fasten screws in hole
groups 2 and 3.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 190

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-137 Installing mounting ears

6. Install the IVS1800 in the cabinet.

1. Lift the device from both sides and carefully position it at the front of the
cabinet.
2. Lift the device slightly above the guide rails, gently place it on the guide
rails, and then slide it into the cabinet until the mounting ears of the subrack
contact the mounting bars at the front of the cabinet.
7. Thread M6 screws (prepared by the customer) through two slotted holes on
each mounting ear. Fasten the M6 screws using a Phillips screwdriver to fix
the mounting ears on the front mounting bars of the cabinet, as shown in the
lower right figure.

Figure 4-138 Securing the device

Step 3 Power on the device.

1. Turn on the power switch.
2. Check the indicators on the front panel of the device for its running status.

----End

4.2.9.8 Installing a Smart ETH Gateway and an ETH Converter

If a smart ETH gateway is configured, perform the following steps to install it.

Prerequisites
● The smart ETH gateway (prepared by the customer), guide rails, screws, and
other installation accessories are available.
● The number and installation positions of smart ETH gateways have been
determined.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 191

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Context
A smart ETH gateway can be installed in the following two positions based on the
project conditions:
● If the M-shaped cable troughs are deployed for the smart module, install the
smart ETH gateway on the M-shaped cable trough on the top of the cabinet.

Figure 4-139 Position 1 for installing a smart ETH gateway

(1) Smart ETH gateway

● If M-shaped cable troughs are not deployed for the Smart Module, install the
smart ETH gateway on the top of the cabinet.

Figure 4-140 Position 2 for installing a smart ETH gateway

(1) Smart ETH gateway

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 192

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-141 Position 3 for installing a smart ETH gateway

(1) Smart ETH gateway

The methods for installing a smart ETH gateway on the three positions are similar.
This section describes how to install a smart ETH gateway on the M-shaped cable
trough.

Procedure
Step 1 Secure the guide rails for a smart ETH gateway to the M-shaped cable trough on
the top of the cabinet using two M4 screw assemblies, as shown in Figure 4-142.
Step 2 Install the smart ETH gateway to the guide rail, as shown in Figure 4-142.

Figure 4-142 Installing a smart ETH gateway

1. Align the upper slot of the guide rail for the smart ETH gateway with the
upper part of the guide rail, and pre-mount it onto the guide rail.
2. Press the lower part of the smart ETH gateway to clamp the smart ETH
gateway onto the guide rail.
3. Shake the smart ETH gateway in different directions to ensure that it is
reliably installed.
Step 3 Connect the smart ETH gateway ground cable to the ground point on the M-
shaped cable trough, as shown in Figure 4-142.
Step 4 Attach the ETH converter to the smart ETH gateway.

----End

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 193

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

4.2.9.9 Routing the Cable to a WLDS900 Water Sensor

If the water sensor is required, perform the following steps to install it.

Context
● The water sensor is composed of the water detection cable (BOM number:
33010445), water detector (BOM number: 33010352), and conversion cable
(packed with the water detector).
● The water detector is installed in the Converged Cabinet.
● The water detection cable and water detector are interconnected using the
conversion cable.
● A single water detection cable is 5 meters long. If a longer cable is required,
connect the male connector of a water detection cable to the female
connector of another. One water detector can be connected to a maximum of
nine water detection cables.

Figure 4-143 Detector positions

(1) Water detector

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 194

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-144 Water sensor

(1) Water detector (2) Conversion cable end A, (3) Conversion cable
connected to the water
detector

(4) Conversion cable end B, (5) Water detection cable end (6) Water detection cable
connected to the water A, connected to the conversion
detection cable cable

Figure 4-145 Laying out the water detection cable

NOTE

The following uses the five-cabinet layout as an example.

(1) Water detector cable (2) Water detector

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 195

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

NOTICE

Do not contact the water detector cable to metal, for this action will cause a false
alarm. Take protective measures when routing a water detector cable.

Procedure
Step 1 Install the water detector.
1. Remove the cover from the water detector, as shown in Figure 4-146.

Figure 4-146 Removing the cover from the water detector

2. Install the water detector bottom plate in the Converged Cabinet using two
M3 screws, as shown in Figure 4-147.
NOTE

The screws for installing a water detector bottom plate are in the Converged Cabinet
fitting bag.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 196

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-147 Installing a water detector bottom plate

3. Reinstall the water detector cover by referring to Step 1.

Step 2 Figure 4-148 shows how to connect the water detection cable to the conversion
cable.

Figure 4-148 Connecting cables

(1) Conversion cable end B, connected to the (2) Water detection cable end A, connected to
water detection cable the conversion cable

NOTE

The water detection cable and conversion cable are interconnected through the male and
female connectors.

Step 3 Connect the other end of the conversion cable to the water detector, as shown in
Figure 4-149.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 197

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-149 Connecting the water detector

Step 4 Plan the installation position for the fastener of the water detection cable. Ensure
that the water detection cable placed on the fastener is in good contact with the
floor.

Step 5 Tear off the protection paper from the rear of the fastener, and then securely
attach the fastener to the floor.
● If the fastener cannot be securely attached to the floor, perform Step 6.
● If the fastener can be securely attached to the floor, perform Step 7.

Step 6 Drill holes in the floor with the same dimensions as the expansion bolts for the
fastener. Use the expansion bolts to secure the fastener to the floor, as shown in
Figure 4-150.

Figure 4-150 Installing fasteners

NOTICE

When laying out the water detection cable, ensure that the water detector is close
to the Converged Cabinet to facilitate further cable connections.

Step 7 Place the water detection cable onto the fastener, secure the fastener, and keep
the water detection cable in close contact with the floor, as shown in Figure
4-151.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 198

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-151 Securing a water detection cable

NOTE

If multiple water detection cables are connected in series, connect the male connector of
one cable to the female connector of another.

----End

4.2.9.10 Installing an Electrode Water Sensor

If the water sensor is required, perform the following steps to install it.

Procedure
Step 1 Place the water sensor on the floor under the Converged Cabinet
Step 2 Route the water sensor cable through the cable hole in the lower cover plate of
the Converged Cabinet for the hot aisle.
Step 3 Connect it to the water sensor cable connected to the ECC.

Figure 4-152 Signal Cable Routing

----End

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 199

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

4.2.9.11 (Optional) Installing an In-Room Access Actuator

Context
● The BOM number of an access actuator is 52271874.
● It is recommended that the access actuator be installed 0.5 m away from the
door edge and 2.2 m above the floor at the inner side of a door.

NOTICE

● The communication distance (network cable length) between the access

actuator and the access control device should not exceed 5 m. If the distance
exceeds 5 m, prepare the cable onsite.
● Before installing the access actuator, install a cable trough or drill a cable hole
in the wall, and route the lead into the trough or hole.

Procedure
Step 1 Take out the waterproof box and remove its cover.

Figure 4-153 Removing the cover of a waterproof box

Step 2 Take out the delivered marking-off template, and mark the mounting holes in the
installation position.

Step 3 Drill holes and install expansion anchor bolt sleeves.

1. Drill holes into the wall to a depth of 45-50 mm using a hammer drill.
Partially tighten the expansion bolts and vertically insert them into the holes.
Knock the expansion anchor bolts using a rubber mallet until the expansion
sleeves are fully inserted into the holes.
2. Partially tighten the nuts clockwise until the expansion anchor bolts and
expansion sleeves are secured to the wall.
3. Loosen the nuts counterclockwise and remove the spring washers and flat
washers.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 200

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-154 Drilling holes and installing expansion anchor bolt sleeves

(1) Expansion anchor bolt (2) M6 nut (3) Spring washer

(4) Flat washer (5) Expansion sleeve (6) Wall

(7) Rubber mallet (8) Socket wrench

Step 4 Secure the waterproof box to the wall.

Figure 4-155 Securing a waterproof box

Step 5 Take out the access actuator and clamp it along the guide rail.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 201

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

NOTICE

● Before installing the access actuator, ensure that the clip spring on the back of
the actuator is loose.
● Verify that the access actuator indicator faces leftwards so that the indicator
status can be observed through the window in the waterproof box cover after
the waterproof box cover is reinstalled.

Figure 4-156 Installing an access actuator

Step 6 Reinstall the waterproof box cover.

Figure 4-157 Reinstalling the waterproof box cover

----End

4.2.9.12 (Optional) Installing an In-Room Double Door Magnetic Lock?

Prerequisites
● Verify that the room door is a revolving double-swing wooden door, and that
the door frame is wider than 42 mm.
● The cable routes are planned.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 202

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Context
● The BOM number of a double door magnetic lock is 02070261.
● A double door magnetic lock is installed on a room door.

Procedure
Step 1 Fold the cutout template delivered with the device 90 degrees along the dotted
line, as shown by (2) in Figure 4-158.
Step 2 Close the door, place the cutout template near the door top at the far end of the
door axis, mark the mounting holes, and drill holes, as shown in Figure 4-158.

Figure 4-158 Marking mounting holes

(1) Door frame (2) Cutout template (3) Door panel

Step 3 Remove the hoisting strip using the delivered hex key.
NOTE

Four hex socket screws need to be removed in this step.

Figure 4-159 Removing the hoisting strip

Step 4 Secure the hosting strip using the delivered screws, as shown by (1) in Figure
4-160.

NOTICE

Pay attention to the direction of the hoisting strip, and ensure that the bulging
surface of the magnetic lock faces the magnet.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 203

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-160 Installing a magnetic lock

Step 5 Route the electronic lock cable through the cable hole, and secure the electronic
lock using a hex key, as shown by (2) in Figure 4-160.
Step 6 Install the magnet.
1. Take out the magnet, and knock the positing pins of the magnet into the
magnet using a rubber mallet.

Figure 4-161 Installing positioning pins of a magnet

2. Insert the assembled magnet into the positioning holes in the door, and
secure the magnet to the door using the screws and rubber pad delivered
with the electronic lock, as shown in Figure 4-162.
NOTE

When securing the magnet to the door panel, do not over-tighten the screws so that the
rubber pad is elastic. The rubber pad will adjust the magnet to a correct position because of
its elasticity.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 204

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-162 Installing the magnet

(1) Rubber pad

Step 7 (Optional) Adjust the magnet.

1. If the magnet cannot attract the door properly after power-on, place a
magnetized metal part near the magnet to check whether the magnet
provides a proper magnetic force.
2. If the magnetic lock and the magnet do not work properly, check and
troubleshoot the circuit.

----End

4.2.9.13 (Optional) Installing an In-Room Single Door Magnetic Lock

Prerequisites
● Verify that the room door is a revolving single-swing wooden door, and that
the door frame is wider than 42 mm.
● The cable routes are planned.

Context
● The BOM number of a single door magnetic lock is 02070081.
● A single door magnetic lock is installed on a room door.

Procedure
Step 1 Fold the cutout template delivered with the device 90 degrees along the dotted
line, as shown by (2) in Figure 4-163.
Step 2 Close the door, place the cutout template near the door top at the far end of the
door axis, mark the mounting holes, and drill holes, as shown in Figure 4-163.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 205

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-163 Marking mounting holes

(1) Door frame (2) Cutout template (3) Door panel

Step 3 Remove the hoisting strip using the delivered hex key.
NOTE

Two hex socket screws need to be removed in this step.

Figure 4-164 Removing the hoisting strip

Step 4 Secure the hosting strip using the delivered screws, as shown by (1) in Figure
4-165.

NOTICE

Pay attention to the direction of the hoisting strip, and ensure that the bulging
surface of the magnetic lock faces the magnet.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 206

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-165 Installing a magnetic lock

Step 5 Remove the small cover from the magnetic lock, and route the cable out of the
cable hole, as shown in Figure 4-166.

Figure 4-166 Connecting cables

(1) Cable outlet

Step 6 Secure the magnetic lock, as shown by (2) in Figure 4-165.

Step 7 Install the magnet.
1. Take out the magnet, and knock the positing pins of the magnet into the
magnet using a rubber mallet.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 207

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-167 Installing positioning pins of a magnet

2. Insert the assembled magnet into the positioning holes in the door, and
secure the magnet to the door using the screws and rubber pad delivered
with the electronic lock, as shown in Figure 4-168.
NOTE

When securing the magnet to the door panel, do not over-tighten the screws so that the
rubber pad is elastic. The rubber pad will adjust the magnet to a correct position because of
its elasticity.

Figure 4-168 Installing a magnet

(1) Rubber pad

Step 8 (Optional) Adjust the magnet.

1. If the magnet cannot attract the door properly after power-on, place a
magnetized metal part near the magnet to check whether the magnet
provides a proper magnetic force.
2. If the magnetic lock and the magnet do not work properly, check and
troubleshoot the circuit.

----End

4.2.9.14 (Optional) Installing an In-Room Fingerprint and Card Reader with

a Keypad

Context
● The BOM number of a fingerprint and card reader with a keypad is 02070174.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 208

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

● It is recommended that the device be installed outside a room 1.4-1.6 m

above the floor.
● Do not install the product in a place with heavy dust or exposed to sunlight.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screws (set aside) from the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad
and take off the baseplate, as shown by (1) in Figure 4-169.

Figure 4-169 Installing a fingerprint and card reader with a keypad

Step 2 Mark the mounting holes using a marker, and drill holes using a hammer drill.

Figure 4-170 Marking mounting holes (unit: mm)

Step 3 Install the baseplate, as shown by (3) in Figure 4-169.

Step 4 Route the cable of the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad through the
cable hole in the baseplate, as shown by (4) in Figure 4-169.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 209

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

NOTE

The fingerprint and card reader with a key pad is connected to the access actuator by a network
cable.

Step 5 Check that cables are correctly connected.

Step 6 Secure the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad to the baseplate, as shown
by (5) and (6) in Figure 4-169.

----End

4.2.9.15 (Optional) Installing an In-Room Fingerprint and Card Reader

Context
● The BOM number of a finger and card reader is 02070173.
● It is recommended that the device be installed outside a room 1.4-1.6 m
above the floor
● Do not install the product in a place with heavy dust or exposed to sunlight.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screws (set aside) from the fingerprint and card reader and take off
the baseplate, as shown by (1) in Figure 4-171.

Figure 4-171 Installing a fingerprint and card reader

Step 2 Mark the mounting holes using a marker, and drill holes using a hammer drill.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 210

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-172 Marking mounting holes (unit: mm)

Step 3 Install the baseplate, as shown by (3) in Figure 4-171.

Step 4 Route the fingerprint and card reader cable through the cable hole in the
baseplate, as shown by (4) in Figure 4-171.
NOTE

The fingerprint and card reader is connected to the access actuator by a network cable.

Step 5 Check that cables are correctly connected.

Step 6 Secure the fingerprint and card reader to the baseplate, as shown by (5) and (6)
in Figure 4-171.

----End

4.2.9.16 (Optional) Installing an In-Room Card Reader with a Keypad

Context
● The BOM number of a card reader with a keypad is 02070172.
● It is recommended that the device be installed outside a room 1.4-1.6 m
above the floor.
● Do not install the product in a place with heavy dust or exposed to sunlight.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screws (set aside) from the card reader with a keypad and take off
the baseplate, as shown by (1) in Figure 4-173.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 211

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-173 Installing a card reader with a keypad

Step 2 Mark the mounting holes using a marker, and drill holes using a hammer drill.

Figure 4-174 Marking mounting holes (unit: mm)

Step 3 Install the baseplate, as shown by (3) in Figure 4-173.

Step 4 Route the cable of the card reader with a keypad through the cable hole in the
baseplate, as shown by (4) in Figure 4-173.
NOTE

The card reader with a keypad is connected to the access actuator by a network cable.

Step 5 Check that cables are correctly connected.

Step 6 Secure the card reader with a keypad to the baseplate, as shown by (5) and (6) in
Figure 4-173.

----End

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 212

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

4.2.9.17 (Optional) Installing an In-Room Exit Button

Context
The BOM number of an exit button is 52220135.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the exit button cover using a flat-head screwdriver.
Step 2 Remove screws from the exit button, remove the base, and mark mounting holes
using the base and a marker.
Step 3 Drill holes and install the exit button base.
Step 4 Take out the network cable, cut off one end of the cable, and connect pins 6 and 7
to the NO and COM ports on the exit button.
NOTE

The exit button is connected to the access actuator by a network cable.

Step 5 Route the cable through the cable hole.

Step 6 Reinstall the exit button and the cover.

----End

4.2.9.18 (Optional) Installing an In-Room Emergency Door Release Button

Context
● The BOM number of an emergency door release button is 02070053.
● It is recommended that the device be installed outside a room 1.6 m above
the floor.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the emergency door release button.

Figure 4-175 Removing an emergency door release button

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 213

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

1. Remove screws from the emergency door release button using a Phillips
screwdriver, as shown by (1) in Figure 4-175.
2. Remove the glass panel of the emergency door release button, as shown by
(2) and (3) in Figure 4-175.
3. Remove screws from the base, and remove the base, as shown by (4) in
Figure 4-175.
Step 2 Mark the mounting holes using a marker and the base.

Figure 4-176 Marking mounting holes (unit: mm)

Step 3 Drill holes using a hammer drill, and route cables out of the cable hole.
Step 4 Install the emergency door release button.

Figure 4-177 Installing an emergency door release button

1. Install the base of the emergency door release button, as shown by (1) in
Figure 4-177.
2. Install the glass panel of the emergency door release button, as shown by (2)
and (3) in Figure 4-177.
3. Tighten screws of the emergency door release button using a Phillips
screwdriver, as shown by (4) in Figure 4-177.

----End

4.2.9.19 (Optional) Installing an In-Room Camera

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 214

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

For the detailed installation method, see documents delivered with the camera.

4.3 Cable Routing

4.3.1 System Cabling Rules

Attaching Cable Labels

NOTICE

A cable label must be consistent with the corresponding IT cabinet number.

Find the corresponding cable based on the wiring diagram in the cable fitting bag,
and attach the corresponding cable label taken out from the cable fitting bag to
both ends of the cable by wrapping the ends.
NOTE

The cable labels must completely wrap the cable without wrinkles.

Attach the cable labels 20 mm away from the plug except for special
circumstances. For example, a label shall not be attached to the bending part of a
cable or attached in some positions that may affect cable installation. If a label
conflicts with a cable tie, attach the label to the outer side of the cable tie.
Attach labels to both ends of a cable.

Requirements for Neatly Routing and Binding Cables

To route and bind cables in an appealing way, follow these rules:
1. Neatly organize exterior cables in a large bundle of cables and prevent cable
tangles that are avoidable, as shown in Figure 4-178.

Figure 4-178 Neatly organizing cables

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 215

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

2. Keep a large number of cables neat and appealing in the network cabinet by
using cable organizers. Move the excess parts of cables in unnoticeable
positions. See Figure 4-179.

Figure 4-179 Cable organizer

3. Route and lay out a large number of cables in different areas to ensure neat
cabling and facilitate cable search and maintenance.
4. Route several flat cables along the same path and then overlap them as one.
5. Arrange cables on distinct layers and prevent cable tangles that are avoidable
when cables in different colors are bound together, as shown in Figure 4-180.
Also comply with these rules when cables of different thickness are bound
together. Arrange cables by thickness when arrangement by thickness
conflicts with arrangement by color.

Figure 4-180 Binding cables in different colors

Cable Spacing Requirements

Comply with the following requirements if possible to lay out different types of
cables:

1. Separate AC and DC power cables from diverse non-shielded signal cables.

Keep the cable spacing greater than 100 mm or use grounded metal for
isolation purposes. Do not bind the cables together. Preferentially route the
cables along different sides of cabinets.
2. Network cables and optical cables are recommended to be routed separately.

Safety and Reliability Requirements for Routing and Binding Cables

1. Unless otherwise specified in a design file, ensure that the bend radius (R) of
a cable meets the following requirements:

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 216

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

– Common cable: R ≥ 3d
– Optical cable: R ≥ 40 mm
NOTE

R indicates the bend radius, and d indicates the cable diameter.

2. Reserve slack at cable connection positions to facilitate connection and
disconnection and to prevent stress. Do not leave the cables tight and prevent
connector misalignment, as shown in Figure 4-181.

Figure 4-181 Cable connection positions

3. Before installing a semi-flexible cable, use a dedicated tool to curve the cable.
Do not curve the cable while holding the cable connector by hand.
4. If a number of wire terminals are connected to a multi-point connector,
provide slack and arrange them neatly to prevent stress on certain wires, as
shown in Figure 4-182.

Figure 4-182 Cable connections

5. Protect cable holes in a metal kit with grommet strips. Alternatively, ensure
that the holes are rounded, free from burrs or sharp edges.
6. Keep cables far away from heat sources such as radiators and heat vents. If
unavoidable, take heat resistant measures.
7. Keep cables far away from operating components such as fan blades and do
not bind cables to an airflow path of fans.
8. Prevent rotating components such as doors from squeezing or pulling cables.

Cable Binding Requirements

Bind cables reliably along the route and ensure that the binding interval meets the
requirements in Table 4-12.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 217

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Table 4-12 Cable binding interval

Cable Diameter (mm) Binding Interval (mm)

< 10 150

10–30 200

> 30 300

1. Bind cables with a moderate force and ensure that cables are not misshapen
to prevent compromising the signal quality.
2. After binding cables, cut off the excess parts of cable ties and trim away any
burrs, as shown in Figure 4-183.

Figure 4-183 Cutting off the excess part of a cable tie

3. Do not use cable ties at a place where the cables are bent. Otherwise, the
cable cores may break due to strong stress, as shown in Figure 4-184.

Figure 4-184 Binding cables in a bending area

4. Ensure that the cable ties are wrapped and secured in the same direction and
do not generate interference with subsequent operations, as shown in Figure
4-185.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 218

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-185 Direction for securing cable ties

4.3.2 Cable Routes

General Cable Route
NOTE

When routing cables, leave a distance of at least 100 mm between power cables and signal
cables.
The customer can purchase power cables as required. The recommended specifications of
mains input power cables are as follows:
● 7.5 kW and 8.5 kW loads (cable BOM code: 25030893): Electronic|Electric Cable,600V/
1000V,ZA-YJV,5x10mm2,Black(5Cores:Yellow,Green,Red,Blue,Black),80A,CE

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 219

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-186 Cable routes

(1) Power cable (2) Signal cable

The Converged Cabinet fitting bag contains 70 plastic cable ties that can be
installed on holes at the top of the cabinet for binding cables, as shown in Figure
4-187.

Figure 4-187 Installing a plastic cable tie

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 220

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Smart ETH Gateway Cable Route

Figure 4-188 Smart ETH gateway cable route

(1) Signal cable (2) Power cable

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 221

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

4.3.3 Power Cable Routing

Figure 4-189 Power cable routing

(1) PDU2000 power cables (2) Mains input power cables

4.3.4 Grounding the Smart Module

1. Connect the general ground point in each cabinet to the general ground bar
in the Converged Cabinet.
2. Connect the general ground bar in the Converged Cabinet to the floor ground
bar or collective ground bar.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 222

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-190 Converged Cabinet ground bar

Figure 4-191 Cabinet ground point

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 223

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-192 Grounding the Smart Module

(1) General ground bar

4.3.5 Cable Connections to the Power Supply and Distribution

System

4.3.5.1 Top Cable Routing

4.3.5.1.1 Cable Routing Description

Figure 4-193 Cable holes for routing cables over the top of the Converged Cabinet

(1) Holes for pipes of smart cooling products (2) Power cable holes

(3) Signal cable holes (4) Input power cable holes

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 224

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

(5) Holes for battery power cables and output

power cables

Figure 4-194 Cable holes for routing cables over the top of the IT Cabinet

(1) Holes for pipes and cables (2) Input power cable holes (3) Signal cable holes
of smart cooling products

Rodent-proof meshes or cable protecting rings are installed at the cable outlets of
cabinets for ease of cable routing.
● Rodent-proof mesh: Use diagonal pliers to cut cable inlet and outlet holes on
rodent-proof meshes based on the number and specifications of cables, as
shown in Figure 4-195.
● Wire bushing: Cut a cross in the middle of a wire bushing using an
electrician's knife, as shown in Figure 4-196.

Figure 4-195 Cutting a hole in a rodent-proof mesh

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 225

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-196 Cutting a notch in a wire bushing

Cables can be bound to the side panel or mounting bar of the Converged Cabinet.

Figure 4-197 Cable binding position inside the Converged Cabinet

(1) Place binding cables routed across the cabinet interior

4.3.5.1.2 (Optional) Connecting Cables to the ATS Subrack

1. Connect the ATS input power cables.

NOTICE

Connect the ground cable first.

2. Connect output power cables from the ATS to the Converged Cabinet.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 226

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-198 Connecting cables to the ATS subrack

(1) ATS I input (2) ATS II input (3) ATS output (to the
Converged Cabinet)

4.3.5.1.3 Connecting Input Power Cables to the Converged Cabinet

Context
NOTE

● For details about the cable connection positions in the Converged Cabinet, see the
Electrical Wiring Diagram.
● The power distribution subrack position in the cable connection description is for
reference only. The actual position prevails.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect input power cables to the PDU.
1. Remove the transparent protective panel at the rear of the PDU.
2. Connect input power cables to the PDU.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 227

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-199 Connect input power cables to the PDU.

----End

4.3.5.1.4 Connecting Output Power Cables to the Converged Cabinet

Context
NOTE

● For details about cable connection positions in the Converged Cabinet, see the Cable
Connection Diagram.
● The power distribution subrack position in the cable connection description is for
reference only. The actual position prevails.

If the cable length needs to be adjusted, adjust the cable to a proper length based
on the actual position of the power distribution module, crimp the terminal, and
then connect the cable.
● Crimp a cord end terminal on the live wire, as shown in Figure 4-200.
● Crimp an OT terminal on the PE wire and neutral wire, as shown in Figure
4-201.

Figure 4-200 Preparing a cord end terminal

(1) Cable (2) Cord end terminal (3) Crimping tool

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 228

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-201 Preparing an OT terminal

(1) Cable (2) Heat shrink tubing (3) OT terminal

(4) Hydraulic pliers (5) Heat gun

Procedure
Step 1 Connect output power cables to the PDU.

Figure 4-202 Connecting output power cables to the PDU (for IT cabinets in Asia,
Europe, and Africa)

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 229

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-203 Connecting output power cables to the PDU (for outdoor units of
smart cooling products in Asia, Europe, and Africa)

----End

4.3.5.2 Bottom Cable Routing

Cables connect to the same positions on the power distribution subrack
irrespective of whether cables are routed through the top or bottom of the
Converged Cabinet, but the cable routes inside the cabinet are different.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 230

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-204 Cable holes for routing cables through the bottom of the Converged
Cabinet

(1) Holes for the smart cooling product water (2) Hole for the signal cable and water sensor
inlet pipe and drainpipe cable

(3) Holes for the input power cable and (4) Holes for the smart cooling product
battery cabinet power cable refrigerant liquid pipe

(5) Holes for the smart cooling product

refrigerant gas pipe

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 231

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-205 Example of bottom cable routing

4.3.5.3 Connecting PDU2000 Power Cables

Context
If the PDU2000 is not provided with industrial connectors, connect the PDU2000
cables and lay out the cables on the cabinet top.

Preparations
Tools: Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver, diagonal pliers, protective gloves
Material: cable tie

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the PDU2000 cables.

NOTICE

Connect cables to the PDU2000 based on the type of the PDU2000 and the silk
screen on the wiring port. The following cable connection is for reference only.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 232

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-206 Connecting PDU2000 cables

Step 2 Remove the rodent-proof mesh from the top of the cabinet, use diagonal pliers to
cut an opening that allows cables to run through, and take out the PDU2000
cables through the opening.
Step 3 Lay out the PDU2000 cables on the top of the cabinet and reinstall the rodent-
proof mesh.
Step 4 Connect the cord end terminal on the IT cabinet output power cable routed out of
the Converged Cabinet to the PDU2000 cable port in the cabinet, as shown in
Figure 4-207.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 233

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-207 Connecting a PDU2000 power cable

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Before connecting the power plug of a device to the PDU2000, loosen the locking
device on the PDU2000. After connecting the power plug, tighten the locking
device.

4.3.5.4 Connecting Signal Cables for the Intelligent PDU2000

Context
● The BOM number of the intelligent PDU2000 is 02120701.
● The installation position of the intelligent PDU2000 depends on the actual
delivery.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the signal cable from the COM port on the intelligent PDU2000 to the
COM port on the ETH converter.
Step 2 Connect a cable from the POE port on the ETH converter to the POE port on the
smart ETH gateway.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 234

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

NOTICE

● Connect the ETH converter for the intelligent PDU2000 based on site
requirements.
● Connect cables from the ETH converter to the smart ETH gateway based on
site requirements. The figure is for reference only.

Figure 4-208 Connecting signal cables for the intelligent PDU2000

(1) ETH converter (2) Smart ETH gateway

----End

Example
The signal cable is delivered with the materials. If it is lost, use a standard network
cable.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 235

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-209 Wiring sequence for a standard network cable port

Table 4-13 Function description

No. Color Function Description

1 Orange-and-white RS485-A

2 Orange RS485-B

3 Green-and-white NC

4 Blue RS485-A

5 Blue-and-white RS485-B

6 Green NC

7 Brown-and-white NC

8 Brown NC

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 236

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

4.3.5.5 Preparing Power Cables

NOTICE

● You are advised to install a disconnector for the UPS input.

● A 2-pole disconnector must be used if the UPS is used to power IT systems.
● The UPS can generate large leakage currents. A circuit breaker equipped with a
residual current device (RCD) is not recommended. If leakage protection is
required, select a recommended circuit breaker.
● The leakage current of the 6 kVA UPS is less than 100 mA.
● When selecting an earth leakage circuit breaker, consider the leakage current of
the UPS and downstream loads.
● Battery cables should not be longer than 10 m.
● For the 6 kVA model, use ground cables that have a cross-sectional area of 6
mm2 and 6 mm2 M4 OT terminals.
● The UPS battery input terminal has a voltage of 56 V 10 seconds before
batteries are connected.

Table 4-14 Recommended power cable specifications

Model Wiring Numbe Rated External Cable Terminal Torque

Termina r of Voltage Circuit Cross- Type for
l Phases Breaker section Tighteni
al Area ng Bolts

6 kVA AC input 1 220 V AC/230 32 A (type 6 mm2 OT-6 mm2- 2 N·m

and V AC/240 V D) M5
output AC terminal

Battery - 48 V DC 125 A 25mm2 OT-25 7 N·m

input (type D) mm2-M8
terminal

NOTE

● If customers purchase input and output power cables by themselves, use the cables that
comply with standards proposed by the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).
● When selecting, connecting, and routing power cables, follow local safety regulations
and rules.

4.3.5.6 Connecting Cables Between the Battery and the UPS

Context
● The cable route between the UPS and batteries is as follows: battery > BCB
box > busbar > UPS.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 237

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

● Input power cables from batteries to the BCB box need to be connected.
Cables between the BCB box, busbars, and UPS are preinstalled.
● The actual number of batteries depends on the onsite configuration. Excess
pre-installed battery cables need to be disposed of.

Procedure
1. Connect cables between batteries and the BCB box.
2. Connect communications cables between batteries and the UPS.
a. Connect the signal cable of the lithium battery at the bottom to the BMS
port on the UPS.
b. Connect communications cables between lithium batteries. From bottom
to top, connect the COM_OUT port on the lithium battery to the COM_IN
port on the lithium battery above it.
c. A build-out resistor needs to be installed on the COM-OUT port of the
lithium battery on the top.

Figure 4-210 Connecting cables between the batteries and the UPS

(1) UPS rear (2) BCB box

4.3.6 Management System Cable Connection

4.3.6.1 Connecting Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock Cables

Prerequisites
The cabinet electronic clasp locks have been installed.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 238

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Install cabinet electronic clasp lock cables according to the cabinet electronic clasp
lock layout.
1. The cabinet electronic clasp locks of odd- and even-numbered cabinets have
been cascaded in hand-in-hand mode respectively.
2. Connect one end of the network cable to the RS485_IN port on the electronic
clasp lock of the first cabinet among odd-numbered cabinets, and connect the
other end of the network cable to the COM2 port on the ECC800-Pro.
3. Connect one end of another network cable to the RS485_IN port on the
electronic clasp lock of the first cabinet among even-numbered cabinets, and
connect the other end of the network cable to the COM3 port on the ECC800-
Pro.

Figure 4-211 Installing cabinet electronic clasp lock cables

NOTE

It is recommended that inter-cabinet cables be routed from the top of the cabinets.

----End

4.3.6.2 Connecting a Monitoring Cable to the Smart ETH Gateway

Prerequisites
The smart ETH gateway has been installed.

Context
Figure 4-212 shows the external ports on a smart ETH gateway.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 239

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-212 Ports on a smart ETH gateway

(1) PWR_IN cascading power (2) FE_1 cascading signal port (3) PoE_1–2 ports
port

(4) PoE_3–4 ports (5) 48V_OUT1 power output (6) 48V_OUT2 power output
port port

(7) FE_2 cascading signal port (8) PWR_OUT cascading power (9) BLINK button
port

(10) Status indicator

Procedure
Step 1 Take out the ground cable from the smart ETH gateway fitting bag and connect
the cable to the ground screw on the smart ETH gateway.

Step 2 Connect the PWR_OUT port on the smart ETH gateway to the 53.5VDC_OUT1 or
53.5VDC_OUT2 port on the ECC800-Pro using a power cable.

Step 3 Connect the FE_2 port on the smart ETH gateway to the LAN_2/POE port on the
ECC800-Pro using a network cable.

----End

4.3.6.3 Connecting IVS Cables

Prerequisites
Cables have been prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the ground cable to the ground terminal on the device and
the other end to the ground point on the cabinet. A Phillips screwdriver and M4
screws are required.
NOTE

The customer needs to prepare the ground cable.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 240

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Step 2 Connect one end of the network cable to any GE network port on the IVS.

Figure 4-213 IVS Rear panel

Step 3 Connect one end of the power cable to the input power port on the power module
and the other end to the PDU2000 in the cabinet.
NOTE

After connecting the power cable, turn on the power switch on the panel to start the
device.

----End

4.3.6.4 Connecting a Cable to the WLDS900 Water Sensor

Prerequisites
● Water sensor cables have been routed.
● The monitoring cables to be connected have been prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the network cable that has been routed to the water detector
to the AIDI_3 port on the ECC800-Pro.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 241

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Figure 4-214 Routing a signal cable

----End

4.3.6.5 (Optional) Connecting Cables for the In-Room Access Control System

Prerequisites
● The required cables have been prepared.
● It is recommended that cables of the in-room access control system be routed
through a trough in a wall.
NOTE

Cables installed on the surface of a wall need to be routed through a pipe for protection.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 242

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Context

Figure 4-215 Description of ports on the access actuator

(1) 48 V power port (2) PoE port (3) RS485 port (COM2)

(4) RS485 port (COM1) (5) Address DIP switch (6) Status indicator

(7) BLINK button (8) WG_2 Wiegand (9) WG_1 Wiegand

interface interface

(10) AI/DI_2 dry contact (11) AI/DI_1 dry contact (12) LOCK/GND/
GATE/COM/door status
sensor and magnetic lock
port

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the covers from the waterproof box and cable holes of the access
actuator.

Step 2 Connect cables by referring to Figure 4-216.

1. Connect the smart ETH gateway to the access actuator using a cable.
2. Connect the single/double door magnetic lock to the access actuator using a
cable.
3. Connect the access controller to the access actuator using a cable.
4. Connect the exit button to the access actuator using a cable.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 243

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

5. Connect the emergency door release button to the access actuator using a
cable.
6. Connect the emergency door release button to the single/double door
magnetic lock using a cable.

Figure 4-216 Connecting cables for the in-room access control system

(1) Cable BOM number: 04093981-01 (2) Cable BOM number:

04093981-02

(3) Cable BOM number for a fingerprint and card (4) Cable BOM number:
reader: 04093981-03; cable BOM number for a 04093981-05
fingerprint and card reader with a keypad:
04093981-04

(5) Cable BOM number: 04093981-06

Step 3 Reinstall the covers of the waterproof box and cable holes.

----End

4.3.6.6 (Optional) Connecting Cables to the ATS Subrack

Prerequisites
● The ATS subrack has been installed.
● The required cables have been prepared.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 244

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Context
Figure 4-217 shows the ports on the ATS subrack.

Figure 4-217 Ports on the ATS subrack

(1) RS485 port (2) Fire port (fire extinguishing (3) Diesel Generator port (DG
non-wiring terminal) signal wiring terminal)

Procedure
1. Connect a monitoring cable to the RS485 port on the ATS subrack.
2. (Optional) Connect a fire extinguishing non-monitoring cable.
3. (Optional) Connect a DG monitoring cable.

4.4 Verifying the Installation

Smart Cooling Product Installation Check

Table 4-15 Indoor unit installation checklist

Item Check That Check Result

Fan The fan is secured. □ Passed □ Failed

The fan has no foreign matter □ Passed □ Failed

inside.

Liquid level The liquid level detector is □ Passed □ Failed

detector secured.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 245

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Item Check That Check Result

The fasteners for the liquid □ Passed □ Failed

level detector are secured.

The low liquid level detector □ Passed □ Failed

functions flexibly.

Table 4-16 Outdoor unit installation checklist

Item Check Result

The outdoor unit is secured. □ Passed □ Failed

The outdoor unit air intake and □ Passed □ Failed

exhaust vents are not blocked.

The outdoor unit installation meets □ Passed □ Failed

requirements in 4.2.6.3.2 Space
Requirements.

Table 4-17 Pipe connection checklist

Item Check Result

Pipe connectors are correct. The □ Passed □ Failed

refrigerant pipe tilts and has supports.

The hose clamps and cable ties of the □ Passed □ Failed

drainpipe are secured.

The refrigerant pipe and water pipe □ Passed □ Failed

are wrapped with thermal insulation
foam.

All pipes have been checked for leaks. □ Passed □ Failed

Water pipe joints have been sealed by □ Passed □ Failed

sealant.

The pipes are not bent by a large □ Passed □ Failed

angle.

Stop valves for the gas pipe and liquid □ Passed □ Failed
pipe of the outdoor unit are open.

Cable holes in walls are sealed. □ Passed □ Failed

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 246

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

Cabinet Installation Check

Table 4-18 Cabinet installation check items

No. Check That Check Result

1 The cabinet layout position is consistent with the □ Passed □ Failed

equipment room layout diagram.

2 All bolts are tightened, especially the bolts used □ Passed □ Failed
for electric connection. Flat washers and spring
washers are installed properly.

3 The cabinet is clean and free of dust and other □ Passed □ Failed
materials.

4 The cabinet is clear and complies with dustproof □ Passed □ Failed

requirements.

5 The paint on the cabinet exterior is intact. □ Passed □ Failed

Promptly repaint the cabinet exterior if necessary
to prevent corrosion.

6 The cabinet door and lock work properly. □ Passed □ Failed

7 All labels are correct, clear, and complete. □ Passed □ Failed

8 The cabinet has no waste tape, cable ties, paper, □ Passed □ Failed
or packing materials around it.

9 All components are properly installed and no □ Passed □ Failed

component is left onsite.

10 Block empty cable holes using plugs or lids. □ Passed □ Failed

Cable Installation Check

Table 4-19 Cable installation check items

No. Check That Check Result

1 All cable joints are secured properly, especially the □ Passed □ Failed
cable joints between network cables.

2 Exposed parts near the wiring terminals and lugs □ Passed □ Failed
are wrapped in PVC insulation tape or heat
shrinking tubing.

3 The flat washers and spring washers of all wiring □ Passed □ Failed
terminals are securely installed.

4 Cables are bound neatly and cable ties are □ Passed □ Failed
secured evenly and properly.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 247

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

No. Check That Check Result

5 Routed cables should be convenient for future □ Passed □ Failed

maintenance and expansion.

6 All labels at the cable ends are clear. □ Passed □ Failed

7 The excess section of a cable strip is cut evenly. □ Passed □ Failed

8 There are no unnecessary adhesive tape or cable □ Passed □ Failed

ties on cables.

Electrical Installation Check

Table 4-20 Electric installation check items

No. Check That Check Result

1 All ground cables are copper cables. Cable □ Passed □ Failed

diameters are correct. No switches or fuses are
installed on the cables and no short circuit occurs.

2 The ground cable, AC power cables, and internal □ Passed □ Failed

cables are correctly connected and screws are
secured. No short circuit occurs during power
input or output.

3 The smart cooling product input voltage is within □ Passed □ Failed

the range of rated voltage ±10%, and the input
frequency is within the range of rated frequency
±3 Hz.

4 The length of ground cables and power cables is □ Passed □ Failed

correct.

5 Lugs for power cables and PGND cables are □ Passed □ Failed
soldered or crimped securely.

6 Power cables and PGND cables are routed and □ Passed □ Failed
bundled separately from other cables.

7 Lithium batteries are intact, free from damage, □ Passed □ Failed

cracks, and bulges.

8 Lithium batteries are neat and clean, and do not □ Passed □ Failed
leak electrolyte.

9 Lithium battery terminals are upright and free □ Passed □ Failed

from damage, break, and acid leakage.

10 Lithium battery safety valves are intact and □ Passed □ Failed

without leakages.

11 Lithium battery cables are connected correctly. □ Passed □ Failed

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 248

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 4 Installation Guide

No. Check That Check Result

12 DIP switches on devices are correctly set. □ Passed □ Failed

Customer Sign:
Check Data:

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 249

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

5 Power-On Commissioning

5.1 Power-On Commissioning for the Power Supply and

Distribution System
Prerequisites
The installation has been verified.

NOTICE

Configure an upstream protective device that meets the overload and short-circuit
protection requirements for the cabinet. If one power input is overloaded or short-
circuited, the system can switch to the other power input automatically.

Procedure
Step 1 Switch on all SPD circuit breakers.
NOTE

If the indicator of an SPD module is green, the SPD module is running properly. If the
indicator is red, the SPD module is faulty and must be promptly replaced.

Step 2 Switch on the power input circuit breaker outside the cabinet to power on the
cabinet.
NOTE

If the green power indicator on the cabinet front panel lights up, the cabinet is powered on
properly.

Step 3 (Optional) Check that the input indicators on the ATS subrack are on. Ensure the
ATS is in I (primary input) On state.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 250

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTE

● Perform this step if the ATS subrack is configured.

● If the ATS is not in I (primary input) On state, operate the handle on the ATS to switch
to I (primary input).

Step 4 Turn on the general input switch in the Converged Cabinet.

Step 5 Turn on the UPS input switch.
Step 6 After the UPS starts, set parameters based on site requirements, start the inverter,
and switch on the UPS output circuit breaker.
Step 7 Switch on the rPDU circuit breakers.

NOTICE

When switching on the circuit breakers, observe whether there is any abnormal
phenomenon, such as sparks.

----End

5.1.1 UPS Power-On Commissioning

5.1.1.1 Checking Before Power-On

● AC power cable colors comply with local regulations.
● The input and output are not short-circuited.
● Cables and terminals are securely connected.
● Battery cables and terminals are connected correctly, and voltages comply
with industry standards.
● Power cables and signal cables are correctly identified.
● Cables are neatly routed and securely bound.
● Devices are installed and cables are routed in ways that facilitate
modification, capacity expansion, and maintenance.
● The UPS is properly grounded.
● The voltage between the neutral wire and the ground cable is less than 5 V
AC.

5.1.1.2 Single UPS Operations

5.1.1.2.1 Starting a UPS Using Mains Power

Procedure
Step 1 Switch on the external battery circuit breaker (if there is).
1. Switch on the external AC input circuit breaker Km for the UPS. The UPS will
enter the bypass mode. Press and hold SELECT for 1s on a non-setting screen

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 251

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

to access the login screen for parameter settings. The initial password is 123.
Enter the correct password to access the UPS setting mode.

Figure 5-1 Password setting screen

Figure 5-2 Bypass mode

Step 2 Set the battery capacity.

Battery Capacity Description

● Default value: 4 (200 Ah)

● Value range: 1 (50 Ah) to 48 (2400
Ah). The value increases by 50 Ah
each time you press SELECT.

Step 3 Press and hold ON/MUTE for more than 5s. Release the button when you hear a
beep sound. The UPS starts to work in normal mode.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 252

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-3 Normal mode

Step 4 After you ensure that the UPS runs properly, switch on the AC output circuit
breaker Q for the UPS to start the load.

----End

5.1.1.2.2 Shutting Down a UPS

Normal Mode
On the default screen, press and hold OFF/ENTER for more than 5s. Release the
button when you hear the buzzer buzzing. The UPS inverter is shut down. The UPS
transfers to bypass mode when the mains is available.

Battery Mode
In battery mode, press and hold OFF/ENTER for more than 5s. Release the button
when you hear the buzzer buzzing. The UPS in battery mode is shut down.

Shutting Down the Inverter to Transfer the UPS to the No Output State
Step 1 Shut down loads.
Step 2 Perform the startup operation on the UPS. The UPS shuts down the inverter and
transfers to bypass mode. If mains parameters are inconsistent with bypass
parameters, the UPS transfers to standby mode.
Step 3 Switch off the AC input circuit breaker Km and output circuit breaker Q for the
UPS. After all indicators turn off and fans stop, the UPS shuts down and the loads
power off.

----End

5.1.1.2.3 Performing EPO

Turn on the EPO switch (provided by the customer). The UPS enters the EPO state.
That is, the UPS shuts down the inverter, and does not transfer to the bypass
mode.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 253

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-4 EPO cable connection on a single UPS

5.1.1.3 Parallel System Operations

5.1.1.3.1 Starting the UPSs Using Mains Power

Procedure
Step 1 Switch on the external battery circuit breaker (if any).
Step 2 Switch on the AC input circuit breakers Km1 and Km2 and general AC input circuit
breaker Km for the UPSs. The UPSs will enter the bypass mode. Switch on the AC
output circuit breakers Q1 and Q2. The UPSs enter the standby screen, and the
parallel system works in bypass mode. Press and hold SELECT for 1s on a non-
setting screen to access the login screen for parameter settings. The initial
password is 123. Enter the correct password to access the UPS setting mode.

Figure 5-5 Password setting screen

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 254

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 3 Operate the UPSs one by one to set the number of parallel output UPSs. Press
SELECT, go to the setting screen, and set parallel system parameters. Press ON/
MUTE+SELECT to return to the standby screen.
Number of Parallel UPSs Description

● Default value: 1
● Value range: 1–4

Step 4 Perform the startup operation on each UPS. The UPS parallel system transfers to
normal mode.
Step 5 After checking that the system runs properly, switch on the general output circuit
breaker Q and branch output circuit breakers for the parallel system to start loads
one by one.

----End

5.1.1.3.2 Shutting Down a Parallel System

Shutting Down a Single UPS in the Parallel System

Step 1 Perform the shutdown operation for a UPS in the parallel system. Then the UPS
shuts down and generates no output. Other UPSs work without being affected.
Step 2 Disconnect the parallel communications cables of the UPS to be shut down, and
then switch off the AC input circuit breaker (Km1 or Km2) and AC output circuit
breaker (Q1 or Q2) for the UPS.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 255

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-6 Wiring diagram for parallel communications cables and parallel current
equalization cables (using two UPSs connected in parallel as an example)

Step 3 Switch off the external battery circuit breaker (if any), or disconnect battery power
cables for the UPS. The UPS exits the parallel system.

----End

NOTE

● When one or more UPSs in the parallel system are shut down while one or more of the
other UPSs are still working, the UPSs that have been shut down have no output.
● To shut down a UPS without removing it from the system, perform only step 1.

Transferring the Parallel System to Bypass Mode

Perform the shutdown operation on each UPS in the parallel system. All UPSs shut
down the inverters and transfer to bypass mode.

Transferring the Parallel System to No Output Mode

Step 1 Shut down loads.
Step 2 Perform the shutdown operation on each UPS in the parallel system. All UPSs shut
down the inverters and transfer to bypass mode.
Step 3 Switch off the AC input circuit breakers Km1 and Km2 and the general AC input
circuit breaker Km for the UPS system. Switch off the AC output circuit breakers Q1
and Q2 and the general AC output circuit breaker Q for the UPS system. After all
indicators turn off and fans stop, the UPSs shut down, and the loads power off.
Step 4 Switch off the external battery circuit breaker for each UPS or the general battery
circuit breaker (when all UPSs share a battery string). If no external battery circuit
breaker is configured, disconnect battery power cables from each UPS.

----End

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 256

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

5.1.1.3.3 Performing EPO

Turn on the EPO switches (provided by the customer). The UPSs enter the EPO
state. That is, the UPSs shut down the inverters, and do not transfer to the bypass
mode.

Figure 5-7 EPO cable connection in a parallel system

5.1.2 Connecting the Lithium Battery Supply

Procedure
Step 1 Switch on the lithium battery circuit breakers.

Step 2 Check whether the lithium batteries communicate properly. If the running
indicator on a lithium battery is steady on, the lithium battery communicates
properly with the SMU. If the indicator blinks fast (4 Hz), the communication is
interrupted. In this case, check that the communications cable is properly
connected.

Step 3 Observe the lithium batteries for 15 minutes. The batteries are running properly if
the alarm indicators are off.

Step 4 Hold down the MANUAL ON/OFF buttons on the lithium battery panels for more
than 5s and less than 15s to activate the lithium batteries.

----End

5.2 Power-On Commissioning for the Cooling System

5.2.1 Powering on Devices

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 257

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Prerequisites
● Verify that the humidifier water inlet pipe and drainpipe are correctly
connected, that the thermal insulation foam is intact, and that refrigerant has
been charged.
● Check that the cables to the indoor and outdoor units are correctly connected
and that the live wire, neutral wire, and ground cable are correctly connected.
● Ensure that the smart cooling product circuit breaker in the upstream PDB is
OFF.
● Verify that the indoor unit power cable is correctly connected and that the
input voltage meets requirements.
● Check that the smart cooling product control unit and the ECC800-Pro or
smart ETH gateway are correctly connected.

Context
The outdoor unit circuit breaker is ON by default. The stop valves on the gas pipe
and liquid pipe for the outdoor unit are open.

Procedure
Step 1 Switch on the circuit breakers for the indoor and outdoor units on the upstream
PDB.

NOTICE

The electric heating belt of the crankcase starts working. Before starting the
compressor, ensure that the electric heating belt of the crankcase has been
preheated for more than 12 hours. Otherwise, Huawei will not repair the
compressor.

Step 2 Commission the system after the electric heating belt of the crankcase has been
preheated for 12 hours.

----End

5.2.2 Performing Initial Configuration

5.2.2.1 Setting Temperature and Humidity

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin.

Step 2 Choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Running Info to view
temperature and humidity parameters.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 258

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to changes with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.

Step 3 Set the DIP switch address of the T/H sensor, see Set addresses.
Step 4 Choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Running Parameters >
Temp/Hum Sensor Parameters, set Cold-aisle sensor 1 to Enable.

----End

5.2.2.2 Setting Teamwork Control Parameters

Context
Teamwork control parameters have the following bidirectional coupling
relationships:
Number of running air conditioners in this group ≤ Number of air conditioners in
this group
● Teamwork group no.: Group the smart cooling products in adjacent areas as
one, that is, assign one teamwork control number for them. At most four
teamwork control groups can be assigned (1–4).
● Air conditioner address: The addresses for the smart cooling products in the
same group cannot be the same (address range 1–32). The smart cooling
product addressed 1 is the master one that collects, processes, and delivers
data. You are advised to set the value to an integer in the range of 1 to the
number of smart cooling products in the current group.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as admin.
Step 2 Choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Running Parameters >
Teamwork Settings to display the page for teamwork setting.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to changes with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.

Step 3 Set teamwork control parameters.

Table 5-1 Setting teamwork control parameters for two smart cooling products

Parameter Smart Cooling Product No.

1 2

Teamwork function Enable Enable

Teamwork group no. 1 1

Air conditioner address 1 2

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 259

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Parameter Smart Cooling Product No.

1 2

Number of air conditioners 2 -

in this group

Number of running air 2 -

conditioners in this group

Rotation Enable -

Rotation period The parameter can be set by the -

day ranging from one day to 30
days as required.

Rotation time The parameter can be set by the -

hour ranging from midnight to
23:00 as required.

Requirement control Competitive running avoidance -

Table 5-2 Setting teamwork control parameters for three smart cooling products
Parameter Smart Cooling Product No.

1 2 3

Teamwork Enable Enable Enable

function

Teamwork 1 1 1
group no.

Air conditioner 1 2 3
address

Number of air 3 - -
conditioners in
this group

Number of 3 - -
running air
conditioners in
this group

Rotation Enable - -

Rotation period The parameter can be set by - -

the day ranging from one
day to 30 days as required.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 260

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Parameter Smart Cooling Product No.

1 2 3

Rotation time The parameter can be set by - -

the hour ranging from
midnight to 23:00 as
required.

Requirement Competitive running - -

control avoidance

Table 5-3 Setting teamwork control parameters for four smart cooling products
Parameter Smart Cooling Product No.

1 2 3 4

Teamwork Enable Enable Enable Enable

function

Teamwork 1 1 1 1
group no.

Air 1 2 3 4
conditioner
address

Number of air 4 - - -
conditioners
in this group

Number of 4 - - -
running air
conditioners
in this group

Rotation Enable - - -

Rotation The - - -
period parameter
can be set by
the day
ranging from
one day to 30
days as
required.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 261

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Parameter Smart Cooling Product No.

1 2 3 4

Rotation time The - - -

parameter
can be set by
the hour
ranging from
midnight to
23:00 as
required.

Requirement Competitive - - -
control running
avoidance

Step 4 After setting teamwork control parameters, choose Monitoring > Cooling >
NetCol5000-A1 > Running Info > Teamwork Information and check that the
displayed teamwork control information is consistent with the parameter settings.

NOTICE

If the information displayed under Teamwork Information is inconsistent with

the parameter settings, check the teamwork control cable connection and
teamwork control parameter settings.

----End

5.2.2.3 Setting the Maximum Outdoor Fan Speed

If the equipment room is near a noise-sensitive place, such as an office or a
meeting room, limit the rotational speed of the indoor fan within 80% to lower
the noise.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Running Parameters > Indoor
Fan Parameters, set Max speed of indoor fan to 80%.

Step 2 Set Max speed of indoor fan to 80% of other smart cooling products in turn.

----End

5.2.3 Commissioning the Cooling System

Prerequisites
Check that the indoor and outdoor units have been powered on.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 262

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTICE

Before starting the compressor after power-on, ensure that the electric heating
belt of the crankcase has been heated for more than 12 hours.

● If the one-way indoor unit pipe is longer than 30 meters and shorter than or
equal to 80 meters, you need to add refrigerant during commissioning.
● Before charging refrigerant, ensure that air is exhausted from the gas pipe
connecting to the refrigerant cylinder.

Context
Convert the components that cause partial resistance loss such as elbows into the
length equivalent to that of straight pipes, and add the equivalent length to the
length of the straight pipe between the indoor and outdoor units to obtain the
total one-way pipe length (L). L should be less than or equal to 80 metes. If L
exceeds 80 meters, contact Huawei technical support.

Table 5-4 Equivalent length of pipe assemblies

Pipe Outer Diameter 90-degree Bend 180-degree Bend

5/8 inch (gas pipe) 0.3 m 0.6 m

3/8 inch (liquid pipe) 0.2 m 0.4 m

7/8 inch (gas pipe) 0.42 m 0.8 m

1/2 inch (liquid pipe) 0.25 m 0.5 m

Table 5-5 lists how to calculate the amount of refrigerant to be charged onsite.

Table 5-5 Calculating the amount of refrigerant to be filled onsite

Type NetCol5000-A013

One-way pipe length (m) 0<L≤ 30 < L ≤ 60 60 < L ≤ 80

30

Amount of NetCol500 0 (L – 30) x 0.05 30 x 0.055 + (L – 30)

added -A018 x 0.108
refrigerant
(kg) NetCol500 0 (L – 30) x 0.1 30 x 0.055 + (L – 30)
-A020 x 0.2

NetCol500 0 (L – 30) x 0.1 30 x 0.1 + (L – 30) x

-A021 0.2

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 263

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

CAUTION

Wear antifreeze gloves when performing refrigerant related operations.

The following are the tools used for commissioning and refrigerant charging:

● Charging tools: pressure gauge (measuring range ≥ 4.0 MPa), leather hose
(withstanding a pressure of at least 4.5 MPa), vacuum pump
● Measurement tool: electronic balance
● Protective tools: insulation gloves, antifreze gloves, and insulation shoes.
● Other tools: flashlight

Table 4-5 lists the mapping between the saturation pressure and the temperature.

NOTICE

● Remove the refrigerant cylinder after ensuring that no refrigerant is required.

● Users include admin (preset password: Changeme) and operator (preset
password: Changeme). To enter the diagnostic mode, log in as user admin.
● If a smart cooling product is not configured with a heater or humidifier, skip
the commissioning steps related to the electric heater and wet film humidifier.
● The heater and humidifier do not work at the same time.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose Monitoring > Cooling >
NetCol5000-A1. The page for commissioning smart cooling products is displayed.
NOTE

● 1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to changes with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.
● If no manual operation is performed within 25 seconds after you click On, the device
will automatically run following the preset logic, and the compressor and indoor and
outdoor fans will also run according to the environment.

Step 2 Click Controls > Control Information, set Startup/Shutdown to ON, and click
Submit.

Step 3 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Enter, and click
Submit.

Step 4 Choose Running Parameters > Diagnostic Mode Parameters, set Elec heater
manual control to ON, and click Submit.
1. Check that the indoor fans run properly and no alarm is generated.
2. If hot air blows out from the air exhaust vent of the fan after a period of
time, the electric heater runs properly. Set Elec heater manual control to
Closed and click Submit.

Step 5 (Optional) Commission the wet film humidifier.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 264

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

1. On the Diagnostic Mode Parameters page, set Wet film humidifier manual
control to 100% and click Submit.
2. The water inlet valve automatically opens to inject water to the wet film.
Ensure that the water pan and water inlet pipe do not leak.
3. Wait for 3–10 min and check that the wet film is wet.
4. On the Diagnostic Mode Parameters page, set Wet film humidifier manual
control to 0% and click Submit. Check that the drainpipe does not leak.
Step 6 Commission the condensate pump.
1. Lift the low liquid level detector and check that you can hear the water pump
operating sound after 5 seconds
2. Lay down the detector.
NOTE

It is normal if a condensate pump faulty alarm is generated during the pump

operation when there is no water in the pan. The condensate pump generates this
alarm for self-protection. The alarm needs to be cleared manually.

Step 7 Commission the compressor. On the Diagnostic Mode Parameters page, set
Comp manual control to 3000 rpm.
1. Choose Running Info > Compressor Information, read Suction Pressure and
Exhaust Pressure, and check whether the suction pressure and exhaust
pressure of the compressor are within the proper ranges. Choose Running
Info > Electronic Expansion Valve Information, check EEV suction
overheating degree. The proper range is 4–15°C. Table 5-6 lists the proper
exhaust pressure ranges.
NOTE

The proper range of the air suction pressure is 0.7–1.6 MPa, and the pressure ratio (air
exhaust pressure to air suction pressure) is greater than 1.4.

Table 5-6 Proper ranges of the air exhaust pressure

Outdoor Ambient Temperature Exhaust Pressure Range

Below 15°C 1.5–2.5 MPa

15–35°C 1.5–3.1 MPa

35–45°C 2.5–3.8 MPa

Above 45°C 3.1–4.0 MPa

2. To add refrigerant, perform the following steps:

a. Close the high-pressure valve and low-pressure valve of the pressure
gauge.
b. Take off the vacuum pump and install the liquid refrigerant cylinder.
c. Slightly open the refrigerant cylinder valve and slightly loosen the
connection nut of the pressure gauge. Tighten the nut when cold air
escapes out of the nut.
d. Put the refrigerant cylinder upside down on the electronic balance. Clear
the reading on the balance.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 265

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

e. Start the compressor and let it run for 10 minutes.

f. Open the low-pressure gauge valve and refrigerant steel cylinder valve at
the joint of the gas pipe needle valve, and then charge refrigerant at the
gas pipe needle valve.

NOTICE

Do not move the hose or refrigerant cylinder when charging refrigerant.

Otherwise, the reading on the electronic balance will be affected.

g. Charge liquid refrigerant, as shown in Table 5-5.

h. After the refrigerant is charged, close all pressure gauge valves and the
refrigerant cylinder valve.
i. Remove the refrigerant charging device and install the needle valve nuts.

NOTE

Tighten the needle valve nuts when the charge is complete. Check whether a needle
valve leaks by applying soapy water to the valve vent or using a halogen leak detector.
If it leaks, contact Huawei technical support.

Figure 5-8 Charging refrigerant

(1) Refrigerant cylinder (2) Electronic balance (3) Pressure gauge

(4) Connection nut (5) Gas pipe needle valve (6) Liquid pipe needle valve

3. On the Diagnostic Mode Parameters page, set Comp manual control to 0

rpm.
Step 8 On the Diagnostic Mode Parameters page, set Outdoor fan man ctrl to 50%,
and click Submit.
1. Check that the outdoor fan operates properly, without alarms.
2. On the Diagnostic Mode Parameters page, set Outdoor fan man ctrl to 0%,
and click Submit.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 266

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 9 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Exit, and click
Submit.

----End

Exception Handling
Step 1 Check that you have exited the diagnostic mode on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.
Step 2 Check that the T/H control mode and T/H set point are properly set.
Step 3 Check that the current time is correctly set.

----End

5.3 Management System Power-On Commissioning

5.3.1 Preparations and WebUI Login

Prerequisites
● Computer operating system: Supports Windows 7 and later versions.
● It is recommended that the screen resolution be 1366 x 768 or higher.
● Browser: IE9 and later versions; Firefox and later versions; Chrome and later
versions

Procedure
Step 1 Connect a network cable between the PC network port and the WAN_1 port
(protected by a security mechanism) on the ECC800-Pro.

Table 5-7 Default IP addresses for the WAN and LAN ports on the ECC800-Pro
Port Default IP Address

WAN_1 192.168.8.10

WAN_2 192.168.0.10
192.168.248.10 (FusionModule800)

LAN_1 and LAN_2 192.168.248.10

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 267

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTICE

● In ECC800 V100R002C10 and earlier versions, the default IP address of port

WAN_1 is 192.168.1.10.
● The WAN_1 port IP address cannot be set to an IP address in any of the
following network segments: 192.168.0.x, 192.168.245.x, 192.168.246.x and
192.168.248.x.
● IP addresses for the WAN_1 and WAN_2 ports should not be set in the same
network segment.
● In some customized scenarios, the default IP address for the WAN_2 port is
192.168.248.10. The default value prevails.
● WAN ports support the Internet access and LAN ports support the intranet
access. Connect the PC network port to the WAN port or LAN port on the
ECC800-Pro based on the access network.

Step 2 Configure the PC IP address and the WAN_1 IP address in the same network
segment.
If the WAN_1 port IP address is 192.168.8.10, subnet mask is 255.255.255.0, and
default gateway is 192.168.8.1, set the PC IP address to 192.168.8.12, subnet mask
to 255.255.255.0, and default gateway to 192.168.8.1.
Step 3 Set LAN parameters.
NOTE

● If the ECC800-Pro connects to a LAN and a proxy server has been selected, perform Step
3.3 and Step 3.4.
● If the ECC800-Pro connects to the Internet, and the PC in a LAN accesses the Internet
over a proxy server, do not perform Step 3.3 and Step 3.4. Otherwise, you will fail to
access the ECC800-Pro.
1. Open the Internet Explorer and choose Tools > Internet Options.
2. Click the Advanced tab and select Use TLS1.1 and Use TLS1.2.
3. (Optional) Click the Connections tab and select LAN settings.
4. (Optional) On Proxy server, clear Use a proxy server for your LAN.
5. Click OK.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 268

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-9 Setting internet options

Step 4 Set Internet Explorer parameters.

1. When you use Internet Explorer for access, set Internet Explorer to ensure the
normal display of and operations on the WebUI. Choose Tools >
Compatibility View, and add the web access address to the compatibility
view.
2. Choose Tools > Internet Options > Security, and add the ECC800-Pro access
address to the list of trusted sites.

Figure 5-10 Adding an address

3. Enable file download and set the security level of the trusted site to low.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 269

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-11 Setting parameters

NOTE

When switching between different versions of the ECC800-Pro on your PC, you are
advised to clear the historical Internet Explorer cache. Failing to do so may cause some
information missed or exception after login. The following provides the details:
1. Open Internet Explorer and choose Tools > Internet Options > General.
2. Select Delete browsing history on exit and click Delete.
3. In the Delete Browsing History dialog box, select all options except Password,
and click Delete.

Step 5 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

1. Enter https://monitoring IP address (such as monitoring IP address https://
192.168.8.10) in the address box of the browser, and then press Enter to
enter the WebUI login page.

Figure 5-12 WebUI login page

2. On the login page, enter the preset user name admin and preset password
Changeme, set the language, and click Log In.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 270

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTE

– After the first login, change the password in time to ensure account security and
prevent unauthorized network attacks, such as data tampering. Huawei will not be
liable for any security issues caused by your failure to change the preset password
in time or password loss after changing.
– Change the password of the user account periodically.
– Record and keep the password properly. If you forgot the password, you will be
unable to log in to the WebUI.
– When the event notification is configured and the password retrieval mode is
configured under user management, the password can be retrieved.
– An account is logged out due to timeout if no operation is performed within 10
minutes after system login.
– A maximum of three users can log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI at the same time.

----End

5.3.2 Preparations and App Login

Prerequisites
App operating environment requirements:
● The mobile device must run Android 4.0 or later and is not root operating
system (the operating system is not flashed).
● The mobile device has sufficient battery reserve.
● You have obtained the IP address of the ECC800-Pro as well as the user name
and password used for WebUI login.
● A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as that of the ECC800-
Pro is prepared, and the PC has connected to port WAN1 on the ECC800-Pro.

Procedure
Step 1 Download and obtain the app installation package using any of the following
three methods:
● Log in to Huawei AppGallery (https://a.vmall.com/), search for
FusionModule, and tap Download.
a. (Optional) Set the pad language to English.
b. Open the browser on the pad, enter www.baidu.com in the address box,
search for Huawei AppGallery, select Ordinary Download, and tap
Save.
c. Install the Huawei AppGallery. If the downloaded file exists in the drop-
down list box, tap the file to install the Huawei AppGallery. If the
downloaded file does not exist in the drop-down list box, choose File >
Local on the desktop, find the Download folder, and tap the Huawei
AppGallery installation package.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 271

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTICE

After you open the Huawei AppGallery, select NOT NOW if "New
Version" is displayed.

● Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI using a PC. Choose Maintenance > App
Obtaining, scan QR code, and save the app installation package to the PC or
a path on the mobile storage device. Then, copy the app installation package
to a mobile phone or pad.
● When the WiFi is enabled, enter https://192.168.245.10 in the address bar of
the Firefox browser (version 41.0 or later) on a mobile phone or pad, and
press Enter to access the ECC800-Pro WebUI. Choose Maintenance > App
Obtaining and scan QR code to save the app package to the mobile phone or
pad.

Step 2 Install the app.

By default, the Android operating system forbids the installation of apps not
obtained from the Android market. Therefore, before installing the app, set the
mobile phone so that it allows the installation of apps from unknown sources.

1. Tap the app installation file for installation. After the installation is complete,

check that the app icon is displayed on the home screen of the mobile
phone or pad.

Step 3 Hold down the SW button on the ECC800-Pro for less than 3s to enable the WiFi
function.
NOTE

● The initial password is Changeme after the WiFi function is enabled. The password is
valid only after you hold down the button for the first time to enable the WiFi function.
If you enable the WiFi function on the WebUI, there is no preset password.
● After the WiFi function is enabled, the password for a mobile phone to connect to the
WiFi network is Changeme. When you log in to the app using a pad, the system
prompts you to change the password.
● After you disable the WiFi hotspot function on the WebUI and press the button again,
the WiFi function is still enabled. In this case, the WiFi password is the one you changed
last time.
● The WiFi function is disabled by default. If you need to enable the WiFi function, change
the WiFi password to ensure connection security.
● A password that has been used for a long time is more likely to be stolen or cracked.
The risk increases along with the time of use. Change the WiFi password once half a
year.

Step 4 (Optional) Enable the WiFi function on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose Monitoring > System > WiFi Converter and click WiFi
Management.
3. Set Enable WiFi to Enable and click Submit.
4. If this is the first time you enable the WiFi function, set WiFi Password and
click OK.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 272

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

5. Enter the password currently used for logging in to the WebUI and click
Submit.
6. Specify WiFi SSID and WiFi Password and click Submit to change the SSID
and password.
NOTE

– If you have set a password when enabling WiFi for the first time, you do not need
to set the password again.
– The WiFi function is disabled by default. If you need to enable the WiFi function,
change the WiFi password to ensure connection security.
– A password that has been used for a long time is more likely to be stolen or
cracked. The risk increases along with the time of use. Change the WiFi password
once half a year.
7. Enter the password currently used for logging in to the WebUI and click
Submit.

Step 5 Log in to the app.

1. Start the mobile phone or pad app, choose Settings > Network Connection
on the login screen, select WiFi SSID specified on the WebUI, and enter the
value of WiFi Password specified on the WebUI for login.
2. On the login screen, choose Settings > Server IP Settings, and ensure that
the IP address is 192.168.245.10.
3. The user name and login password for the app are the same as those for the
ECC800-Pro WebUI. Specify the user name and password, and tap Login.
NOTE

– After the first login, change the password in time to ensure system access security.
– When the mobile phone app connects to the monitoring system, the WiFi function of
the monitoring system is disabled by default. Before connecting the mobile phone app
to the monitoring system, enable the WiFi function on the WebUI. For security, you are
advised to disable the WiFi function when the app is not in use.
– A password that has been used for a long time is more likely to be stolen or cracked.
The risk increases along with the time of use. Change the password once three months.
– You are advised to use a mobile phone that has not been rooted to reduce the risk of
information leakage.
– It is recommended that you use different user names to log in to both the ECC800-Pro
WebUI and app at the same time. If you use the same user name to log in to the
WebUI and app at the same time, either of them will be forcibly logged out.

----End

5.3.3 Initial Startup Password Authentication

When the system type is FusionModule800, perform the following steps to
configure it.

Context
● The initial startup password authentication is required only during initial
power-on commissioning. If the authentication has been performed
successfully, no authentication is required afterward.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 273

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

● The startup password needs to be authenticated when you restore the default
settings on the WebUI or by pressing keys.
● If the startup password authentication is not complete, the ECC800-Pro
WebUI and app cannot be used for commissioning.
● When the system type is changed to FusionModule800, the startup password
needs to be authenticated again.

Procedure
Step 1 Authenticate the startup password on the WebUI.
1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
2. Record the values of Barcode and Verify Code in the displayed Startup
Password dialog box.
3. Within 24 hours, inform Huawei technical support of Barcode and Verify
Code to obtain the password. After obtaining the password, enter the
password in the Password text box and click Submit to complete the
authentication of the startup password.
NOTE

The verification code is valid for 24 hours by default. After the validity period expires,
the verification code is automatically updated. You can also click to update the
verification code.

Step 2 Use the Service Expert app to authenticate the startup password.
1. Download and obtain the app installation package.

Log in to Huawei AppGallery (https://a.vmall.com/), search for Service

Expert, and tap Download to obtain the installation package.

a. Open the browser on the pad, enter www.baidu.com in the address box,
search for Huawei AppGallery, select Ordinary Download, and tap
Save.
b. Install the Huawei AppGallery. If the downloaded file exists in the drop-
down list box, tap the file to install the Huawei AppGallery. If the
downloaded file does not exist in the drop-down list box, choose File >
Local on the desktop, find the Download folder, and tap the Huawei
AppGallery installation package.
2. Install the app.

By default, the Android operating system forbids the installation of apps not
obtained from the Android market. Therefore, before installing the app, set
the mobile phone so that it allows the installation of apps from unknown
sources.

Tap the app installation file for installation. After the installation is complete,

check that the app icon is displayed on the home screen of the
mobile phone or pad.
3. Hold down the SW button on the ECC800-Pro for less than 3s to enable the
WiFi function.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 274

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTE

– The initial password is Changeme after WiFi is enabled. The initial password is
valid only when you press the button for the first time to enable WiFi after
delivery. If you enable WiFi on the WebUI, there is no default password.
– After the WiFi function is enabled, the password for a mobile phone to connect to
the WiFi network is Changeme. When you log in to the app using a pad, the
system prompts you to change the password.
– After you disable the WiFi hotspot function on the WebUI and press the button
again, the WiFi function is still enabled. In this case, the WiFi password is the one
you changed last time.
– The WiFi function is disabled by default. If you need to enable the WiFi function,
change the WiFi password to ensure connection security.
– A password that has been used for a long time is more likely to be stolen or
cracked. The risk increases along with the time of use. Change the WiFi password
once half a year.
4. Use the Service Expert app to authenticate the startup password.
a. Open the mobile phone app or pad app, and log in to the
FusionModule800 device login page using the administrator account.
Ensure that the IP address is 192.168.245.10, the default administrator
name is admin, and the default password is Changeme.
b. If the message displayed on the page is changed from "Initial startup
password authentication" to "Activated", the startup password
authentication is complete.

NOTE

– After the first login, change the password in time to ensure system access security.
– When the mobile phone app connects to the monitoring system, the WiFi function of
the monitoring system is disabled by default. Before connecting the mobile phone app
to the monitoring system, enable the WiFi function on the WebUI. For security, you are
advised to disable the WiFi function when the app is not in use.
– A password that has been used for a long time is more likely to be stolen or cracked.
The risk increases along with the time of use. Change the password once three months.
– You are advised to use a mobile phone that has not been rooted to reduce the risk of
information leakage.
– It is recommended that you use different user names to log in to both the ECC800-Pro
WebUI and app at the same time. If you use the same user name to log in to the
WebUI and app at the same time, either of them will be forcibly logged out.
– The iDCService app supports only the Android system.
– The iDCService app is available only in Chinese.

----End

5.3.4 How Can I Set the Date and Time?

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > System Parameters > Time.

Step 2 Set the time zone, date, and time, or click Obtain Local Time. Then, click Submit.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 275

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 3 (Optional) If you want to use the NTP server for time synchronization, select NTP
server sync. Set NTP primary server IP, NTP backup server IP, Port number, and
Sync interval (min), and click Submit.

----End

5.3.5 Adding a Southbound Device

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Device Management > Add Device.

Step 2 After you add a device, date, and time based on the site requirements or click
Auto Discover Device, the details about the device connected to the smart
module are displayed.

Figure 5-13 Adding a device

----End

5.3.6 Creating a Smart Module Plan View

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Home > Plan View, create a micro-module in Micro-Module View and
set the layout and device quantity based on the actual micro-module scenario.

Step 2 Drag the icons of registered devices and devices on the cabinet list to appropriate
positions in the layout to create a micro-module plan view.

----End

5.3.7 Adding a UPS2000G

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RS485 port on
the UPS2000G, and the other end has been connected to the COM4 port on the
ECC800-Pro.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 276

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Add a UPS2000G-L.
1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add a UPS2000G-L.

Table 5-8 Adding a UPS2000G-L

Path Parameter Setting

Choose Device Select UPS from the drop-down list box.

System attribute
Settings >
Device Device Type Select UPS2000G-L from the drop-down
Management list box.
and click Add Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down list
Device. The box.
parameters
for adding Communicati Select COM4 from the drop-down list box.
devices are ons Port NOTE
displayed. The setting example indicates that the
UPS2000G is connected to the COM4 port on
the ECC800-Pro. If the UPS2000G is connected
to another port, enter the number of the
connected port.

Device In this example, Device Address is set to 1.

Address During actual configuration, set the device
address for the UPS2000G-L based on the
actual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the UPS2000G-L connects to the

ECC800-Pro properly.
– If the connection succeeds, click Confirm. The connected devices are
displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
– If the connection fails, check whether the device is properly connected to
the ECC800-Pro, whether the device and ECC800-Pro are running
properly, and whether the parameter settings are consistent with the
device parameters.

----End

5.3.8 Commissioning Sensors

5.3.8.1 Commissioning the Smoke Detector (Connected to the AI/DI Port on

the ECC800)
If a smoke sensor is installed, perform the following steps to commission it.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 277

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Context
● If the sensor is prefabricated, only check its settings.
● The actual value prevails. Only the method of the parameter settings is
described.

Procedure
Step 1 Set smoke sensor parameters.
NOTE

In this example, the smoke sensor is connected to the AI/DI_2 port on the ECC800-Pro.
1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal
Configuration page is displayed.
3. Set Device type to ECC800, set Device name to ECC800, and click OK.
4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_2 to Smoke
and click Submit.
5. Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_2
Port Settings.
6. Set Smoke sensor to Enable and click Submit.
7. Confirm that Smoke sensor type is automatically identified as Smoke sensor
or Smoke sensor(NC).
8. Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, then click Power Supply Parameters.
Ensure that I power supply enable(AIDI_2/COM1/AIDI_4/COM3) is Enable.

Step 2 Check the monitoring functions of smoke sensor.

Table 5-9 Function check

Check Method Normal Connection Status Alarm Clearance Method

Simulate a Smoke DI alarm is displayed ● If Smoke sensor type is

smoky on the active alarm page of Smoke Sensor, power off
environment the app or WebUI. and reset the smoke
under the smoke sensor to clear the alarm.
sensor. ● If Smoke sensor type is
set to Smoke
Sensor(NC), press the
reset button of the smoke
sensor to clear the alarm.

----End

5.3.8.2 Commissioning the T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 02312PBL)

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 278

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RS485_IN port
on the T/H sensor, and the other end has been connected to the COM1/12V port
on the ECC800-Pro.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the T/H sensor device address.

Set the T/H sensor device address through the DIP switch on the T/H sensor.
Toggle switches 1–6 are used to set device addresses, toggle switch 7 is reserved,
and toggle switch 8 is used to switch the temperature unit. The device address is
set in binary mode. 1 is the least significant bit, and 6 is the most significant bit.
ON indicates 1, and OFF indicates 0. The address range is 1 to 4.

Figure 5-14 DIP switch definitions for T/H sensors

NOTE

The numbers 1–4 indicate the DIP switch settings of the T/H sensors.

Table 5-10 DIP switch settings for T/H sensors

T/H Sensor Toggl Toggl Toggl Toggl Toggl Toggl Toggl Toggl
Address e e e e e e e e
Switc Switc Switc Switc Switc Switc Switc Switc
h1 h2 h3 h4 h5 h6 h7 h8

1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Step 2 Add a T/H sensor.

1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add a T/H sensor.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 279

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Table 5-11 Adding a T/H sensor

Path Parameter Setting

Choose Device Select Sensor from the drop-down list box.

System attribute
Settings >
Device Device type Select T/H sensor from the drop-down list
Management box.
and click Add Connect to Select ECC800 from the drop-down list box.
Device. The
parameters Communica Select COM1 from the drop-down list box.
for adding tions port NOTE
devices are The setting example indicates that the T/H sensor
displayed. is connected to the COM1 port on the ECC800-
Pro. If the T/H sensor is connected to another
port, enter the number of the connected port.

Device In this example, Device address is set to 1.

address During actual configuration, set the device
address for the T/H sensor based on the
actual situation.

3. Click Connect Test to check whether the T/H sensor connects to the ECC800-
Pro properly.
– If the connection is normal, click Confirm. The connected devices are
displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
– If the connection is abnormal, check whether the device is properly
connected to the ECC800-Pro, whether the device and the ECC800-Pro are
running properly, and whether the parameter settings are consistent with
the device parameters.
Step 3 Check functions of the T/H sensor.

Table 5-12 Function check

Check Method Normal Connection Status

Check the running Choose Monitoring > Aisle > T/H Sensor Group
information about the T/H > T/H Sensor n > Running Info, and check the
sensor on the WebUI. current T/H and NTC information of the cabinet.

Set T/H sensor alarm Choose Monitoring > Aisle > T/H Sensor Group
thresholds. > T/H Sensor n > Running Parameters, and set
High temperature alarm threshold, Low
temperature alarm threshold, High humidity
alarm threshold, Low humidity alarm
threshold, NTC1–6 high temperature alarm
threshold and NTC1–6 low temperature alarm
threshold as required.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 280

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Table 5-13 Default alarm thresholds for T/H sensors

Signal Default Value

High temperature alarm threshold 35.0°C

Low temperature alarm threshold 5.0°C

High humidity alarm threshold 85.0% RH

Low humidity alarm threshold 15.0% RH

NTC1–3 high temperature alarm 35°C

threshold

NTC4–6 high temperature alarm 45°C

threshold

NTC1–3 low temperature alarm 5°C

threshold

NTC4–6 low temperature alarm 10°C

threshold

----End

5.3.8.3 Commissioning the WLD900 Water Sensor

If a water sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RJ45 port on the
WLDS900 water sensor, and the other end has been connected to the AI/DI_3 port
on the ECC800-Pro.

Context
● To use the AI/DI sensor, enable the corresponding AI/DI port and name the
sensor. The specific alarm then can be reported.
● If the sensor is prefabricated, only check its settings.
● The actual value prevails. Only the method of the parameter settings is
described.

Procedure
Step 1 Set water sensor parameters.
NOTE

The default alarm severity of the AI/DI port is Minor. If you want to change the alarm
severity, see How Should I Configure Alarm Parameters.
1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 281

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

2. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal
Configuration page is displayed.
3. Set Device type to ECC800, set Device name to ECC800, and click OK.
4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_3 to Leak
and click Submit.
5. Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_3
Port Settings.
6. Set Leak sensor to Enable and click Submit.
7. Confirm that Leak sensor type is automatically identified as Leak
sensor(Rope).
8. Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, and click Power Supply Parameters.
Ensure that II power supply enable(AIDI_3/COM2/AIDI_5) is Yes.

Step 2 Check functions of water sensors.

Table 5-14 Function check

Check Method Normal Connection Alarm Clearance

Status Method

Immerse the water Leak DI alarm is Wipe dry the water

detection cable in water. generated on the active detection cable. The
alarm screen of the app alarm disappears
or on the WebUI. automatically.

----End

5.3.9 Commissioning Cabinet Electronic Clasp Locks

When the system type is FusionModule800 and the cabinet electronic clasp locks
are installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Prerequisites
● The cabinet electronic clasp locks of odd- and even-numbered cabinets have
been cascaded in hand-in-hand mode respectively. One end of a network
cable is connected to the RS485_IN port on the first cabinet electronic clasp
lock of an odd-numbered cabinet, and the other end of the cable is connected
to the COM2 port on the ECC800-Pro; one end of another network cable is
connected to the RS485_IN port on the first cabinet electronic clasp lock of an
even-numbered cabinet, and the other end of the cable is connected to the
COM3 port on the ECC800-Pro.
● The smart module view has been deployed.
● The cabinet door can be opened and closed properly. If the cabinet door
cannot be opened and closed properly, adjust the position of the cabinet
electronic clasp lock by performing steps 1 and 2.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 282

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 (Optional) Check whether the cabinet door lock is leveled to 2000 (+3) mm. If
not, adjust it.

Step 2 (Optional) If the cabinet door still cannot be opened after step 1 is performed,
adjust the position of the cabinet electronic clasp lock by using the slotted holes
until the cabinet door can be opened and closed properly.

Step 3 Set device addresses for cabinet electronic clasp locks.

● A cabinet electronic clasp lock is installed at the front and rear doors of each
cabinet respectively. The address for the cabinet electronic clasp lock on the
front door is an odd number, and that for the cabinet electronic clasp lock on
the rear door is an even number.
● The cabinet electronic clasp locks of odd-numbered cabinets are connected in
series. The addresses start from 1, and a maximum of 12 cabinet electronic
clasp locks can be connected in series.
● The cabinet electronic clasp locks of even-numbered cabinets are connected
in series. The addresses start from 1, and a maximum of 12 cabinet electronic
clasp locks can be connected in series.
● Set a device address for a cabinet electronic clasp lock by operating the toggle
switch on the cabinet electronic clasp lock. Toggle switches 1 to 6 specify the
device address in binary mode. ON indicates 1, and OFF indicates 0.

Figure 5-15 Toggle switch addresses of the cabinet electronic locks

NOTICE

● The number indicates the DIP switch setting of the electronic clasp lock.
● The RS485_R toggle switches of the electronic locks must be set to ON for
cabinets at the ends.

Table 5-15 Setting a device address

Address Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle

Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 Switch 6

1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 283

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Address Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle

Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 Switch 6

2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

5 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

6 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF

7 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF

8 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

9 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

10 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF

11 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF

12 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

Step 4 Add the cabinet electronic clasp locks.

1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
2. Create a cabinet view in Smart Module View on the home page.
3. Add a cabinet electronic clasp lock.

Table 5-16 Adding an E-LOCK

Path Parameter Setting
Name

Choose System Settings Device Elock

> Device Management attribute
and click Add Device.
The parameters for Device type E-LOCK
adding devices are Connect to ECC800-Pro
displayed.
Communicat Odd-numbered cabinets: COM2
ions port Even-numbered cabinets: COM3

Device Enter the actual device address of

address the cabinet electronic clasp lock.

4. Click Test Connect to check whether the connection between the cabinet
electronic clasp lock and the ECC800-Pro is normal.
– If the connection is normal, click Confirm. The connected devices are
displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
– If the connection is abnormal, check whether the device is properly
connected to the ECC800-Pro, whether the device and the ECC800-Pro are

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 284

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

running properly, and whether the parameter settings are consistent with
the device parameters.
5. Repeat Step 4.3–Step 4.4 to connect other cabinet electronic clasp locks.
Step 5 Commission the cabinet electronic clasp locks.

Table 5-17 Function check

Function Path Operation

View ChooseMonit Click the View the running information

cabinet oring > Running Info about cabinet electronic clasp
electroni Cabinet > IT tab. lock 1 on the WebUI.
c clasp Cabinet101>
lock E-LOCK1a.
informati
on

Change Click the Change the cabinet electronic

the Running clasp lock name.
cabinet Parameters tab.
electroni
c clasp
lock
name.

Remotely Click the Select Open front door or Open

open a Controls tab. back door from the Cabinet
cabinet door control drop-down list box,
electroni and click Submit to remotely
c clasp open the door.
lock

Open Choose Monitoring > Cabinet, Select Open front door, Open
cabinet click the Controls tab back door, or Open all doors
electroni from the Open the door drop-
c clasp down list box, select the setting,
locks in and click Submit. The cabinet
batches electronic clasp locks unlock the
doors in batches based on the
signal value.

a: Intelligent lock 1 of IT cabinet 101 is used as an example.

Step 6 When closing the door, rotate the lock handle vertically downwards. If the door
cannot be opened or closed properly, locate the fault.
1. Check whether there is friction between the lock tongue and the electronic
lock. If there is friction, adjust the installation position of the electronic lock.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 285

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-16 Adjusting the installation position

2. Check whether there is interference between the lock tongue and the cabinet
post. If they interfere with each other, adjust the installation position of the
lock tongue.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 286

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-17 Adjusting the installation position

3. Check whether there is interference between the castors and the door sill at
the bottom of the cabinet. If they interfere with each other, remove the
fastener that secures the castors.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 287

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-18 Removing the fastener

NOTICE

To close the door, rotate the lock handle vertically downwards. If the door cannot
be opened or closed properly, check the following items:
● Whether cables are connected correctly
● Whether the toggle switch is set properly

----End

5.3.10 Event Notification

You can set alarm notification by email or SMS as required. Information about a
maximum of 20 users who will receive alarm notification can be displayed.

Prerequisites
To implement alarm notification by SMS, the following conditions must be met:

● The ECC800-Pro is configured with a 4G module and supports standard SIM

card access.
● The ECC800-Pro is connected to a network with an email server through a
WAN port. Both the Internet and local area network (LAN) are supported.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 288

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Event Notification.
Step 2 Set related outbox parameters.
1. Set related parameters in the Outbox Settings area on the Mailbox Settings
page. If the address type of the outbox is Domain name, choose System
Settings > System Parameters, and set related parameters in the DNS
Server Address area on the Monitor IP page.
NOTE

The DNS server address is provided by the local network operator.

2. Click Test to check the email sending. If an email fails to be sent, check the
outbox settings and DNS Server Address. If the email is sent successfully,
click Submit.

NOTICE

If Test email sending failed is displayed, check whether the receiver's email
server requires CA certificate verification. If it is required, download the CA
certificate from the receiver's email website and upload it in the Mailbox
Certificate area.

Figure 5-19 Email setting page

NOTE

The following email addresses are for reference only (the actual parameters apply) and are used
only for configuring the email function.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 289

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Table 5-18 Main parameters on the outbox configuration page

Email Email Mailbox Server Encryption Remarks
Type Server IP Address Mode and
Domain SMTP port
Name

Sina Mail smtp.sina.co How to obtain: Non- ● The email

m 1. Click Start encryption: 25 server must
on the PC, comply with
163 Mail smtp. Non- the standard
enter cmd in
163.com encryption: 25; SMTP
Running
SSL encryption: protocol to
area, and
465 ensure that
press Enter
126 Mail smtp. to access the Non- the email
126.com administrato encryption: 25; sending and
r page. SSL encryption: receiving
465 functions
2. Enter ping
are normal.
email server
QQ Mail smtp.QQ.co domain SSL encryption: ● Enter the
m name at the 465 email client
position of authorizatio
Sohu Mail smtp.sohu.c Non-
the blinking n password
om encryption: 25
cursor and at Password
139 Mail smtp. press Enter Non- for 163 Mail,
139.com to obtain encryption: 25 126 Mail,
email server and QQ
Hotmail smtp- IP addresses. TLS encryption: Mail.
mail.outloo 587 ● If the email
k.com type is not
189 Mail smtp. Non- in the list,
189.com encryption: 25 set
parameters
by referring
to the help
information
of the email
type.

Step 3 Add an email address to receive emails.

NOTE

The email address is used only for configuring the email function and is not used for other
purposes. The address is encrypted during transmission in the ECC800-Pro to ensure that
the personal data of users is fully protected.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 290

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-20 Adding an email address to receive emails

NOTE

Click Test to check whether the added mailbox is available. If it is available, Successfully to
send the test email. is displayed. If it is unavailable, Failed to send the test email. is displayed.
Check whether the receiver's mailbox parameters for receiving emails are correctly set.

Step 4 Add a mobile number to receive event notifications.

NOTE

The mobile phone number is used only for configuring the SMS function and is not used for
other purposes. The phone number is encrypted during transmission in the ECC800-Pro to
ensure that the personal data of users is fully protected.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 291

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-21 Adding a mobile number

NOTE

Click Test to check whether the added mobile phone number is available. If it is available,
Successfully to send the test short message. is displayed. If it is unavailable, Failed to send
the test short message. is displayed. Check whether the mobile phone number is correctly set.

Step 5 Set the alarm notification delay parameter and the new alarm notification
parameter.

Figure 5-22 Setting the alarm notification parameters

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 292

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-23 Adding alarm notification

NOTICE

Mailbox Address in Alarm Notification can be selected after it is added in

Mailbox Settings. Mobile Phone Number can be selected after it is added in
SMS Settings.

Step 6 Click Confirm to access the re-authentication page. Enter Login password and
click Submit.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
To modify or delete the email parameter settings, click Modify or Delete.

5.3.11 Video Management

5.3.11.1 Reference Documentation

Before commissioning a camera, prepare the following documents in addition to
this document.

Table 5-19 Commissioning documents

Component Document

C3220 Huawei C Series SDC 8.0.1 Product Documentation

VCN510/VCN520/ VCN510&VCN520&VCN540 Product Documentation

VCN540

IVS1800 IVS1800 8.1.0 Product Documentation

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 293

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

5.3.11.2 Networking Scenarios

Smart ETH Gateway Networking Scenario

● If there are multiple VCNs or IVS1800s for multiple smart modules, you are
advised to evenly distribute the cameras to each VCN or IVS1800.
● The number of cameras and VCNs or IVS1800s in a single smart module must
be less than 4.

Figure 5-24 Camera + VCN or IVS1800 connecting to the smart ETH gateway

NOTICE

● To ensure the normal operating of the ECC800-Pro, avoid high data traffic, such
as the concurrent display of dynamic monitoring of cameras and VCN or
IVS1800 video playback.
● To ensure the normal operating of ECC800-Pro services, you can view video
from a maximum of two cameras concurrently.

LAN Switch Networking Scenario

If there are multiple VCNs or IVS1800s for multiple smart modules, you are
advised to evenly distribute the cameras to each VCN or IVS1800.

Figure 5-25 Camera + VCN or IVS1800 connecting to the LAN switch

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 294

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

5.3.11.3 Commissioning a Camera (LAN Switch Networking Scenario)

5.3.11.3.1 Commissioning a C3220 Camera

Prerequisites
If multiple cameras are accessed, retain the connection of one camera and
disconnect connections from other cameras. After commissioning the connected
camera, commission other cameras in the same way.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the camera WebUI.
1. Configure the PC IP address and the camera IP address in the same network
segment. Enter the camera IP address (192.168.0.120 by default) in the
address bar of the Internet Explorer and press Enter.
NOTE

The following lists the requirements for the operating system and browser of the
camera WebUI:
– Supports Windows 7: Internet Explorer 10/11, Chrome 38+, FireFox 35–51
– Supports Windows 8: Internet Explorer 10/11, Chrome 38+, FireFox 35–51
– Supports Windows 10: Internet Explorer 11, Chrome 38+, FireFox 35–51
– The Internet Explorer tab plugin needs to be installed for Google Chrome 45 and
later versions.
– Only 32-bit browsers are supported.
2. Enter the preset user name admin and the preset password HuaWei123, and
click Log In.
NOTE

You need to set Internet Explorer before accessing the camera WebUI for the first time.

Table 5-20 Internet Explorer settings

Settings Procedure

Disable the proxy server. 1. Choose Tools > Internet

Options.
The Internet Options dialog box
is displayed.
2. Click the Connections tab.
3. Click LAN Settings.
4. Deselect Use a proxy for your
LAN.
5. Click OK.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 295

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Settings Procedure

Enable the ActiveX controls and 1. Choose Tools > Internet

plug-ins or set them to the prompt Options.
mode. The Internet Options dialog box
is displayed.
2. Click the Security tab.
3. Select Internet.
4. Click Custom level.
The Security Settings-Internet
Zone dialog box is displayed.
5. Set Automatic prompting for
ActiveX controls to Enable, and
set Download unsigned ActiveX
controls and Initialize and script
ActiveX controls not marked as
safe for scripting to Prompt.
6. Click OK.

Enable TLS 1.1 or TLS 1.2. NOTE

You must enable TLS 1.1 or TLS 1.2
when the HTTPS protocol is used to
access the camera. Otherwise, the
camera WebUI cannot be opened.
1. Choose Tools > Internet
Options.
The Internet Options dialog box
is displayed.
2. Click the Advanced tab.
3. Select Use TLS 1.1 or Use TLS
1.2.
4. Click OK.

Set Use Pop-up Blocker to Disable. 1. Choose Tools > Internet

Options.
The Internet Options dialog box
is displayed.
2. Click the Security tab.
3. Select Internet.
4. Click Custom level.
The Security Settings-Internet
Zone dialog box is displayed.
5. Set Use Pop-up Blocker to
Disable.
6. Click OK.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 296

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 2 Commission cameras and set parameters for them. For details, see the delivered
documents.
1. Preview the site situation in real time and check the camera coverage through
videos. Adjust the lens if necessary.
2. On the View tab page, click the Network/Time tab to access the Network/
Time tab page.

Figure 5-26 Setting the IP address

Table 5-21 IP address parameters

Parameter Description

IPv4 address Method for obtaining the IP address. The options are
assignment Obtain IP address automatically and Use the
following IP address. The default value is Obtain IP
address automatically.

IPv4 address Camera IP address. This parameter is available only

when IPv4 address assignment is set to Use the
following IP address.
Enter the planned IP address, for example,
192.168.1.161. IP addresses starting with 127 are
invalid. You must enter an IP address starting with a
value that ranges from 1 to 223.

IPv4 gateway Gateway IP address of the network where the camera is

located. The default value is 192.168.0.1.

IPv4 subnet Subnet mask of the network where the camera is

mask located. The default value is 255.255.255.0.

Primary DNS Primary DNS IP address. The default value is 0.0.0.0.

Secondary DNS Secondary DNS IP address. The default value is 0.0.0.0.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 297

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

3. On the View tab page, click the General tab to access the General tab page.
Select Video and set the parameters, as shown in the following figures.

Figure 5-27 Setting primary stream parameters

Figure 5-28 Setting secondary stream 1 parameters

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 298

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Table 5-22 Video stream parameters

Parameter Description

Primary stream/ Set the stream type based on the site requirements.
Secondary – Primary stream: The primary streams feature high
stream bit rate, definition, and bandwidth usage. They are
applicable to local storage.
– Secondary stream: The secondary streams provide
smooth video, occupy small bandwidth, and are
applicable to data transmission over low-bandwidth
networks.
NOTE
SD card recording supports only primary streams.

Intelligent After intelligent encoding is enabled, a camera can

encoding automatically adapt to scenarios to reduce the bit rate
and save the storage space.
A higher intelligent encoding level indicates more
significant reduction of the bit rate, which however may
lead to image quality deterioration.

Slice This parameter is available only when you set Encoding

protocol to H.264.
Multi-slice encoding indicates that video streams are
divided into multiple segments. Each segment forms a
slice. The encoding process of each slice is independent
of each other. Therefore, the camera can encode and
decode multiple slices in parallel, improving encoding
and decoding performance. This parameter is selected
by default.

Encoding Set the coding protocol based on the site requirements.

protocol The options are as follows:
– H.264: The H.264 protocol requires relatively small
bandwidth to ensure video quality.
– MJPEG: The MJPEG protocol decodes and displays
each frame independently without referring to the
previous and next frames. This protocol has a small
compression ratio and requires large bandwidth to
ensure video quality. This protocol is suitable for
video editing.
– H.265: The H.265 protocol is bandwidth-conserving
compared with the H.264 protocol.

Encoding The options of H.264 profiles include Base profile, Main

complexity profile, and High profile. Among these profiles, the
baseline profile has the lowest encoding compression
performance and lowest requirements on hardware
decoding performance, while the high profile has the
highest.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 299

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Parameter Description

Resolution A higher resolution indicates clearer images and higher

bandwidth consumption.

Bit rate type This parameter is available only when you set Encoding
protocol to H.264 or H.265.
The bit rate is measured by data bits transmitted in a
unit of time.
– Variable bit rate: The bit rate varies depending on
the image complexity to ensure the clarity of images
with great dynamic changes. The bit rate is low if the
image is simple or static. The variable bit rate is
recommended.
– Constant bit rate: The constant bit rate remains the
same. The upper limit of the instantaneous bit rate is
set to 110%. If the bit rate is incorrectly configured
for images with great dynamic changes, the images
will be unclear.

Max. bit rate This parameter is available only when you set Bit rate
type to Variable bit rate.
The bit rate range depends on the selected resolution.

Bit rate value Average bit rate when Bit rate type is set to Constant
bit rate.
The bit rate range depends on the selected resolution.

Bit rate control This parameter is available only when you set Bit rate
mode type to Constant bit rate. The options are as follows:
– Frame rate priority: Ensure the smoothness of the
video image.
– Image quality priority: Ensure the quality of the
video image.

Frame rate The frame rate is measured by the number of frames

displayed in a second.
A higher frame rate indicates clearer and smoother
images and higher bandwidth consumption.

Image quality This parameter is available only when you set Encoding
protocol to H.264 or H.265 and Bit rate type to
Variable bit rate.
Better image quality requires higher bandwidth.
Therefore, select proper image quality based on the site
requirements.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 300

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Parameter Description

I-frame interval This parameter is available only when you set Encoding
protocol to H.264 or H.265.
An I frame is an intra-coded frame that represents a
fixed image independent of other picture types. Each
group of pictures (GOP) begins with this type of frame.
A smaller I-frame interval indicates better video quality
and higher bandwidth consumption.

Layered This parameter is available only when you set Encoding

encoding protocol to H.264 or H.265.
To enable layered encoding, select Layered encoding.

JPEG quality This parameter is available only when you set Encoding
protocol to MJPEG.
A larger value indicates higher image quality.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Commission other cameras by referring to this section.

5.3.11.3.2 Commissioning a C3220 Camera (SD Card Configured)

Context
If the VCN or IVS1800 is not configured and an SD card is chosen, perform the
following procedure.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the Huawei camera WebUI.
1. Configure the PC IP address and the camera IP address in the same network
segment. Enter the camera IP address (192.168.0.120 by default) in the
address bar of the Internet Explorer and press Enter.
2. Enter the preset user name admin and the preset password HuaWei123, and
click Log In.

Step 2 For details about how to commission the camera and set parameters, see the
documents delivered with the device or the documents obtained by referring to
the "Preparing Documentation" section.
1. Preview the site situation in real time and check the camera coverage through
videos. Adjust the lens if necessary.
2. Set IPv4 address, IPv4 subnet mask, and IPv4 gateway address to the
planned values.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 301

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-29 Setting the IP address of the camera

3. Format the SD card.

a. Choose Settings > System Configuration > Storage Management.
b. The Storage Management page is displayed. Format the SD card.
4. Set the camera stream type and primary stream parameters. Path: Settings >
Video/Audio/Image > Video Settings.

Figure 5-30 Setting audio and video parameters

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 302

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTE

If longer-time video storage is required, set camera parameters according to the following
table.

Table 5-23 Camera configuration parameters

Condition Result

Encoding Resolutio Frame I-Frame Minimum Supporte

Protocol n Rate Interval Bit Rate d Video
Required Storage
Duration
(h)

H.265 1080P 25 50 1 Mbit/s 66

H.264 1080P 25 50 1 Mbit/s 66

H.265 720P 25 50 0.8 Mbit/s 75

H.264 720P 25 50 1 Mbit/s 66

H.265 720P 25 50 0.6 Mbit/s 105

H.264 720P 25 50 0.8 Mbit/s 75

5. Choose Settings > Intelligent Analysis > Common Intelligence. Select

Enable, click Add, add motion detection areas, set motion detection
parameters, and click Save.
6. Set the deployment policy.

Figure 5-31 Setting the deployment policy

7. Set the alarm linkage policy.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 303

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-32 Setting the alarm linkage policy

----End

5.3.11.4 Commissioning a Camera (Smart ETH Gateway Networking

Scenario)

5.3.11.4.1 Commissioning a C3220 Camera

Prerequisites
● If multiple cameras are connected, commission one camera first and then
commission other cameras in the same way.
● The camera has connected to the smart ETH gateway and the smart ETH
gateway communicates properly with the ECC800-Pro.
● The camera software version is later than SDC 8.0.RC111.

Context
● Before commissioning the C3220 camera, set the IP address for the C3220
camera based on customer requirements.
● Configure the internal IP addresses of the camera and VCN or IVS1800 and
the IP address of the LAN port on the ECC800-Pro in the same network
segment.
● Configure the external IP addresses of the camera and VCN or IVS1800 and
the IP address of the WAN_1 port on the ECC800-Pro in the same network.
● Set the internal and external IP addresses as planned by the customer. The
following IP addresses are for reference only.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 304

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Table 5-24 IP address planning

Device Internal IP Address External IP Address

Camera Example: 192.168.248.50; range: Camera external IP

192.168.248.50–192.168.248.199 address
NOTE
The 192.168.246.X
network segment
cannot be set.

VCN/ Example: 192.168.248.51; range: VCN or IVS1800

IVS1800 192.168.248.50–192.168.248.199 external IP address
NOTE
The 192.168.246.X
network segment
cannot be set.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the camera web system and enable ONVIF.
1. Remove the network cables that connect the smart ETH gateway to the LAN1
and LAN2 ports on the ECC800-Pro.
2. Use a network cable to connect the PC to the PoE port on the smart ETH
gateway. Then, set the local IP address of the PC to 192.168.0.11.
3. Remove the camera shell and press the reset button for 6s to 10s to restart
the camera.

Figure 5-33 Reset button

4. Open a web browser, enter https://192.168.0.120 in the address box, and

press Enter. Enter the default user name admin and preset password
HuaWei123, and click Log In. The camera WebUI is displayed.
NOTE

You need to set your Internet Explorer browser at your first login. For details about
how to set your Internet Explorer browser, see Table 5-25.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 305

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Table 5-25 Internet Explorer settings

Settings Procedure

Disable the proxy server. 1. Choose Tools > Internet

Options.
The Internet Options dialog box
is displayed.
2. Click the Connections tab.
3. Click LAN Settings.
4. Deselect Use a proxy for your
LAN.
5. Click OK.

Enable the ActiveX controls and 1. Choose Tools > Internet

plug-ins or set them to the prompt Options.
mode. The Internet Options dialog box
is displayed.
2. Click the Security tab.
3. Click Internet.
4. Click Custom level.
The Security Settings-Internet
Zone dialog box is displayed.
5. Set Automatic prompting for
ActiveX controls to Enable, and
set Download unsigned ActiveX
controls and Initialize and script
ActiveX controls not marked as
safe for scripting to Prompt.
6. Click OK.

Enable TLS 1.1 or TLS 1.2. NOTE

You must enable TLS 1.1 or TLS 1.2
when the HTTPS protocol is used to
access the camera. Otherwise, the
camera WebUI cannot be opened.
1. Choose Tools > Internet
Options.
The Internet Options dialog box
is displayed.
2. Click the Advanced tab.
3. Select Use TLS 1.1 or Use TLS
1.2.
4. Click OK.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 306

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Settings Procedure

Set Use Pop-up Blocker to Disable. 1. Choose Tools > Internet

Options.
The Internet Options dialog box
is displayed.
2. Click the Security tab.
3. Select Internet.
4. Click Custom level.
The Security Settings-Internet
Zone dialog box is displayed.
5. Set Use Pop-up Blocker to
Disable.
6. Click OK.

5. Choose View > Network/Time > Second Protocol Parameters, and select
Enable ONVIF.

Figure 5-34 ONVIF parameters

6. Remove the network cable from the PC to the PoE port on the ETH gateway.
7. Connect the PC to the LAN1 port on the ECC800-Pro using a network cable,
and reconnect the network cable between the smart ETH gateway and the
LAN2 port on the ECC800-Pro.
Step 2 Set the IP address for the C3220 camera.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 307

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

1. Enter https://192.168.248.10 in the address box of the browser and press

Enter to access the WebUI login page. After login, choose System Settings >
Video Management.
2. (Optional) Click Search.
NOTE

– The search timeout interval is 10s. If the search fails, a search failure message is
displayed.
– To avoid missing cameras, you can perform Search for multiple times.

3. On the found camera record, click and set the external IP address for the
camera based on the external IP address allocated by the network
administrator (PC IP address and camera external IP address should be in the
same network segment).
4. Click the link under Link to access and log in to the camera WebUI. Enter the
preset user name admin and the preset password HuaWei123, and click Log
In.

Figure 5-35 Clicking the camera access link

5. Choose Settings > Network > TCP/IP, set Way to obtain IPv4 to Use the
following IP address and set an IP address to the planned IP address for the
camera. The IP address should be in the range of 192.168.248.50 to
192.168.248.199.
Step 3 On the ECC800-Pro WebUI, click Add under Video Information. In the New Video
Information dialog box that is displayed, enter camera and VCN or IVS1800
information.
● Name: Enter the camera and VCN or IVS1800 names (for example, Camera1).
● External IP: Enter the external IP address of the camera or VCN (the actual IP
address planned by the customer prevails).
● Internal IP: Enter the internal IP addresses of the camera and VCN or
IVS1800, for example, 192.168.248.56.

Figure 5-36 Allocated internal IP address of the camera

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 308

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

● Video Type: Select the video type based on the customer's device.
● Link: Enter the external IP address of the camera (for example, https://
external IP address of the camera).
● Change IP camera ONVIF interface access password: The default password
of ONVIF is HuaWei123, which is different from the web user password. If
you have changed the default password for accessing the ONVIF interface of
the IP camera, enter the new password in Password. Otherwise, the ECC800-
Pro cannot collect motion detection alarms from the IP camera.

Figure 5-37 Adding video information

Figure 5-38 Password for accessing the IP camera ONVIF interface

Step 4 After entering the video information, click Confirm.

Step 5 In the Video Information list, click the link under the Link column and go to the
camera WebUI as prompted.
Step 6 For details about how to commission the camera and set parameters, see the
documents delivered with the device or the documents obtained by referring to
the "Preparing Documentation" section.
1. Preview the site situation in real time and check the camera coverage through
videos. Adjust the lens if necessary.
2. (Optional) Configure an SD card if the VCN or IVS1800 is not configured.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 309

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

3. Choose Settings > Video/Audio/Image > Video, and set camera stream
type, primary stream, and secondary stream 1 parameters, as shown in the
following figures.

NOTICE

Set the encoding protocol to H.265.

Figure 5-39 Setting primary stream parameters

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 310

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-40 Setting secondary stream 1 parameters

----End

5.3.11.4.2 Commissioning a C3220 Camera (SD Card Configured)

Context
If the VCN or IVS1800 is not configured and an SD card is chosen, perform the
following procedure.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the Huawei camera WebUI.
Step 2 Format the SD card.
1. Choose Settings > System Configuration > Storage Management.
2. The Storage Management page is displayed. Format the SD card.
Step 3 Set the camera stream type and primary stream parameters. Path: Settings >
Video/Audio/Image > Video Settings.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 311

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-41 Setting audio and video parameters

NOTE

If longer-time video storage is required, set camera parameters according to the following table.

Table 5-26 Camera configuration parameters

Condition Result

Encoding Resolution Frame I-Frame Minimum Supported

Protocol Rate Interval Bit Rate Video
Required Storage
Duration
(h)

H.265 1080P 25 50 1 Mbit/s 66

H.264 1080P 25 50 1 Mbit/s 66

H.265 720P 25 50 0.8 Mbit/s 75

H.264 720P 25 50 1 Mbit/s 66

H.265 720P 25 50 0.6 Mbit/s 105

H.264 720P 25 50 0.8 Mbit/s 75

Step 4 Choose Settings > Intelligent Analysis > Common Intelligence. Select Enable,
click Add, add motion detection areas, set motion detection parameters, and click
Save.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 312

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 5 Set the deployment policy.

Figure 5-42 Setting the deployment policy

Step 6 Set the alarm linkage policy.

Figure 5-43 Setting the alarm linkage policy

----End

5.3.11.5 Commissioning a Network Video Recorder (VCN Scenario)

5.3.11.5.1 Logging In to the OMU Portal

Prerequisites
The default IP address of the VCN is configured before delivery. You need to
configure the IP address of the PC in the same network segment as the IP address
of the VCN. The version number is subject to the Quick Start delivered with the
VCN.

Procedure
Step 1 Enter the OMU portal address (the default address for VCN500 is https://
192.168.1.100:8443; the default address for VCN510/VCN520/VCN540 is https://
192.168.2.101:8443) in the address bar of the Internet Explorer and press Enter.
NOTE

The OMU portal supports Internet Explorer 8.0 and later versions.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 313

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 2 On the login page, enter the user name admin and preset password Change_Me,
and click Log In to enter the OMU portal page. A message is displayed upon the
first login indicating that you should change the password. After changing the
password, keep it properly.
NOTE

● If the device is VCN510, distinguish the VCN510-8 from the VCN510-16P. The VCN510-8
does not have eight PoE ports, and the VCN510-16P has PoE ports.
The default user name of the VCN510-8 is Admin, and that of the VCN510-16P is
admin.

Figure 5-44 VCN510-8 rear view

Figure 5-45 VCN510-16P rear view

● If the device is not VCN510 and the software version is V100R003 or later, the default
user name is admin. If the software version is V100R002 or earlier, the default user
name is Admin.

----End

5.3.11.5.2 Initializing VCN510 Disks

Context
When the VCN510 is delivered to the site, recording data can be stored only after
you install and initialize the disks.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OMU portal of the VCN.
Step 2 Choose Local Configuration > Local Disk.
Step 3 In the upper-right corner of the RAID Groups area, click Initial disk.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 314

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-46 Initializing disks

Step 4 Choose whether to create a RAID group. To set disks as a RAID group, select
RAID1. To set disks to work independently, select NON-RAID.
NOTE

The VCN510 supports only RAID1 or NON-RAID. If only one disk is configured, the VCN510
supports only NON-RAID. This section assumes that two disks are configured for the
VCN510.

Table 5-27 Disk modes

RAID Mode Description

RAID1 Two disks are required in RAID 1 mode. If RAID 1 is used,

disks back up each other. After recording data is stored in a
disk, the data will be simultaneously backed up to another
disk, ensuring high data storage reliability. However, the
disk usage of RAID 1 is lower than that of disks that work
independently.

NON-RAID If disks work independently, recording data is stored into

two disks in sequence, ensuring high disk usage. However,
the data storage reliability of disks that work independently
is lower than that of RAID 1.

Step 5 Click Start. A risk warning is displayed.

Step 6 Click OK. The system starts to initialize the disks.
NOTE

The server will be restarted during the initialization of disks. The process takes about 5 to
10 minutes.

----End

Verification
Step 1 Choose Local Configuration > Local Disk.
Step 2 View the RAID group status in the RAID Groups area.
If RAID1 is selected for the disks, RAID 1 is created for both the system partition
(used to store system data) and data partition (used to store recordings).

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 315

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-47 RAID group status of RAID 1

When two disks are configured, if NON-RAID is selected for the disks, RAID 1 is
created for the system partition.

Figure 5-48 RAID group status of disks that work independently (two disks)

If only one disk is configured, RAID 0 is created for the system partition after disks
are initialized.

Figure 5-49 RAID group status of disks that work independently (one disk)

NOTE

● After a RAID 1 is created for the system partition, the system partition's RAID group is in
data restoration state. At this time, one disk is synchronizing data in the system
partition to the system partition of another disk. The synchronization process takes
about 20 hours, which does not impact services. During this process, do not remove and
insert disks.
● If the OMU portal stays at the Local Disk tab page, even if users do not perform any
operation for a long period of time, the OMU portal will not automatically return to the
login page. For service security reasons, if users do not perform any operation for a long
period of time, the OMU portal will return to the login page or does not stay at the
Local Disk tab page.

----End

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 316

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

5.3.11.5.3 Setting Parameters on the VCN WebUI

Prerequisites
The description and links in this section are for reference only. For detailed
configuration, see the Configuration Guide. For details, see the documentation
delivered with the device or obtain the documentation by referring to the
"Reference Documentation" section.

Context
After the VCN is delivered to the site, you need to reset the IP address, system
time zone, and time based on the actual network plan.

Procedure
Step 1 Modify the IP address for the VCN.
1. Log in to the OMU portal of the VCN.
2. Choose Local Configuration > Server configuration. Set the service IP
address (internal IP address of the VCN), time zone, and time according to
the site requirements.

Figure 5-50 Configuring the server

NOTE

Set Business IP to XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, Subnet mask to 255.255.255.0, and Gateway IP

to XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX. The values here are examples. The actual value prevails.
The VCN automatically restarts after the IP address is modified. The restart takes
about 5 minutes. After the restart, use the new IP address to access the VCN.
3. Modify the IP address for the PC. Ensure that the PC IP address is in the
network segment of the new VCN IP address. Then, enter the VCN IP address
in the address box of the Internet Explorer and log in to the OMU portal
system.
4. (Optional) Configure the NTP synchronization function. After setting The NTP
clock source server to Yes, set the IP address of the NTP server.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 317

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTE

Currently, the VCN and NTP source server must be in the same LAN for NTP
synchronization. For details, see Step 2.
If the VCN and the NTP source server are not in the same LAN, you need to manually
set the time as follows: Choose Local Configuration > Server configuration and
change Timezone config and Time config based on the time of the source server to
be synchronized.
5. Choose Maintenance > Unified Configuration, set Module Name to MU,
and click Search.
6. (Skip this step for a device that is not VCN510-16P.) In the search result, click
Edit in the row where Parameter Name is NatRtspServerPort, delete the
parameter value 0 from Value, leave the value empty, and click Save.

Figure 5-51 Setting the NAT port number for the MU

7. In the search result, click Edit in the row where the value of Parameter Name
is NatIP and set Value to the external IP address of the VCN. Click Save.

Figure 5-52 Setting the external IP address of the MU

NOTE

Set NatIP to the external IP address of the VCN, which is the same as the external IP
address mapped by the VCN on the ECC800-Pro.
8. Set Module name to OMU and click Search.
9. In the search result, click Edit in the row where Parameter Name is
OMUNatIP and set Value to the NAT IP address of the MU. Click Save.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 318

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-53 Setting the external IP address of the OMU

Step 2 Enable camera NTP synchronization.

The camera NTP synchronization function for the server is disabled by default. The
camera NTP synchronization function needs to be enabled for the server that
connects to the camera. After the camera NTP synchronization function is enabled,
cameras will automatically time-synchronize from their access servers.
1. Log in to the OMU portal of the VCN as user admin.
2. Choose Maintenance > Unified Configuration.
3. Select the server that the camera needs to access, set Module name to SCU
and Parameter type to System property, and click Search.

Figure 5-54 Configuring camera NTP synchronization

4. In the search results, click Edit in the row where Parameter Name is NTPIPC
and set Value to 1.
5. Click Save. After the camera NTP synchronization function is enabled, the
camera, after being connected to the server, will automatically synchronize
time with the server.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
● (Optional) Set up a VCN stack. For details, log in to the https://
e.huawei.com/, search for the VCN product documentation, open the
documentation, and see the section (Optional) Deploying IVS in Stack
Mode.
● (Optional) Create a VCN cluster. For details, log in to the https://
e.huawei.com/, search for the VCN product documentation, open the
documentation, and see the section (Optional) Deploying MPUs in Cluster
Mode.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 319

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTE

For the VCN500, search for VCN500 Product Documentation. For the
VCN510&VCN520&VCN540, search for VCN510&VCN520&VCN540 Product
Documentation.

5.3.11.5.4 Setting Parameters on the VCN IVS Client

Prerequisites
The network communication between the VCN and the camera is normal.

Procedure
Step 1 Install the VCN IVS client.
1. Download the VCN IVS client.

You can obtain the VCN IVS in either of the following ways:

Method 1: Obtain the HW_IVS_Client.exe file from the software CD-ROM

delivered with the VCN.

Method 2 1. Log in to the VCN OMU Portal, choose Local Configuration >
Basic Configuration, and view Current version.
2. Log in to https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/, and search
for Client Package.zip followed by the VCN model (Client
Package.zip VCN540 for example). In the search result, click
the Software Download tab, click the version and patch
number corresponding to the current version, and download
the Client Package.zip software package.

Figure 5-55 Client Package search result

2. Right-click HW_IVS_Client.exe and choose Run as administrator from the

shortcut menu. Use the default installation mode until the installation is
complete.
3. Right-click the client program and choose Run as administrator from the
shortcut menu. The login page is displayed, enter the user name admin and
preset password Change_Me, and set Server address to the actual service IP
address (VCN IP address) and Port to 9900.
NOTE

If the VCN IVS and VCN are deployed in the same LAN, set Server IP address to the
VCN internal IP address (192.168.248.55, for example). If the VCN IVS is on an
extranet and the VCN is on a LAN, set Server IP address to the VCN external IP
address.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 320

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

4. Click Log In to access the client home page. A message is displayed upon the
first login indicating that you should modify the password. After modifying
the password, keep it properly.

Step 2 Add a camera. For details, see the documentation delivered with the equipment or
obtain the documentation by referring to the "Preparing Documentation" section.
View the corresponding section.
NOTE

The driver protocol of IPC6325 and C3220 cameras is HWSDK.

1. In the Quick Setup area on the VCN IVS home page, double-click Add
Camera.
2. Click + in the lower left corner on the Search criteria page, setting the
parameters according to the following table, and click Next.

Table 5-28 Setting search criteria

Item Value

Start IP Address and End IP Address IP address range

Drive HWSDK

Access domain Select the domain that cameras

need to access

Mount server Select the server that cameras need

to access

NOTE

If there are multiple VCNs for multiple smart modules, you are advised to evenly distribute
the cameras to each VCN.
3. Click Search, in each camera record, enter the user name and password in the
text boxes and click Verify. If the camera is verified successfully, select
cameras to add and click Next.
4. Preview live video images, click the camera in the camera list on the left, and
adjust camera parameters to optimize the image effect. Then click Next.
5. (Optional) Group the cameras and click Next after grouping.
6. Click Finish to finish adding a camera.

Step 3 Configure a video recording plan.

1. In the Quick Setup area on the VCN IVS home page, double-click Server
Recording Plan.
2. Select the camera on the Cameras list and click Next.
3. (Optional) Set recording parameters, and click Next.
4. Set recording plan parameters in the Time settings. Drag the timeline to
select the time segment for implementing video recording.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 321

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTE

If you set the recording plan policy is to All, you do not need to set the recording plan
time.
5. Click Next to complete the recording plan setting. When is displayed in the
status bar, the recording plan has been set successfully.
6. Click Finish.

Step 4 Create a user.

When connecting to the VCN on the NetEco, you need to log in to the VCN as a
non-admin user.

1. Log in to the VCN IVS as user admin.

2. On the VCN IVS home page, double-click Add User, create a user, and click
Next. The Assign Rights page is displayed.
NOTE

When creating a user, you can select Enable account validity period and set Valid from
and Valid to to set the account validity period for the created user.

Figure 5-56 Creating a user

3. Set Multi-point logins to a value greater than 2.

4. In the Assign Device View Rights area, select the cameras to be browsed and
queried by the user. Set other parameters based on the documentation
delivered with the equipment or the documentation obtained by referring to
the Preparing Documentation section, and click Finish.

----End

5.3.11.6 Commissioning a Network Video Recorder (IVS1800 Scenario)

5.3.11.6.1 Setting Parameters on the IVS1800 WebUI

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 322

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Prerequisites
For details about the IVS1800 hardware description and installation, see the Quick
Start in the corresponding IVS1800 product documentation. For details about the
IVS1800 configuration, see the Configuration Guide. For details, see the
documentation delivered with the device or obtain the documentation by referring
to the "Reference Documentation" section.

Context
A default IP address has been configured for the IVS1800 before delivery. Modify
the IP address based on the actual network plan.

Procedure
Step 1 Enter https://IP address:8443 in the address box, and press Enter.

In the URL, IP address indicates the IP address of the IVS1800. The default IP
address is 192.168.3.111.

NOTE

The OMU portal supports Internet Explorer 10.0 and later versions.

Step 2 Log in to the OMU portal. Set the service system and operating system passwords
at the first login.
1. Setting the password for the admin user of the service system
2. Setting the password for the admin user of the operating system
3. Setting the password for the root user of the operating system
4. Enter the user name and password to log in to the OMU portal again. The
following figure shows the home page after a successful login.

Figure 5-57 OMU portal home page

Step 3 Configure disk initialization.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 323

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTE

Recording data can be stored only after you install and initialize the disks.
1. Choose Local Configuration > Local Disk.
2. In the upper right corner of the RAID Groups area, click Initial Disk
3. Configure disk initialization.

Figure 5-58 Disk initialization (RAID 5 economical configuration by default)

Step 4 Modify the IP address for the IVS1800.

1. Choose Local Configuration > Server configuration. Set the service IP
address (internal IP address of the IVS1800), time zone, and time according to
the site requirements.

Figure 5-59 Configuring the server (Single Mode by default)

NOTE

Set Business IP to XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, Subnet mask to 255.255.255.0, and Gateway IP

to XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX. The values here are examples. The actual value prevails.
2. Change the PC IP address to an address in the network segment of the new
IVS1800 IP address, enter the IVS1800 IP address in the address box of the
Internet browser, and log in to the OMU portal system.
3. (Optional) Configure the NTP synchronization. After setting The NTP clock
source server to Yes, set the IP address of the NTP server.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 324

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTE

Currently, the IVS1800 and NTP source server must be in the same LAN for NTP
synchronization. For details, see 5.
If the IVS1800 and the NTP source server are not in the same LAN, you need to
manually set the time as follows: Choose Local Configuration > Server configuration
and change Timezone config and Time config based on the time of the source server
to be synchronized.
4. Choose Maintenance > Unified Configuration, set Module Name to MU,
and click Search.
5. In the search result, click Edit in the row where the value of Parameter Name
is MUNNatIP and set Value to the external IP address of the IVS1800. Click
Save.

Figure 5-60 Setting the external IP address of the MU

NOTE

Set MUNNatIP to the external IP address of the IVS1800, which is the same as the
external IP address mapped by the IVS1800 on the ECC800-Pro.
6. Set Module Name to OMU and click Search.
7. In the search result, click Edit in the row where the value of Parameter Name
is OMUNNatIP and set Value to the MUNNatIP address of the MU. Click
Save.

Figure 5-61 Setting the external IP address of the OMU

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 325

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 5 Enable camera NTP synchronization.

The camera NTP synchronization function for the server is disabled by default. The
camera NTP synchronization function needs to be enabled for the server that
connects to the camera. After the camera NTP synchronization function is enabled,
cameras will automatically time-synchronize from their access servers.
1. Log in to the OMU portal as the admin user.
2. Choose Maintenance > Unified Configuration.
3. Set Module Name to SCU and Parameter type to System property, and
click Search.
4. In the search results, click Edit in the row where Parameter Name is NTPIPC
and set Value to 1.
5. Click Save. After the camera NTP synchronization function is enabled, the
camera, after being connected to the server, will automatically time-
synchronize with the server.

Figure 5-62 Configuring camera NTP synchronization

Step 6 Create a user.

When connecting to the IVS1800 on the NetEco, you need to log in to the VCN as
a non-admin user.
1. Log in to the OMU portal as the admin user.
2. Choose User Management > Add User.
NOTE

When creating a user, you can select Enable account validity period and set Valid from
and Valid to to set the account validity period for the created user.
3. Set Multi-point logins to a value greater than 2.
4. On the User List page, click Permission Settings next to the new user, select
the cameras to be browsed and queried, obtain the documents delivered with
the device or by referring to the "Reference Documentation" section, set other
parameters, and click Save.

----End

5.3.11.6.2 Setting Parameters on the iClient

Prerequisites
The network communication between the IVS1800 and the camera is normal.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 326

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Install the iClient.
1. Download the iClient.
You can obtain the iClient in either of the following ways:

Method 1: Obtain the iClient installation program from the OMU portal.

Log in to the OMU portal, click Client Download in the

upper right corner, and save the installation program to a local
directory.

Method 2 1. Log in to the OMU portal, choose Local Configuration >

Basic Configuration, and view Current version.
2. Log in to https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/, and search
for and choose iClient. In the search result, click the
Software Download tab, click the version and patch number
corresponding to the current version, and download the
software package as required.

Figure 5-63 iClient software package search result

2. Decompress the software package, double-click the installation program, and

complete the installation as prompted.
3. Right-click the client program and choose Run as administrator from the
shortcut menu. The login page is displayed.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 327

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-64 Logging in to the iClient

4. Select Micro Edge Access.

5. Add an IVS1800.

Figure 5-65 Adding a device

NOTE

– If the iClient and IVS1800 are deployed in the same LAN, set Address to the
internal IP address of the IVS1800. If the iClient is installed on an external network
and the IVS1800 is deployed in the LAN, set Address to the external IP address of
the IVS1800.
– When the IVS1800 is added to the iClient by the admin user, the iClient checks
whether the login password of the admin user has been set. If the password is not
set, log in to the OMU portal to set the password.
6. Click Finish to go to the iClient.

Step 2 Add a camera. For details, see the documentation delivered with the device or
obtain the documentation by referring to the "Reference Documentation" section.
View the corresponding section.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 328

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

1. On the home page of the iClient, click Device Management.

2. Right-click an IVS1800 and choose Camera Access.

Figure 5-66 Camera Access

3. Select Auto Batch Access and click Start.

4. Set the IP address segment.

Figure 5-67 Setting an IP network segment

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 329

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTE

– The driver protocol of IPC6325 and C3220 cameras is HWSDK.

– The IP address segment indicates the start and end IP addresses of cameras.
5. You can use IP Address and Vendor to filter the required cameras in the
camera search result and select the required cameras. Alternatively, you can
directly select the required cameras in the camera list. Then verify accounts.
The default password of the HWSDK protocol is HuaWei123.

Figure 5-68 Verifying accounts

NOTE

If there are multiple IVS1800s for multiple smart modules, you are advised to evenly
distribute the cameras to each IVS1800.
6. Select the cameras to be added and click Next.
7. Click Finish.
8. Preview live video. On the iClient home page, click Live and drag a camera to
the live video pane. If the live video can be properly played, the camera is
successfully connected.
Step 3 Configure a recording policy.
1. Select Local mode to log in to the iClient. On the home page, click Device
Management.
2. Right-click an IVS1800 and choose Storage Management.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 330

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-69 Selecting Storage Management

3. Click Storage Policy and configure a storage policy.

Figure 5-70 Configuring a storage policy

Step 4 Configure a server video recording plan.

1. Select Local mode to log in to the iClient. On the home page, click Device
Management.
2. Right-click an IVS1800 and choose Storage Management.
3. Click the Server Recording Plan tab. The tab page for configuring a server
recording plan is displayed.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 331

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-71 Server Recording Plan

4. Configure a server recording plan.

NOTE

If you set the recording plan policy to All, you do not need to set the recording plan time.
5. Click Save.

----End

5.3.12 Linkage Control

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the IP address of the ECC800-Pro as well as the user name
and password used for WebUI login.
● A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as that of the ECC800-
Pro is prepared, and the PC has connected to port WAN_1 on the ECC800-Pro.
● Ensure that Enable linkage control function is Yes.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 332

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Linkage Grouping

Table 5-29 FusionModule800 linkage grouping

Linkage Default Function

Category Status

Link off When this linkage status is set to on:

emergency ● If the smart cooling product communicates
ventilation properly but does not provide the cooling function,
with and the temperature in the cold aisle is greater
Cabinet than or equal to the preset value (30°C by default),
Electronic the rear door of the IT cabinet automatically opens.
Clasp lock
open ● If all smart cooling products fail to communicate,
and the temperature in the cold aisle is greater
than or equal to the preset value (30°C by default),
the rear door of the IT cabinet automatically opens.
● If the rear door of the IT cabinet is open and the
temperature in the cold aisle is higher than the
preset value (35°C by default), the front door of
the IT cabinet automatically opens.
● If at least one smart cooling product is in cooling
mode or the temperature in the cold aisle is lower
than the preset temperature (30°C by default)
minus 2°C, the ECC800-Pro reports a critical alarm
to remind the customer to close the door manually.
The alarm is cleared after the door is closed.
NOTE
● After the IT cabinet door automatically opens, a door
open alarm is displayed on the active alarms page of
the ECC800-Pro.
● In the Linkage Group area, click Link emergency
ventilation with cabinet electronic clasp lock open.
Click to expand the Linkage Logic List. Click
in the Operation column to modify the temperature
setting.

Link smoke off When this linkage status is set to on:

alarm with ● If a smoke alarm is generated, the rear cabinet
Cabinet door is opened.
Electronic
Clasp lock ● When the cabinet door is opened, the ECC800-Pro
open generates a door open alarm. After the smoke
alarm is cleared, you need to manually close the
door. After the door is closed, the door open alarm
is cleared.
● If the emergency heat dissipation control logic
conflicts with the smoke alarm control logic, the
smoke alarm control logic takes precedence.
NOTE
If the fire extinguishing system is installed inside the
smart module, the linkage function is not enabled.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 333

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Linkage Default Function

Category Status

Link fire off When this linkage status is set to on:

control with ● If a fire alarm (dry contact alarm) is generated, the
Cabinet rear door of the IT cabinet is opened.
Electronic
Clasp lock ● When the cabinet door is opened, the ECC800-Pro
open generates a door open alarm. After the fire alarm
is cleared, you need to manually close the IT
cabinet door. After the door is closed, the door
open alarm is cleared.
● If the emergency heat dissipation control logic
conflicts with the fire control logic, the fire control
logic takes precedence.
NOTE
If the fire extinguishing system is installed inside the
smart module, the linkage function is not enabled.

5.3.12.1 Linking the Emergency Ventilation with Cabinet Electronic Clasp

Lock Open

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose System Settings > Linkage Control.
Step 3 Ensure that Enable linkage control function is Yes.
Step 4 On the Linkage Group tab page, set Link emergency ventilation with clasp lock
open to on.
NOTE

Select Link emergency ventilation with clasp lock open under Linkage Group. If its value is
on, the corresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are available. If its value is
off, the corresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are unavailable.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After the emergency ventilation alarm is cleared, you need to manually close the
door. After the door is closed, the door open alarm is cleared.

5.3.12.2 Link Smoke Alarm with Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock Open

Context
In this example, the smoke sensor connects to port AI/DI_1. The actual port
prevails.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 334

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.

Step 2 Choose System Settings > Linkage Control.

Step 3 Ensure that Enable linkage control function is Yes.

Step 4 On the Linkage Group tab page, set Link smoke alarm with clasp lock open to
on.
NOTE

Select Link smoke alarm with clasp lock open under Linkage Group. If its value is on, the
corresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are available. If its value is off, the
corresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are unavailable.

Step 5 Modify the AI/DI_1 signal name.

1. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal
Configuration page is displayed.
2. Set Device type to ECC800, set Device name to ECC800, and click OK.
3. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_1 to Smoke
and click Submit.

Step 6 Enable the AI/DI device.

1. Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_1
Port Settings.
2. Set Smoke sensor to Enable and click Submit.
3. Confirm that Smoke sensor type is automatically identified as Smoke sensor
or Smoke sensor(NC).
4. Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, and click Power Supply Parameters.
Ensure that III power supply enable(AIDI_1/DO) is Enable.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After the smoke alarm is cleared, you need to manually close the door. After the
door is closed, the door open alarm is cleared.

5.3.12.3 Link Fire Control with Lock Open

Context
In this example, the fire controller connects to port AI/DI_2. The actual port
prevails.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.

Step 2 Choose System Settings > Linkage Control.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 335

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 3 Ensure that Enable linkage control function is Yes.

Step 4 On the Linkage Group tab page, set Link fire control with Cabinet Electronic
Clasp lock open to on.
NOTE

Select Link fire control with Cabinet Electronic Clasp lock open under Linkage Group. If its
value is on, the corresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are available. If its
value is off, the corresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are unavailable.

Step 5 Modify the AI/DI_2 signal name.

1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal
Configuration page is displayed.
3. Set Device type to ECC800, set Device name to ECC800, and click OK.
4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_2 to Fire and
click Submit.

Step 6 Enable the AI/DI device.

1. Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_2
Port Settings.
2. Set Fire sensor to Enable. Click Submit to access the AI/DI_2 setting page.
3. Select Fire sensor type and set it to Normal Open or Normal Close as
required.
4. Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, and click Power Supply Parameters.
Ensure that I power supply enable(AIDI_2/COM1/AIDI_4/COM3) is Enable.
5. Click Submit.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After the fire alarm is cleared, you need to manually close the IT cabinet door.
After the door is closed, the door open alarm is cleared.

5.3.13 (Optional) NetEco Management

5.3.13.1 NetEco6000 Management

5.3.13.1.1 Connecting a Communications Cable

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the communications cable to the WAN1 port on the ECC800-Pro.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 336

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-72 Connecting the communications cable

----End

5.3.13.1.2 Setting NetEco Parameters

When the smart module can be connected to the NetEco, perform the following
steps to configure parameters.

Procedure
Step 1 Apply for a fixed IP address to the equipment room network administrator.
Step 2 Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Table 5-30 IP parameters

Path Parameter Default Setting
Value

System IP address 192.168.8.1 Set this parameter based on the IP

Settings > 0 address assigned by the network
System administrator.
Parameter
s> Subnet 255.255.25 Set this parameter based on the
Monitor IP mask 5.0 subnet mask assigned by the network
> WAN_1 administrator.

Default 192.168.8.1 Set this parameter based on the

gateway default gateway address assigned by
the network administrator.

Step 3 Click Submit.

Step 4 Set the NetEco communication parameters and authentication password on the
ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 337

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Table 5-31 NetEco parameters

Path Parameter Default Setting

Value

System NetEco Local Set this parameter based on the

Settings > Location type of the connected NetEco
NMS management system.
Application Local: NetEco
> NetEco >
Communicat Cloud: CloudOpera NetEco
ion Server IP 192.168.8. IP address of the primary NetEco
Parameters 11 server
NOTE
The NetEco IP address and the ECC800-
Pro IP address must be configured in
the same network to ensure normal
connection between the NetEco and
the ECC800-Pro.

Port number 31220 31220

Table 5-32 Setting the authentication password

Path Parameter Default Setting

Value

System Authenticatio Modifyme Set this parameter based on

Settings > n password _123 customer requirements.
NMS NOTE
Application Requirements for setting passwords:
> NetEco > 'a~z','A~Z','0~9','~!@#^*_={}:,./?-`
Set $'(8-32 characters that include at least
three of the following types: lowercase
Authenticati
letters, uppercase letters, digits, and
on Password special characters)

Confirm — —
authenticatio
n password

Step 5 Click Submit.

----End

5.3.13.1.3 Obtaining the NetEco Software License

The NetEco software license is not provided together with software to the
customer. Therefore, obtain the NetEco software license in advance.

Obtain the license from the Huawei's enterprise support website.

● For enterprise users:

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 338

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

a. Log in to Huawei's enterprise support website https://

support.huawei.com/enterprise.
b. Browse or search the iManager NetEco 6000 License Application Guide
or obtain the iManager NetEco 6000 License Application Guide from
Technical Support > Product Support > Network Energy > Modular
Data Center > iManager NetEco 6000. Then, apply for the license of the
NetEco software by referring to the guide.
● For carrier users:
a. Log in to Huawei's carrier support website https://support.huawei.com.
b. Browse or search iManager NetEco 6000 License Application Guide,
obtain iManager NetEco 6000 License Application Guide from Support >
Product Support > NetWork Energy > Data Center Facility > Fusion
Modular Data Center > iManager NetEco 6000 at https://
support.huawei.com and apply for the license of the NetEco software by
referring to the guide.

5.3.13.1.4 Powering On a Server

This section describes how to check and power on the NetEco server.

Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the power cables and ground cables are securely connected with
correct polarity and good contact.
Step 2 Ensure that the input power supply of the PDB is off. Use a multimeter to test the
resistance between the power outputs of the PDF and between the working
ground and protective ground. It is required that short circuit not occur between
power outputs or between the working ground and protective ground.
Step 3 Turn on the power switch for the rack.
Step 4 Switch on the circuit breaker of the PDB in the rack. The power supply for
equipment in the rack is available.
Step 5 Press the power button on the chassis of the server to power on the server.
NOTE

After the server is started properly, the button/indicator of its power switch is green.

Figure 5-73 Power button on the TaiShan 200 server

----End

5.3.13.1.5 Logging In to the NetEco Client

The NetEco uses the browser/server (B/S) working mode. You can log in to the
NetEco using a web browser.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 339

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Prerequisites
Valid user name and password are available.

Procedure
Step 1 In the browser address bar, enter https://IP address of the NetEco server:31943,
and then press Enter.
NOTE

● 192.168.8.11 is the default IP address of the NetEco.

● Firefox ESR 52, Chrome 57 or later is supported.
● You are advised to set the display resolution as 1920*1080 or higher.
● Make sure that the IP address of the NetEco server is not contained in the compatibility view
website.

Step 2 Enter the User Name, Password, and click Login.

NOTE

● The preset user of NetEco is admin, the preset password is Changeme_123. This user has
all the operation rights on the managed objects. After the first login, change the
password in time to ensure account security and prevent unauthorized network attacks,
such as data tampering. Huawei will not be liable for any security issues caused by your
failure to change the preset password in time or password loss after changing.
● If the number of online users reaches the maximum number supported by the system, a
message is displayed, indicating that you cannot log in. In this case, contact the system
administrator.
● After you enter the incorrect password for three consecutive times, you must enter the
verification code upon the fourth login. After you enter the incorrect password for five
consecutive times, the user account or the IP address is locked for 10 minutes.

----End

5.3.13.1.6 Loading a NetEco License

The NetEco license file is used to control the functions and management
capabilities of the NetEco. Before using NetEco, you need to load a commercial
license.

Prerequisites
● You have obtained a license.
● You have logged in to the NetEco client using a web browser.

Procedure
Step 1 Click Import License file when you log in to the NetEco at the first time.

Step 2 Click next to the License text box and select a license file.

Step 3 Click Upload.

The information about the imported license file is displayed.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 340

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

5.3.13.1.7 Installing NE Adapters

Prerequisites
● You have logged in to the NetEco client using a browser.
● You have obtained the adapter software installation packages.

Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the adapter software installation packages.
● For enterprise users:
a. Log in to Huawei's enterprise support website https://
support.huawei.com/enterprise.
b. Obtain iManager NetEco 6000 V600R021C00SPCXXX
ReleaseDoc_ENG.zip, NetEco6000_V600R021C00SPCXXX_Adapters.zip,
and NetEco6000_V600R021C00SPCXXX_DomainAdapters.zip from
Support > Network Energy > Fusion Modular Data Center > iManager
NetEco 6000. Decompress the files and locate the adapter software
installation packages in the
NetEco6000_V600R021C00SPCXXX_Adapters and
NetEco6000_V600R021C00SPCXXX_DomainAdapters folders based on
the NE types and versions in iManager NetEco 6000 V600R021 Version
Mapping Table.
● For carriers:
a. Log in to Huawei's support website https://support.huawei.com.
b. Obtain iManager NetEco 6000 V600R021C00SPCXXX
ReleaseDoc_ENG.zip, NetEco6000_V600R021C00SPCXXX_Adapters.zip,
and NetEco6000_V600R021C00SPCXXX_DomainAdapters.zip from
Support > Product Support > Carrier Cloud & Data Center > Data
Center Facility > Fusion Modular Data Center > iManager NetEco
6000. Decompress the files and locate the adapter software installation
packages in the NetEco6000_V600R021C00SPCXXX_Adapters and
NetEco6000_V600R021C00SPCXXX_DomainAdapters folders based on
the NE types and versions in iManager NetEco 6000 V600R021 Version
Mapping Table.
Step 2 Choose System > Service Settings > Adapter Management from the main menu.
Step 3 Click Upload. On the displayed Upload Adapter Package page, click + and select
the files to be uploaded.
NOTE

A maximum of 50 adapter packages can be uploaded at one time.

Step 4 Click Upload to upload the files.

Step 5 Select the NE adapter packages to be installed on the Adapter Management
page, and click Install. Then, click Yes in the displayed dialog box. The time

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 341

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

required for the installation is related to the number of adapters. Wait for the
installation to complete.

----End

5.3.13.1.8 Adding a Management Domain

This section describes how to configure managed domains.

Prerequisites
● You have logged in to the NetEco client by web browser.
● The management domain adaptation layer has been preconfigured or
installed.

Context
The management domains include Park, Building, Room, ContainerDC, Subnet,
NetecoSite, FusionModule500, Modular, Room-ShapeNode, and Building-
ShapeNode. You are advised to plan the affiliation before configuring the
managed domains.
To create management domain, note that:
● You can create Park, Building, ContainerDC, Room, Subnet, NetecoSite,
FusionModule500, Modular, Room–ShapeNode, and Building–ShapeNode
under Root.
● You can create Building, Building–ShapeNode, ContainerDC, Room and
Room–ShapeNode under Park.
● You can create only Floor–ShapeNode under Building.
● You can create DDF, Battery Cabinet, Rack, Modular, Power Cabinet, Fire
Protection Cabinet and Rack Custom under Room
● You can create Container and Container–ShapeNode under ContainerDC.
● You can create Modular, Park, NetecoSite, FusionModule500 and under
Subnet.
● You can create DDF, Battery Cabinet, Rack, Modular, Power Cabinet, and
Fire Protection Cabinet and Rack Custom under NetecoSite
● You can create DDF, Battery Cabinet, Rack, Power Cabinet, Fire Protection
Cabinet and Rack Custom under Modular.
● You can create DDF, Battery Cabinet, Rack, Modular, Power Cabinet, Fire
Protection Cabinet and Rack Custom under Room–ShapeNode.
● You can create Floor–ShapeNode under Building–ShapeNode.
● You can create Room and Room–ShapeNode under Floor–ShapeNode.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Configuration > Data Center Planning from the main menu.
The Data Center Planning window is displayed.
Step 2 Add managed domains.
1. In the navigation tree, choose the father node where you want to add a
managed domain.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 342

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

2. In the Domain area which is below the navigation tree, drag a managed
domain icon to the required position in the view.
NOTE

You can adjust the shape of Room, Building–ShapeNode, Floor–ShapeNode,

Container–ShapeNode, and NetecoSite. Holding down the Shift key and the left
mouse button and then clicking on the corresponding lines can increase the small
yellow dot. You can drag the small yellow dot to adjust the shape of the managed
domain icon.

To delete a domain, click the domain icon and select Delete under .
3. In the right side of the view area, set Management Info. Configure parameters
as required. The parameters marked with asterisks (*) are mandatory.
NOTE

You can configure Management Info, Electricity Info, and Refrigeration Info for the
equipment room management domain.

4. Click on the toolbar.

Repeat steps Step 2.1 to Step 2.4 until the configuration is complete.

Step 3 Click on the toolbar.

----End

5.3.13.1.9 Adding a Smart Module

This section describes how to create a smart module in the root node, subnet,
equipment room, container, or site management domain.

Prerequisites
● You have logged in to the NetEco client using a web browser.
● You have created management domains in Data Center Planning. For
detailed operations, see Creating a Domain.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Configuration > Data Center Planning from the main menu.
The Data Center Planning page is displayed.
Step 2 Choose the management domain where you want to add a smart module from
the navigation tree on the left.
Step 3 Click Domain. The infrastructure area is displayed.
Step 4 Select Modular from the Type drop-down list.

Figure 5-74 Selecting Modular

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 343

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 5 Select the Modular to be added and drag the module icon to the Room area.

Figure 5-75 Adding a smart module in the room area

Step 6 Modify Management Info of the smart module or retain the default values, and
then click .

NOTICE

The parameters with * are mandatory.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Perform the following operations in the Data Center Planning page as required.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 344

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

If You Then...
Need
To...

Delete You can delete one smart module or multiple smart modules in
smart batches on the current page.
modules NOTE
If a smart module contains subdevices, you cannot delete it. You can delete
the smart module only after you delete subdevices in the module.
● Delete one smart module.
1. Select Modular and click Delete under , as shown in Figure
5-76.

Figure 5-76 Deleting one smart module

2. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

● Delete multiple smart modules in batches.
1. Click on the toolbar to display the Figure 5-77 page.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 345

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

If You Then...
Need
To...

Figure 5-77 Deleting multiple smart modules in batches

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 346

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

If You Then...
Need
To...

2. Add filter conditions, select multiple smart modules, and click

Delete.
3. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

Add tools 1. Select the smart module for which you want to add a pillar.
2. In the lower left corner of the current page, click Tool.
3. Select the Pillar component to be added.
NOTE
After the component is added, you can set attributes for the component
in the Component Info list in the right pane. The system automatically
displays values for Parent Name and Control Type, and you do not need
to manually set them, you only need to set Name.

4. In the upper area of the current page, click .

5.3.13.1.10 Creating an ECC800-Pro on the NetEco

Prerequisites
● You have logged in to the NetEco client using a web browser.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 347

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

● You have created modules in Data Center Planning.

Context
For detailed operations, see iManager NetEco 6000 Device Installation and
Commissioning Guide of the corresponding version.

Procedure
1. Choose System > Configuration > Data Center Planning from the main
menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.

2. On the Data Center Planning page, click in the upper left corner.
3. Click Access to access the Add Device page. You can add an ECC800-Pro
device to the specified smart module on the page.

Figure 5-78 Adding an ECC800-Pro device to the smart module

NOTE

Click OK, and you can view the task information, including Type, Device Name,
Region, Progress, Status, Start Time, End Time, and Information in the displayed
Progress window.

5.3.13.2 CloudOpera NetEco Management

5.3.13.2.1 Logging In to the EDCM (Using a Web Client)

Prerequisites
● You have obtained a valid user name and password.
● You have created a free trial order or purchased an official business package.

Procedure
Step 1 In the browser address box, enter https://IP address of the NetEco server:31943,
and then press Enter.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 348

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

NOTE

● 192.168.8.11 is the default IP address of the NetEco server.

● Firefox ESR 52, Chrome 57 or later is supported.
● You are advised to set the display resolution as 1920*1080 or higher.
● Make sure that the IP address of the NetEco server is not contained in the compatibility view
website.

Step 2 Enter the User Name, Password, and click Login.

NOTE

● The preset user of NetEco is admin, the preset password is Changeme_123. This user has
all the operation rights on the managed objects. After the first login, change the
password in time to ensure account security and prevent unauthorized network attacks,
such as data tampering. Huawei will not be liable for any security issues caused by your
failure to change the preset password in time or password loss after changing.
● If the number of online users reaches the maximum number supported by the system, a
message is displayed, indicating that you cannot log in. In this case, contact the system
administrator.
● After you enter the incorrect password for three consecutive times, you must enter the
verification code upon the fourth login. After you enter the incorrect password for five
consecutive times, the user account or the IP address is locked for 10 minutes.

----End

5.3.13.2.2 Installing the EDCM App

Use a mobile phone to scan the QR code to download and install the EDCM app.

Procedure

Step 1 On the EDCM page, click in the upper left corner, and use your mobile phone
to scan the QR code in the lower right corner.
NOTE

Currently, only the Android edition of the EDCM app is available.

Figure 5-79 QR code of the EDCM app

Step 2 Download and install the EDCM app.

----End

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 349

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

5.3.13.2.3 Allowing a User to Log in to the EDCM on a Mobile Device

Prerequisites
You have logged in to the EDCM.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > System Management > User Management.
Step 2 Choose User from the navigation pane and click the name of the target user.
Step 3 On the Basic Information tab page, click Modify in the upper right corner.
Step 4 In the Advanced Settings area, select Allow login on mobile terminals and click
Yes.

----End

5.3.13.2.4 (Optional) Replacing the App Certificate on a Mobile Device

Prerequisites
● You have downloaded and installed the EDCM app.
● You have applied for a new certificate file server.cer from the CA.
NOTE

Here, server indicates the name of the certificate file, which can be renamed.

Procedure
Step 1 Import the obtained digital certificate to the cer directory of the EDCM folder on
the mobile client.
Step 2 On the mobile client, tap the icon of the EDCM app. The login screen of the app is
displayed.

Step 3 Tap to access the Settings screen.

Step 4 Tap Replace the certificate to access the Cert Change screen.
Step 5 Select the new certificate and tap Yes in the displayed dialog box to replace the
certificate.

----End

5.3.13.2.5 Logging In to the EDCM App

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the tenant name, user name, and password for logging in
to the EDCM app and have changed the initial password.
● You have obtained the IP address of the EDCM server.
● The Allow login on mobile terminals function is enabled for the user who
needs to log in to the EDCM app.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 350

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Set the IP address of the EDCM server.
1. When you log in to the app for the first time, the Server Settings screen is
automatically displayed.
2. Enter the server IP address and tap Next.

NOTE

In the lower right corner of the login screen, choose > Server settings to update the
server IP address.

Step 2 Open the EDCM app, and enter the Organization, Username, and Password.
NOTE

● Organization and Username are the tenant name registered on HUAWEI CLOUD.
● If you fail to log in for three consecutive times, the system automatically displays
Verification code.

Step 3 Tap Log In.

NOTE

If no data is displayed on the screen or a message indicating a network error is displayed,

check whether the mobile device has properly connected to a WiFi or mobile network. If
the network is normal, check whether you have been forcibly logged out on the NetEco.

----End

5.3.13.2.6 Setting EDCM Communication Parameters on the ECC800-Pro

The ECC800-Pro can connect to the EDCM only after EDCM communication
parameters are set on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 351

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Prerequisites
● You have obtained the IP address of the ECC800-Pro as well as the user name
and password used for WebUI login.
● You have obtained the IP address of the EDCM server.

Procedure
Step 1 Enter https://ECC800-Pro IP address (such as https://192.168.1.10) in the address
box of the browser, and then press Enter to enter the WebUI login page.

Step 2 On the login page, enter the user name and password, select the desired
language, and click Log In.
NOTE

● An account is logged out due to a timeout if no operation is performed within 10

minutes after system login.
● A maximum of three users can log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI at the same time.

Step 3 Choose System Settings > NMS Application.

Step 4 Select the NetEco tab. In the Communication Parameters area, set parameters
such as NetEco Deployment Location, Server IP, and Port Number, and click
Submit.

Table 5-33 EDCM parameters

Parameter Setting

NetEco Location Local

Server IP Specifies the IP address of the EDCM

server.
NOTE
The IP address of the EDCM server must be
on the same network as the IP address of
the ECC800-Pro to ensure normal
interconnection between the EDCM app
and the ECC800-Pro.

Port Number 31220

----End

5.3.13.2.7 Connecting to the Network

Connect the network to the CloudOpera NetEco through the CloudOpera NetEco
app.

Prerequisites
● You have logged in to the EDCM app.
● You have set EDCM communication parameters on the ECC800-Pro.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 352

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Procedure

Step 1 On the CloudOpera NetEco app, tap in the upper right corner.
Step 2 On the Create network screen, enter network information as prompted and tap
Confirm.

Figure 5-80 Creating a network

Table 5-34 Parameter description

Parameter Description

Network Name Name of the network.

ESN ESN of the ECC controller.

NOTE

Tap to scan the QR code on the ECC controller to

obtain the ESN.

Longitude Longitude of the network. You can manually enter the

value or use GPS to locate.

Latitude Latitude of the network. You can manually enter the

value or use GPS to locate.

Customer Information Customer information.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 353

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Parameter Description

Address Address of the network.

----End

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 354

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

6 O&M

6.1 Routine Maintenance

NOTICE

● Only trained personnel are allowed to perform maintenance tasks. Before

performing operations on devices, wear ESD clothes, ESD gloves, and an ESD
wrist strap. Remove conductive objects such as jewelry and watches to avoid
electric shocks or burns.
● Use insulated tools when maintaining components inside all devices. Only
trained personnel are allowed to perform maintenance.
● Maintain UPSs regularly based on the following requirements. Otherwise, the
UPSs may fail to operate properly and the lifespan may be shortened.
● For details about how to upgrade the software version, visit https://
support.huawei.com/carrier/docview?nid=DOC1100723472 to download the
upgrade guide.

6.1.1 Monthly Maintenance

Table 6-1 Monthly preventive maintenance table
Maintenance Item Operation Expected Result Troubleshooting

Power indicator Observe the indicator All indicators are If the power supply is
luminance. normal. normal but an
indicator is off or
generates dim light,
replace the indicator.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 355

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Maintenance Item Operation Expected Result Troubleshooting

Surge protection Check the surge ● The surge ● If the surge

module protection module protection module protection module
indicator and MCB indicator is green. indicator is red,
status. ● The MCB is replace the surge
switched on. protection module.
● If the MCB is off,
switch it on.

UPS Operating ● Ambient ● If the humidity and

environment temperature: 0– temperature are
40°C abnormal, check
● Humidity: 0–95% the smart cooling
RH (non- product status.
condensing) ● If the input voltage
is abnormal, check
the power grid
status and input
cable connection.

LCD According to the If an alarm is present,

status icons on the rectify the fault by
LCD, all units are checking the device
operating properly. No status and parameters.
fault or alarm
information is found
in the active and
historical alarm
records.

ECC800-Pro AC input Input voltage: 200– If the input voltage is

240 V AC abnormal, check the
Frequency: 45–55 Hz power grid and input
cable connection.

Output voltage Output voltage: 53.5 V If the output voltage is

DC±5% abnormal, check the
power grid status and
cable connections.

Indicator The indicator on the Check the output

PSU is steady green. voltage and determine
whether the PSU is
faulty. If the PSU is
faulty, replace it.

Fan No abnormal noise is If abnormal noise is

generated. generated, clean the
fan.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 356

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Maintenance Item Operation Expected Result Troubleshooting

Operating ● Ambient If the humidity and

environment temperature: –20°C temperature are
to +65°C abnormal, check the
● Humidity: 0–95% smart cooling product
RH (non- status.
condensing)

Monitoring module The module indicator If the indicator is off

indicator is steady green or or any abnormal
blinking green. condition occurs, see
6.2.3 Management
System
Troubleshooting to
rectify the fault.

Network interface The green indicator is If the indicator status

indicator steady on, and the is abnormal, check the
yellow indicator is network cable
blinking. connection.

Monitor interface Export smart cooling If an alarm is

(network product logs, alarms, generated, handle the
management system temperature, humidity, alarm by referring to
or WebUI) as well as the 6.3 Alarm Reference
operating status and and 6.2.3
time of the water Management System
sensor, door status Troubleshooting or
sensor, temperature contacting Huawei
sensor, and smoke technical support.
sensor from the
management system.
View the historical
alarms generated in
this month and select
the most common five
ones.

Cable connection The cable connections Secure loose cables.

are secure.

- Cables are not Replace the cables.

damaged.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 357

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Maintenance Item Operation Expected Result Troubleshooting

Camera On the ECC800-Pro The camera web page If the monitoring

WebUI, choose is displayed after you image is not displayed
System Settings > click an address under after you click an
Video Management Link. address under Link,
to enter the video check that the IP
information page. address is correctly
Click an address under set, and check cable
Link to enter the connections or replace
camera web page. the camera. For
details, see 6.4.4.7
Replacing a Camera.

Functions of the water Place the water When the water If there is no alarm,
sensor and water detection cable into detection cable comes replace the water
detection cable the water and check into contact with detection cable.
whether a water water, a water leakage
leakage alarm is alarm is generated.
generated by the
water sensor.

Smart cooling product Condensate water pan Check that the Clean up the scale
and liquid level condensate water pan from the condensate
detector and liquid level water pan and liquid
detector have no level detector.
scale.

Evaporator Check that no foreign Remove foreign

matter exists on the matter.
evaporator surface.

Indoor fan Check that the indoor Repair or replace the

fan guard is not fan guard.
distorted.

Check that the indoor Replace the fan

fan blades are intact. component if it is
damaged.

Check that the Replace the fan

operating indoor fan component if it is
generates no damaged.
abnormal noise.

Check that the screws Tighten loose screws.

on the indoor fan are
not loose or distorted.

Compressor Check that the Tighten screws if the

compressor is secured. compressor is not
secured.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 358

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Maintenance Item Operation Expected Result Troubleshooting

Check that the Replace the

operating compressor compressor.
generates no
abnormal noise.

Check that the Check for leakage and

refrigerant pipe is free repair the pipe.
of oil stains and rust.

Refrigerant pipe and Check that the water Check for leakage and
water pipe pipe is tightened and repair the pipe, or
- free of water leakage. reconnect the pipe.

The thermal insulation Wrap the thermal

foam is intact. insulation foam again.

6.1.2 Quarterly Maintenance

Table 6-2 Quarterly preventive maintenance table
Maintenance Item Operation Expected Result Troubleshooting

UPS Cleanliness When the cabinet Remove the dust,

surface is wiped using especially from the air
white paper, the paper filter on the front
does not turn black. door, or replace the air
filter.

Parameters The configuration of Reset the parameters.

the output voltage
grade, frequency,
number of batteries,
and battery capacity
meets requirements.

Power cables and The insulation layer of ● Replace the cables.

terminals (between cables is intact and ● Secure all output
the UPS and the power terminals are terminals.
power distribution free from noticeable
subrack) sparks.

Cooling product Humidifier float Check that the Clean up the scale
humidifier float has no from the humidifier
scale. float.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 359

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

6.1.3 Yearly Maintenance

Table 6-3 Yearly preventive maintenance table
Maintenance Item Operation Expected Result Troubleshooting

Power distribution Check whether there The white paper that If the white paper is
subrack is dust on the power you use to wipe the dirty, clean the power
distribution subrack panel is clean. distribution subrack.
panel.

Bolts for connecting Tighten all bolts The bolts are secured. Tighten a bolt if it is
cables and busbars regularly using an loose.
adjustable wrench.

Circuit breaker Switch on and off the The circuit breaker can If the circuit breaker
circuit breaker five be switched on and off cannot be switched on
times. smoothly. or off smoothly and
there is a spare circuit
breaker, connect
cables to the spare
one.

Cable insulation Measure the The insulation If the cable insulation

insulation resistance resistance is greater performance is poor,
using an insulation than or equal to 5 replace the cable.
tester. megohms.

Insulation Measure the The insulation If the insulation

performance of the insulation resistance resistance is greater performance is poor,
power distribution using an insulation than or equal to 10 check and maintain
subrack tester. megohms. the components in the
power distribution
subrack, such as
internal cables and
circuit breakers.

Insulation resistance Measure the The insulation If the insulation

of the secondary insulation resistance resistance is greater performance is poor,
signal loop using an insulation than or equal to 2 check and maintain
tester. megohms. the signal cable and
smart ETH gateway.

Lithium battery Battery management No battery Identify the causes

alarm management alarm is based on the alarm
generated. information.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 360

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Maintenance Item Operation Expected Result Troubleshooting

Battery appearance 1. The surface is clean If the battery

and tidy without appearance is
stains. abnormal, contact
2. The battery Huawei technical
terminals are support.
intact.
3. Batteries are free
from damage and
cracks.
4. Batteries are free
from acid leakage.
5. Batteries are not
deformed or
bulged.

Battery operating 1. The ambient 1. Identify the cause

temperature battery of an abnormal
temperature is battery operating
25±5°C. temperature.
2. The battery 2. If the fault persists,
operating contact Huawei
temperature is technical support.
lower than 45°C.
3. Battery charge and
discharge
conditions meet the
requirements
specified in the
battery
specifications.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 361

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Maintenance Item Operation Expected Result Troubleshooting

Battery string charge ● Equalized charging 1. If the voltage drop

voltage voltage: (2.35 V/cell between the
±1%) x number of battery string
battery cells output terminals
● Float charging and the battery
voltage: (2.25 V/cell input terminals at
±1%) x number of the UPS side is
battery cells greater than 1% of
the battery string
voltage, check
whether the cable
between the
battery string and
the UPS is
excessively long, or
the cross-sectional
area of the cable is
excessively small.
2. Check whether the
equalized charging
voltage and float
charging voltage
are correctly set for
the UPS.
3. If the fault persists,
contact Huawei
technical support.

Battery management Check that the Set parameters

parameter settings settings of battery correctly.
management
parameters meet the
requirements in the
user manual.

Battery bolts The location of the Take photos from

signs marked on multiple angles and
battery terminal bolts contact Huawei
indicating tight technical support.
connections does not
change.

Cables between No cable deteriorates Replace the faulty

batteries and the insulation cable.
layer does not crack.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 362

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Maintenance Item Operation Expected Result Troubleshooting

Battery voltage ● Equalized charging 1. Check whether the

voltage: 2.35±0.02 equalized charging
V/cell voltage and float
● Float charging charging voltage of
voltage: 2.25±0.02 a battery are
V/cell normal.
2. If the charging
voltage of a battery
exceeds the
specifications
requirement,
perform a complete
forcible equalized
charging for the
battery, and check
again whether the
voltage is normal.
3. If the fault persists,
contact Huawei
technical support.

Shallow discharge test Conduct a shallow 1. Locate the cause

(recommended) discharge test when when an exception
the UPS is backed up is identified.
to verify that the 2. If the fault persists,
batteries can contact Huawei
discharge properly. technical support.

Capacity test When the UPS is 1. Locate the cause

(recommended) backed up, discharge a when an exception
battery to the is identified.
undervoltage alarm 2. If the fault persists,
threshold, to refresh contact Huawei
the capacity of the technical support.
battery.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 363

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Maintenance Item Operation Expected Result Troubleshooting

Battery connection 1. When battery 1. Rectify any

strings are powered abnormal
off, check the connection.
reliability of each 2. If the fault persists,
connection point contact Huawei
from positive technical support.
terminals to
negative terminals.
Check that all
points are
connected reliably.
2. Use a torque
wrench to check
the tightening
torque for each
battery screw. The
torque meets the
requirements of the
battery
manufacturer. After
checking that the
battery screws
meet the
requirements, mark
the screws for later
check.

Glass door steel glass ● Use a soft cotton - -

cleaning cloth to clean the
glass.
● Clean the glass
with clean water.
Do not use any
organic solvent
such as alcohol,
thinner, or glass
cleaner.
● To avoid scratching,
do not use
excessive force
when cleaning the
glass door.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 364

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Maintenance Item Operation Expected Result Troubleshooting

Smart cooling product Monitoring unit Export smart cooling Rectify the fault or
product logs, alarms, contact Huawei
temperature, humidity, technical support.
the operating status of
the compressor, fan,
electric heater, wet
film humidifier, and
water pump, and time
from the management
system. View the
historical alarms
generated in this
quarter and select the
most common five
ones. (If no
management system
is available, skip this
item.)

Electric control box Check that all fuses Replace abnormal

components work properly. fuses.

Check that the cable Secure loose cables.

connection is secure
and correct.

Check that the (Perform the

electrical components operation with the
and control power off.) Use a
components of the brush or compressed
indoor unit are free of dry air to remove dust
dust. from electrical
components, control
Check that the components, and
electrical components, voltage detection
control components, boards.
SPDs, and voltage
detection boards of
the outdoor unit are
free of dust.

Check that the Replace the abnormal

surfaces of the control board.
board, SPDs, and
voltage detection
boards are not aged.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 365

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Maintenance Item Operation Expected Result Troubleshooting

Check that the electric Replace the electric

heater contactor heating contactor if it
works properly. is faulty.
1. When the smart
cooling product is
on, set Diagnostic
Mode to Enter on
the Controls page,
and click Submit.
2. Choose Running
Parameters >
Diagnostic Mode
Parameters, set
Elec heater
manual control to
ON, and click
Submit. You can
hear a click sound
from the contactor.

Cable Check that no cable is Replace aged cables.

aged.

Outdoor unit Check that the Tighten the screws

outdoor unit is secured that secure the rack to
to the floor. the floor.

- Check that the fan Replace the outdoor

runs properly without unit by following
abnormal noise or instructions in
vibration, and the 6.4.3.2.1 Replacing
blades rotate properly. an Outdoor Fan

- Check that the fan air Clear obstacles.

intake and exhaust
vents are not blocked.

6.2 Troubleshooting

6.2.1 Power Supply and Distribution System Troubleshooting

Except mains outage, power supply and distribution faults are caused by the
damage or failure of one or more components. Rectify the faults based on fault
location and fault type.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 366

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

NOTICE

● When a UPS is faulty, alarm information is displayed on the LCD. Critical alarms
must be handled before powering on the UPS again. Otherwise, the fault may
be extended, or the UPS may be damaged.
● If the fault is not rectified, contact Huawei technical support.

Table 6-4 Power supply and distribution system troubleshooting

Symptom Possible Cause Measure

The power input to the ● The switch trips ● Use a multimeter to

downstream device is abnormally. check whether there
abnormal. ● The UPS is faulty. is a short circuit. Turn
on the switch again,
and check whether
the system is
overloaded.
● Restart the UPS. If the
UPS is faulty, replace
it.

The surge protection ● The SPD circuit ● Check that the SPD
function fails. breaker is OFF. circuit breaker is
● The SPD ground cable turned on. The power
is not connected. distribution subrack
(monitoring type) will
● The surge protection prompt an alarm
module is abnormal. indicating that the
The SPD window is SPD circuit breaker is
red. not turned on.
● Check whether the
SPD ground cable is
properly connected.
● Replace the surge
protection module.
For details, see 6.4.2.1
Replacing a Surge
Protection Module.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 367

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Symptom Possible Cause Measure

The indicators are off. ● Cables are loose. ● Connect the cables
● The fuse holder trips. again.
● The fuse is damaged. ● Turn on the fuse
holder.
● The indicators are
damaged. ● Replace the fuse of
the indicators. For
details, see 6.4.2.2
Replacing a Fuse.
● Replace the
indicators. For details,
see 6.4.2.3 Replacing
an Indicator.

The general switch is The input power supply Check the UPS input
ON, the LCD displays no is not connected. power cable connection.
information, and the
system does not perform The input voltage is less Use a voltmeter to check
self-check. than the lower threshold whether the UPS input
or greater than the voltage meets
upper threshold. requirements.

The mains is normal, but The UPS mains switch is Turn on the UPS mains
the AC input indicator is OFF. switch.
off. The UPS works in
battery mode. The input cable is not Check the UPS input
properly connected. power cable connection.

The UPS fails to ● The UPS ● Reconnect the UPS

communicate. communications cable communications
is not properly cable.
connected. ● Reconnect the UPS
● The UPS parallel cable parallel cable.
is not properly ● Remove the network
connected. cable from the MON1
● The UPS is deleted on port on the UPS,
the ECC800-Pro reinstall the cable,
WebUI. and add the UPS on
the ECC800-Pro
WebUI.

The UPS does not report The output cable is not Check the output power
a fault but has no output properly connected. cable connection.
voltage.

The UPS does not start is not pressed long Press for more than
after you press . enough. 5 seconds until you hear
a beep sound.

The UPS is overloaded. Shut down all loads, and

restart the UPS.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 368

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Symptom Possible Cause Measure

The mains indicator is The mains voltage or Use a multimeter to

off. frequency exceeds the verify that the input
UPS input range. voltage and frequency
meet specifications.

The battery discharge Batteries are not fully Charge batteries for
time is obviously shorter charged. more than 8 hours when
than the standard time. the mains is normal. Test
the discharge time again.

The battery performance Contact your local

deteriorates. Huawei technical
support to replace
batteries.

Abnormal noise or smell The UPS is faulty. Shut down the UPS and
is generated in the UPS cut off the power input
cabinet. immediately. Contact
your local Huawei
technical support.

The battery indicator ● The UPS will soon ● Save load data
blinks. The buzzer buzzes shut down due to immediately and shut
1 second and then stops insufficient battery down primary loads
1 second. The battery reserve, and loads will to avoid data loss or
reserve is insufficient. be powered off. damage.
The UPS is about to shut ● The number of ● Connect the UPS
down. batteries and battery input to the backup
capacity are AC power supply
incorrectly set. immediately.
● Verify that the
number of batteries
and battery capacity
are correctly set based
on the actual
configuration.

The user forgot the None ● If the user forgot only

password. the LCD password
(the preset password
is 000001), use the
feature code (the
preset feature code is
999999) to activate
the LCD password.
● If the user forgot the
LCD password and
feature code, contact
your local Huawei
technical support.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 369

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

6.2.2 Smart Cooling Product Troubleshooting

CAUTION

Do not maintain or replace outdoor units during thunderstorms. Otherwise, your

personal safety will be in danger.

NOTICE

● You are not advised to maintain or replace outdoor units in rainy days. If
unavoidable, take protective measures to prevent water from entering the
outdoor unit.
● When opening the electric control box cover, clear water from the cover.
● Certain circuits in the smart cooling product have lethal voltages. Only
professional technicians are allowed to perform maintenance.
● Exercise caution during troubleshooting with power on.
● If jumpers are used for troubleshooting, always remove them after
troubleshooting. Connected jumpers may affect control functions and damage
equipment.

Table 6-5 Troubleshooting

Cat Sympt Possible Cause Measure

eg om
ory

Ind The The indoor fan is Replace the indoor fan by following
oor indoor damaged. instructions in 6.4.3.1.1 Replacing an
uni unit Indoor Fan.
t fails to
start. The connection Secure the connection terminals.
terminals for the fans
are not securely
connected.

Water The drainpipe does Ensure that the drainpipe correctly

overflo not connect to the connects to the pump, and ensure that
ws. pump, or the lift of the lift of the drainpipe is lower than 4
the pump does not meters.
match the height of
the pipes.

The condensate water Replace the condensate water pump by

pump is faulty. following instructions in 6.4.3.1.2
Replacing a Condensate Pump.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 370

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Cat Sympt Possible Cause Measure

eg om
ory

The water inlet pipe Check the water inlet pipe and
or drainpipe leaks. drainpipe and their connectors, and
repair or replace them based on site
requirements.

Humidi For a single smart ● Verify that the doors, windows,

ty is cooling product, the floors, and ceilings of the equipment
high or server heat load is room are properly sealed.
there is lower than 2.5 kW. ● If the outdoor humidity is too high,
conden shut down the fresh air system.
sation
in the ● Open the aisle doors or control
equipm skylights of the data center, or open
ent the filler panels of some server
room. cabinets.

Use the cold aisle containment to

control the humidity.

Add extra dehumidifiers.

Ou Abnor The compressor, fan, Check and secure loose parts.

tdo mal or pipes are loose.
or noise is
uni generat
t ed
during
operati
on.

The The high and low Check the high and low pressure
compre pressure switches are switches.
ssor triggered.
does
not The circuit breaker, Check the main circuit breaker, fuses,
work. fuse, or cable is and cables.
disconnected.

The compressor Check whether the motor is damaged.

motor is damaged. Replace the motor if it is faulty.

The compressor does Check for the requirement status on the

not need to start. LCD.

The compressor does Check whether the compressor driver is

not work. faulty. Replace the compressor driver if
it is faulty.

The The refrigerant loop Clean the loop and components.

compre or component is
ssor blocked.
dischar

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 371

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Cat Sympt Possible Cause Measure

eg om
ory

ge The outdoor units are Install outdoor units in the right

temper not installed in right positions based on the installation
ature is positions. (The requirements.
too installation distances
high. should meet
requirements.)

Air enters the Check the discharge temperature and

refrigerant loop. pressure. Eliminate and retrieve
refrigerant. Refill refrigerant.

Heat dissipation is Clean the condenser fins using a fin

poor because the brush.
condenser is dirty or
blocked.

The outdoor fan fails. Check whether the outdoor fan works
properly.

The refrigerant is Fill more refrigerant.

insufficient.

The The refrigerant is Fill more refrigerant.

compre insufficient.
ssor
dischar The outdoor fan Replace the fan speed controller.
ge speed controller fails.
pressur The refrigerant leaks. Apply soapy water or use a halogen
e is too leak detector to check for any leakage.
low. If leaking points are found, retrieve the
refrigerant and weld the leaking points
again. Contact Huawei technical
support.

The outdoor No action is required.

temperature is too
low.

The Refrigerant is Fill more refrigerant.

compre insufficient.
ssor
suction Refrigerant leaks. Apply soapy water or use a halogen
pressur leak detector to check for any leakage.
e is too If leaking points are found, retrieve the
low. refrigerant and weld the leaking points
again. Contact Huawei technical
support.

The condensing Check whether the outdoor

pressure is too low. temperature is too low and whether the
outdoor fan is under control.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 372

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Cat Sympt Possible Cause Measure

eg om
ory

Liquid The indoor Increase the temperature setting.

is temperature is too
returni low.
ng to
the The electronic Replace the electronic expansion valve
compre expansion valve coil is coil.
ssor. faulty.

The external residual Check whether the air channels are

pressure is too high, blocked.
and air flow
decreases.

The Liquid is returning to Check whether the oil temperature and

compre the compressor. discharge temperature are within the
ssor normal range (70-100°C).
generat
es too Refrigerant oil is Add refrigerant oil.
much insufficient.
noise.
(It is
commo
n that
the
compre
ssor
generat
es
much
noise
when it
shuts
down.)

6.2.3 Management System Troubleshooting

Table 6-6 Common faults and troubleshooting for PSUs
Symptom Possible Cause Measure

The Power indicator No AC input Check whether the AC

(green) is off. input is abnormal.

PSU fault Replace the PSU.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 373

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Symptom Possible Cause Measure

The Alarm indicator Overtemperature ● The ambient

(yellow) is steady on. protection temperature exceeds
the upper threshold.
Increase the cooling
capacity of the smart
cooling product.
● The air channel is
blocked. Unblock it.

AC input overvoltage or Check whether the AC

undervoltage protection input is abnormal.

The Alarm indicator PSU communication 1. Clean the connector

(yellow) is blinking. failure in the rear of the
faulty PSU.
Monitoring module
communication failure 2. If the fault persists,
replace the ECC800-
Pro subrack.

The Alarm indicator Output overvoltage ● If a single PSU is

(red) is steady on. protection locked out, disconnect
the AC input from the
PSU, and then power
on the PSU again
after the indicator
turns off. If the fault
persists, replace the
PSU.
● If multiple PSUs are
locked out, remove all
PSUs and reinstall
them one by one to
locate the faulty ones.
Then replace faulty
PSUs.

No output due to a PSU Replace the faulty PSU.

fault

Table 6-7 Common faults and troubleshooting for the monitoring module
No. Symptom Possible Cause Measure

1 The Run indicator There is no AC input. If the green indicators

(green) is off. on PSUs are steady on,
the power input to the
system is normal.
Otherwise, rectify
power grid faults.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 374

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

No. Symptom Possible Cause Measure

The monitoring Reinstall the

module is faulty or not monitoring module. If
securely installed. the fault persists,
replace the monitoring
module.

2 RJ45 power output The corresponding Energize corresponding

indicators turn off power ports have no power ports over the
(involved ports: AIDI_1 output. WebUI or network
- AIDI_5, COM1- management system.
COM4, and DO).
The corresponding Check whether the
power ports are short- connected load is
circuited. short-circuited. If yes,
eliminate the short
circuit.

3 The ALM indicator Faults and alarms are View active alarms on
(red) is steady on. generated. the WebUI and clear
them one by one.

6.3 Alarm Reference

NOTE

This chapter provides only measures to clear major and critical alarms for certain
components. For details about other alarms, see the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Table 6-8 Alarm list

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures
Severit
y

Surge SPD fault Major A surge protection Replace the surge

protective module is damaged or protection module or
device (SPD) the SPD circuit breaker switch on the SPD
has tripped. circuit breaker.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 375

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

UPS Rectifier fault Critical ● The mains has ● Rectify the fault, and
experienced a power on the UPS
transient high again.
voltage. ● Check that the load
● The output carries types are supported
special loads such as by the UPS.
the inductive and ● Enable the
rectification loads. transformer mode.
● The output carries ● Contact Huawei
the transformer load technical support.
but the transformer
mode is not enabled.
● The hardware is
damaged.

Internal fault Critical The bypass input cable Correct the bypass input
connection does not cable connection so that
match the output it matches the output
system. system.

Fan fault Critical The fan is abnormal. Clean up foreign matter

around the fan. If the
fault persists, contact
Huawei technical
support.

Inverter fault Critical The inverter output Eliminate the short

short-circuits. circuit at the output
port cable connection,
and then power on and
start the inverter again.
If the fault persists,
contact Huawei
technical support.

Output short Critical The load or cable is Locate and rectify the
circuit short-circuited. short circuit.
NOTE
The system
immediately
disconnects the
power output.

Intelligent Communication Critical The network cable Check the cable

battery Failure communication is connection to the smart
monitoring interrupted. ETH gateway.
system

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 376

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

BCB Tripping Critical ● The battery has Identify the alarm

discharged to the cause, rectify the fault,
end-of-discharge and switch on the BCB
(EOD) threshold. box.
● The battery circuit
breaker (BCB) box is
manually
disconnected.
● There is a security
risk in the battery
loop.

Single Batt. Critical ● A battery terminal ● Check that battery

terminal off screw is not terminal screws are
tightened. tightened.
● The battery terminal ● Check that battery
is not properly terminals are
connected to the properly connected
connector. to connectors.

Single Batt. Critical ● The battery shell is ● Check whether the

Exception broken, resulting in appearances of
electrolyte and abnormal batteries
electricity leakage. are intact, and
● The battery loop replace abnormal
cable is broken and batteries.
short-circuited to the ● Check whether
ground, resulting in battery loop cables
electricity leakage. are deteriorated or
broken, and replace
faulty cables.

Smart Power loss Warnin The supply power is cut Check the power supply
cooling g off. cables.
product

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 377

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

Teamwork Major 1. The DIP switch is set 1. Set the DIP switch
networking failed incorrectly for correctly for
teamwork. teamwork.
2. The teamwork 2. Check the teamwork
cables are loose or cables.
damaged. 3. Change the
3. Any two smart addresses of the
cooling product units smart cooling
have the same product units.
address. 4. Configure one smart
4. No smart cooling cooling product unit
product unit is as the master unit.
configured as the 5. Power on the master
master unit. unit, or configure
5. The master unit is another unit as the
powered off. master unit.

6. The ETH converter is 6. Maintain or replace

faulty. the ETH converter.
7. Maintain or replace
7. The smart socket is
the smart socket
faulty.
8. Maintain or replace
8. The cables are faulty
the cables between
between the smart
the smart cooling
cooling product and
product and the
the smart socket or
smart socket or
monitoring host.
monitoring host.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 378

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

Group units Major 1. Teamwork settings 1. Modify teamwork

number not match are incorrect for settings for slave
slave units. units to enable slave
2. The number of units to join the
smart cooling teamwork group.
product units is 2. Set the total number
incorrectly set in the of units on the
master unit. master unit to the
3. A slave unit is power actual number of
off or offline. units.
4. The ETH converter is 3. Check the cable
faulty. connection and
running conditions of
5. The smart socket is the slave units.
faulty.
4. Maintain or replace
6. The cables are faulty the ETH converter.
between the smart
cooling product and 5. Maintain or replace
the smart socket or the smart socket.
monitoring host. 6. Maintain or replace
the cables between
the smart cooling
product and the
smart socket or
monitoring host.

Power overvolt Major 1. The power supply 1. Check the power

voltage is high. supply voltage.
2. The outdoor control 2. Maintain or replace
board is faulty. the outdoor control
board.

Power undervolt Major 1. The power supply 1. Check the power

voltage is low. supply voltage.
2. The outdoor control 2. Maintain or replace
board is faulty. the outdoor control
board.

Floor water Critical 1. Water exists on the 1. Check and clear the
overflow floor. water.
2. The water sensor is 2. Maintain or replace
faulty. the water sensor.

Power overfreq Major 1. The power supply 1. Check the power

frequency is too supply frequency.
high. 2. Replace the SPD
2. The SPD three-phase three-phase test
test board is faulty. board.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 379

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

Power underfreq Major 1. The power supply 1. Check the power

frequency is too low. supply frequency.
2. The SPD three-phase 2. Replace the SPD
test board is faulty. three-phase test
board.

Secondary power Major The auxiliary power Replace the auxiliary

24V undervoltage supply is faulty. power supply module.

Secondary power Major The auxiliary power Replace the auxiliary

24V overvoltage supply is faulty. power supply module.

Supply-air HT Critical 1. The load is high, or 1. Add more smart

the refrigeration cooling product
capacity is units.
insufficient. 2. Check other causes if
2. The supply air temp the alarm persists
is higher than the after startup.
supply-air HT alarm 3. Check the ambient
threshold during temp.
startup.
4. Adjust the supply-air
3. The ambient temp is HT alarm threshold.
high.
5. Calibrate or replace
4. The supply-air HT the abnormal
alarm threshold is sensors.
inappropriate.
5. The temp displayed
is different from the
actual temp.

Supply-air LT Warnin 1. The load is low. 1. Please consult

g 2. The ambient temp is Huawei technical
low. support.
3. The supply-air LT 2. Check the ambient
alarm threshold is temp.
inappropriate. 3. Adjust the supply-air
4. The temp displayed LT alarm threshold.
is different from the 4. Calibrate or replace
actual temp. the abnormal
5. The air filters are sensors.
blocked. 5. Maintain or replace
the air filters.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 380

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

Cold-aisle HT Critical 1. The cold-aisle T/H 1. Adjust the position of

sensors are located the cold-aisle T/H
in inappropriate sensors.
position. 2. Check the ambient
2. The ambient temp is temp.
high. 3. Adjust the supply-air
3. The cold-aisle HT HT alarm threshold.
alarm threshold is 4. Calibrate or replace
inappropriate. the abnormal
4. The temp displayed sensors.
is different from the 5. Add more smart
actual temp. cooling product
5. The load is high, or units.
the refrigeration
capacity is
insufficient.

Return-air HT Critical 1. The load is high, or 1. Add more smart

the refrigeration cooling product
capacity is units.
insufficient. 2. Check other causes if
2. The return air temp the alarm persists
is higher than the after startup.
return-air HT alarm 3. Check the ambient
threshold during temp.
startup.
4. Adjust the return-air
3. The ambient temp is HT alarm threshold.
high.
5. Calibrate or replace
4. The return-air HT the abnormal
alarm threshold is sensors.
inappropriate.
5. The temp displayed
is different from the
actual temp.

Return-air LT Warnin 1. The load is low. 1. Please consult

g 2. The ambient temp is Huawei technical
low. support.
3. The return-air LT 2. Check the ambient
alarm threshold is temp.
inappropriate. 3. Adjust the return-air
4. The temp displayed LT alarm threshold.
is different from the 4. Calibrate or replace
actual temp. the abnormal temp
sensors.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 381

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

High humidity Warnin 1. The load is low. 1. Please consult

g 2. The T/H sensors are Huawei technical
located in support.
inappropriate 2. Adjust the position of
position. the T/H sensors.
3. The ambient 3. Check the ambient
humidity is high. humidity.
4. The high humidity 4. Adjust the high
alarm threshold is humidity alarm
inappropriate. threshold.
5. The humidity 5. Calibrate or replace
displayed is different the abnormal T/H
from the actual sensors.
humidity.

Low humidity Warnin 1. The T/H sensors are 1. Adjust the position of
g located in the T/H sensors.
inappropriate 2. Check the ambient
position. humidity.
2. The ambient 3. Adjust the low
humidity is low. humidity alarm
3. The low humidity threshold.
alarm threshold is 4. Calibrate or replace
inappropriate. the abnormal T/H
4. The humidity sensors.
displayed is different
from the actual
humidity.

Return-air 1 temp Major 1. The cables to the 1. Check the cables to

invalid temp sensor are the temp sensor.
loose or damaged. 2. Maintain or replace
2. The temp sensor is the temp sensor.
faulty.

Supply-air 1 temp Major 1. The cables to the 1. Check the cables to

invalid temp sensor are the temp sensor.
loose or damaged. 2. Maintain or replace
2. The temp sensor is the temp sensor.
faulty.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 382

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

Cold-aisle T/H brd Major 1. The cables to the 1. Check the cables to
comm failed T/H sensor are loose the T/H sensor.
or damaged. 2. Set the DIP switch of
2. The DIP switch of the T/H sensor
the T/H sensor is set correctly.
incorrectly. 3. Maintain or replace
3. The T/H sensor is the T/H sensor.
faulty. 4. Maintain or replace
4. The communication the control board.
port of the control
board is faulty.

Cold-aisle temp Major 1. Dirt or water exists 1. Remove dirt or water

invalid around the T/H from the T/H sensor.
sensor, which leads 2. Maintain or replace
to a detection fault. the T/H sensor.
2. The T/H sensor is
faulty.

Cold-aisle humid Major 1. Dirt or water exists 1. Remove dirt or water

invalid around the T/H from the T/H sensor.
sensor, which leads 2. Maintain or replace
to a detection fault. the T/H sensor.
2. The T/H sensor is
faulty.

Ctrl point sensor Major All the T/H sensors of Enable the T/H sensors
disabled the control point are of the control point or
disabled. change the control
point.

Discharge temp Major 1. Cables to the 1. Check cables to the

sensor fault exhaust air exhaust air
temperature sensor temperature sensor.
are not properly 2. Maintain or replace
connected. the exhaust air
2. The exhaust air temperature sensor.
temperature sensor
is faulty.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 383

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

Comp discharge Major 1. The refrigerant leaks. 1. Identify and repair

HT 2. The condenser fins the leaking point,
are blocked. and refill refrigerant
after maintenance.
3. The ambient
temperature is 2. Clean the condenser
higher than the fins.
upper threshold. 3. Check the ambient
4. The temperature temp.
displayed by the 4. Calibrate or replace
discharge the discharge
temperature sensor temperature sensor.
is different from the 5. Maintain or replace
actual value. outdoor fans.
5. Outdoor fans run 6. Maintain or replace
abnormally. EEV.
6. The EEV is faulty.

Comp discharge Critical The comp discharge HT Reference to the

HT lock alarm is generated solutions for the comp
frequently. discharge HT alarm.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 384

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

Comp HP switch Major 1. The outdoor unit 1. Check the outdoor

input power has an unit power supply.
open phase, 2. Check the signal
incorrect phase cables to outdoor
sequence, or is unit.
unavailable.
3. Clean the condenser
2. Signal cables to the fins.
outdoor unit are not
properly connected. 4. Maintain or replace
the outdoor fan drive
3. The condenser fins or fan.
are blocked.
5. Check cables to the
4. The outdoor fan high pressure switch.
driver or fan is
faulty. 6. Maintain or replace
the high pressure
5. Cables to the high switch.
pressure switch are
not properly 7. Maintain or replace
connected. the EEV

6. The high pressure 8. Decrease certain

switch is faulty. amount of
refrigerant.
7. The EEV is faulty.
9. Reinstall the outdoor
8. The refrigerant is unit properly.
overfilled.
9. The outdoor unit is
installed improperly

Comp HP switch Critical The comp HP alarm is Reference to the

lock generated frequently. solutions for the comp
HP alarm.

Discharge pressure Critical 1. The cables to the 1. Check the cables to

sensor fault press sensor are the press sensor.
loose or damaged. 2. Replace the press
2. The press sensor is sensor.
faulty.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 385

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

Comp discharge Major 1. The outdoor unit 1. Check the outdoor

HP input power has an unit power supply.
open phase, 2. Check the signal
incorrect phase cables to outdoor
sequence, or is unit.
unavailable.
3. Clean the condenser
2. Signal cables to the fins.
outdoor unit are not
properly connected. 4. Maintain or replace
the outdoor fan drive
3. The condenser fins or fan.
are blocked.
5. Calibrate or replace
4. The outdoor fan the discharge press
driver or fan is sensor.
faulty.
6. Maintain or replace
5. The discharge press the EEV.
displayed is different
from the actual 7. Decrease certain
press. amount of
refrigerant.
6. The EEV is faulty.
7. The refrigerant is
overfilled.

Comp discharge Critical 1. The outdoor unit 1. Check the outdoor

HP lock input power has an unit power supply.
open phase, 2. Check the signal
incorrect phase cables to outdoor
sequence, or is unit.
unavailable.
3. Clean the condenser
2. Signal cables to the fins.
outdoor unit are not
properly connected. 4. Maintain or replace
the outdoor fan drive
3. The condenser fins or fan.
are blocked.
5. Calibrate or replace
4. The outdoor fan the discharge press
driver or fan is sensor.
faulty.
6. Maintain or replace
5. The discharge press the EEV.
displayed is different
from the actual 7. Decrease certain
press. amount of
refrigerant.
6. The EEV is faulty.
7. The refrigerant is
overfilled.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 386

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

Suction pressure Major 1. The cables to the 1. Check the cables to

sensor fault press sensor are the press sensor.
loose or damaged. 2. Maintain or replace
2. The press sensor is the press sensor.
faulty.

Comp suction LP Major 1. The refrigerant leaks. 1. Check for any

2. The solenoid valve is leakages. Fill
faulty. refrigerant after
maintenance or
3. The cables to the replacement.
press sensor are
loose or damaged. 2. Maintain or replace
the solenoid coil or
4. The press displayed the solenoid valve.
is different from the
actual press. 3. Check the cables to
the press sensor.
5. The dryer filter is
blocked. 4. Calibrate or replace
the press sensor.
6. The expansion valve
is blocked. 5. Maintain or replace
the dryer filter.
7. The indoor fans are
faulty. 6. Maintain or replace
the expansion valve.
8. The refrigerant in
the indoor and 7. Maintain or replace
outdoor unit is not the indoor fans.
circulating, or the 8. Check and confirm
stop valve is not that stop valve has
open. been opened. Power
off the indoor unit
and restart it after
one minute.

Comp suction LP Critical The comp suction LP Reference to the

lock alarm is generated solutions for the comp
frequently. suction LP alarm.

Comp drive alarm Major 1. The comp driver is 1. Maintain or replace

faulty. the comp driver.
2. The comp is faulty. 2. Maintain or replace
the comp.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 387

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

Comp drive comm Critical 1. The cables to the 1. Check the cables to
failed comp driver are the comp driver.
loose or damaged. 2. Maintain or replace
2. The comp driver is the comp driver.
faulty. 3. Turn on the air
3. The air switch of switch of comp
comp driver is off. driver.

Comp exceed Warnin The accumulated Maintain or replace the

runtime g runtime of the comp comp and clear the
exceeds the alarm accumulated runtime.
threshold.

Comp drive lock Critical The comp shuts down Check whether other
due to the driver fault alarms are generated
for multiple times. for the compressor
drive. For details about
how to rectify the faults
of the compressor drive,
follow the
troubleshooting
instructions.

Comp drive DC Major 1. The power supply 1. Check the power

overvolt voltage is high. supply voltage.
2. The comp driver is 2. Maintain or replace
faulty. the comp driver.
3. The comp is faulty. 3. Maintain or replace
the comp.

Comp drive DC Major 1. The power supply 1. Check the power

undervolt voltage is low. supply voltage.
2. The comp driver is 2. Maintain or replace
faulty. the comp driver.
3. The comp is faulty. 3. Maintain or replace
4. The main power the comp.
supply is faulty or 4. Reconnect the main
the cables to the power supply or the
comp driver are cables to the comp
loose or damaged. driver.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 388

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

Comp drive Major 1. The comp is in lack 1. Fill oil to the comp.
overload of oil. 2. Clean the condenser
2. The condenser fins fins.
are blocked. 3. Maintain or replace
3. The outdoor units do the outdoor units.
not run properly. 4. Decrease certain
4. The refrigerant is amount of
overfilled. refrigerant.
5. The comp is faulty. 5. Maintain or replace
the comp.

Compressor start Major 1. The comp is in lack 1. Fill oil to the comp.
failed of oil. 2. Maintain or replace
2. The comp driver is the comp driver.
faulty. 3. Maintain or replace
3. The comp is faulty. the comp.

Comp drive short Critical The comp driver is Maintain or replace the
period faulty for multiple comp driver and clear
times, or the faulty the accumulated
lasts for a long time. runtime.

Comp freeze point Major 1. The refrigerant leaks. 1. Check for any
protection 2. The suction pressure leakages. Fill
sensor displayed is refrigerant after
different from the maintenance or
actual pressure. replacement.
3. The filter dryer is 2. Calibrate or replace
blocked. the suction pressure
sensor.
4. The expansion valve
is blocked. 3. Maintain or replace
the filter dryer.
4. Maintain or replace
the expansion valve.

Suction temp Major 1. Cables to the 1. Check cables to the

sensor fault temperature sensor temperature sensor.
are not properly 2. Maintain or replace
connected. the temperature
2. The temperature sensor.
sensor is faulty.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 389

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

Comp LP switch Major 1. The refrigerant leaks. 1. Check for any

2. The solenoid valve is leakages. Fill
faulty. refrigerant after
maintenance or
3. The cables to the LP replacement.
Switch are loose or
damaged. 2. Maintain or replace
the solenoid coil or
4. The LP Switch is the solenoid valve.
damaged.
3. Check the cables to
5. The dryer filter is the LP Switch.
blocked.
4. Calibrate or replace
6. The expansion valve the LP Switch.
is blocked.
5. Maintain or replace
7. The indoor fans are the dryer filter.
faulty.
6. Maintain or replace
the expansion valve.
7. Maintain or replace
the indoor fans.

Comp LP switch Critical The comp suction LP Reference to the

lock alarm is generated solutions for the comp
frequently. suction LP alarm.

Gas pipe temp. Major 1. Cables to the 1. Check cables to the

sensor fault temperature sensor temperature sensor.
are not properly 2. Maintain or replace
connected. the temperature
2. The temperature sensor.
sensor is faulty.

Compressor Warnin The compressor heating Wait until the

preheating alarm g belt is preheating the preheating is complete
compressor oil. or manually stop
preheating in the
Setting menu.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 390

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

Outdoor unit input Major 1. The comp is in lack 1. Fill oil to the comp.
overcurrent of oil. 2. Clean the condenser
2. The condenser fins fins.
are blocked. 3. Maintain or replace
3. The outdoor units do the outdoor units.
not run properly. 4. Decrease certain
4. The refrigerant is amount of
overfilled. refrigerant.
5. The comp is faulty. 5. Maintain or replace
6. The ambient the comp.
temperature is 6. Measure the ambient
higher than the temperature.
upper threshold. 7. Maintain or replace
7. The outdoor unit the outdoor unit
power module is power module.
faulty.

Outdoor fan comm Major 1. The cables to the 1. Check the cables to
failure comp driver are the comp driver.
loose or damaged. 2. Maintain or replace
2. Maintain or replace the comp driver.
the comp driver.

Outdoor unit main Major Outdoor control board Maintain or replace the
board fault is faulty. outdoor control board.

Outdoor unit pwr Major Outdoor hardware is Maintain or replace the

module fault fault. outdoor hardware.

Indoor fan fault Major 1. The power supply to 1. Check the power
the indoor fan is supply to the indoor
abnormal. fan.
2. The cables to the 2. Check the cables to
indoor fan are loose the indoor fan.
or damaged. 3. Maintain or replace
3. The indoor fan is the indoor fan.
faulty.

Indoor fan exceed Warnin The accumulated Maintain or replace the

runtime g runtime of the fan indoor fan and clear the
exceeds the alarm accumulated runtime.
threshold.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 391

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

Indoor fan Major 1. The cables to the 1. Check the cables to

overspeed indoor fan are loose the indoor fan.
or damaged. 2. Maintain or replace
2. The indoor fan is the indoor fan.
faulty.

Indoor fan failure Critical 1. The indoor fan is 1. Maintain or replace

faulty. the indoor fan.
2. The cables to the 2. Check the cables to
indoor fan are loose the indoor fan.
or damaged.

Inlet solenoid fault Major The water inlet solenoid Replace the water inlet
alarm valve is faulty. solenoid valve.

Water supply Major 1. The water supply is 1. Verify that water

alarm insufficient. supply to the
2. The humidifier float humidifier is normal.
has dropped and is 2. Verify that the
jammed. humidifier float can
3. The humidifier float float and drop
interconnection properly.
terminals are 3. Verify that the
abnormal. humidifier float
4. The water inlet interconnection
solenoid valve terminals are
cannot open. properly connected.
5. Cables of the water 4. Verify that water
inlet solenoid valve flows into the
are not properly humidifier pan from
connected. the water inlet pipe
of the humidifier.
5. Verify that cables of
the water inlet
solenoid valve are
properly connected.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 392

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

Full water Critical 1. The low liquid level 1. Check the cables to
sensor is faulty. the low liquid level
2. The condensate sensor, clear the
water pump is faulty. obstacles, or replace
the low liquid level
3. The drainpipe is sensor.
blocked.
2. Check the cables to
4. The drainage filter is the condensate
blocked. water pump, clear
the foreign matter in
the water pump, or
replace the pump.
3. Check that the
drainpipe is not
blocked or bent.
4. Clear the foreign
matter in the water
pan and filter.

Drain abnormal Major 1. The high liquid level 1. Check the cables to
sensor is faulty. the high liquid level
2. The condensate sensor, clear the
water pump is faulty. obstacles, or replace
the high liquid level
3. The drainpipe is sensor.
blocked.
2. Check the cables to
4. The drainage filter is the condensate
blocked. water pump, clear
the foreign matter in
the water pump, or
replace the pump.
3. Check that the
drainpipe is not
blocked or bent.
4. Clear the foreign
matter in the water
pan and filter.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 393

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

Cond pump fault Major 1. Cables to the water 1. Verify pump cable
pump are not connections.
properly connected. 2. Replace the water
2. The water pump is pump.
faulty. 3. Rectify the liquid
3. The water pump level detection fault.
races due to a liquid 4. Remove foreign
level detection fault. matter in the water
4. The water pump is pump.
blocked.

Cond pump exceed Warnin The accumulated Maintain or replace the

runtime g runtime of the cond cond pump and clear
pump exceeds the the accumulated
alarm threshold. runtime.

PSU power input Warnin The power input cables Check the power input
failure g of the PSU are loose or cables of the PSU.
damaged.

PSU fault Major The PSU is faulty. Maintain or replace the

PSU.

PSU comm Major 1. The communication 1. Check the

interrupt cables of the PSU communication
are faulty. cables of the PSU.
2. The PSU is faulty. 2. Maintain or replace
3. The communication the PSU.
port of the control 3. Maintain or replace
board is faulty. the control board.

EEV driver power Critical EEV driver board fault. Replace the main
off control module.

EEV driver fault Critical The EEV driver fault Refer to the solutions
locked alarm is generated for the EEV driver fault
frequently. alarm.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 394

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

EEV low Major 1. The electronic 1. Reinstall the

overheating degree expansion valve coil electronic expansion
is loose. valve coil.
2. The electronic 2. Replace the
expansion valve coil electronic expansion
is faulty. valve coil.
3. The electronic 3. Replace the
expansion valve is electronic expansion
faulty. valve.
4. The dehumid 4. Maintain or replace
solenoid valve coil is dehumid solenoid
faulty. valve coil.

EEV low Critical 1. The electronic 1. Reinstall the

overheating locked expansion valve coil electronic expansion
is loose. valve coil.
2. The electronic 2. Replace the
expansion valve coil electronic expansion
is faulty. valve coil.
3. The electronic 3. Replace the
expansion valve is electronic expansion
faulty. valve.
4. The dehumid 4. Maintain or replace
solenoid valve coil is dehumid solenoid
faulty. valve coil.

EEV high Major 1. The electronic 1. Reinstall the

overheating degree expansion valve coil electronic expansion
is loose. valve coil.
2. The electronic 2. Replace the
expansion valve coil electronic expansion
is faulty. valve coil.
3. The electronic 3. Replace the
expansion valve is electronic expansion
faulty. valve.

EEV high Critical 1. The electronic 1. Reinstall the

overheating locked expansion valve coil electronic expansion
is loose. valve coil.
2. The electronic 2. Replace the
expansion valve coil electronic expansion
is faulty. valve coil.
3. The electronic 3. Replace the
expansion valve is electronic expansion
faulty. valve.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 395

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

EEV auto control Critical 1. The suction pressure 1. Verify that the
fault sensor is faulty. suction pressure
2. The suction sensor works
temperature sensor properly.
is faulty. 2. Verify that the
suction temperature
sensor works
properly.

EEV driver comm. Major 1. The electronic 1. Replace the control

fault expansion valve board.
driver is faulty. 2. Maintain or replace
2. The communication the control board.
port of the control
board is faulty.

EEV driver fault Major 1. Cables to the 1. Check cables to the

electronic expansion electronic expansion
valve coil are not valve driver.
properly connected. 2. Replace the control
2. The electronic board.
expansion valve
driver is faulty.

Outdoor fan Major 1. The indoor and 1. Check the indoor and
communication outdoor outdoor
failure communications communications
cable is not properly cable.
connected. 2. Maintain or replace
2. The outdoor fan the outdoor fan
driver is faulty. driver.
3. The outdoor unit is 3. Power on the
not powered on. outdoor unit.
4. The communication 4. Maintain or replace
port of the control the control board.
board is faulty.

Outdoor fan run Warnin The outdoor fan Replace the outdoor
overtime g running time exceeds fan, and clear the
the upper limit. accumulated running
time.

Outdoor fan driver Major The fan driver has Clear the major alarm
fault generated a major for the driver.
alarm.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 396

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

Outdoor fan speed Major 1. The external fan 1. If the fan is working
abnormal speed is too high. properly, add a baffle
2. The external fan is plate at the air
faulty. return side of the
outdoor unit.
2. Replace the outdoor
fan.

Ambient temp. Major 1. The cables to the 1. Check the cables to

sensor fault temp sensor are the temp sensor.
loose or damaged. 2. Maintain or replace
2. The temp sensor is the temp sensor.
faulty.

Outdoor unit HT Critical 1. The ambient 1. Measure the ambient

alm temperature is temperature.
higher than the 2. Install a sunshade.
upper threshold.
3. Calibrate or replace
2. There is strong the abnormal
radiation on the sensors.
monitoring point,
resulting in high
temperature.
3. The temp displayed
is different from the
actual temp.

Outdoor fan drive Critical The outdoor fan fault See the measures for
locked alarm is generated handling the outdoor
repeatedly during a fan fault alarm.
period of time.

Outdoor fan fault Critical 1. The cables to the 1. Check the cables to
outdoor fan are the outdoor fan.
loose or damaged. 2. Maintain or replace
2. The outdoor fan is the outdoor fan.
faulty. 3. Maintain or replace
3. The outdoor unit the outdoor unit
main board is faulty. main board.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 397

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Component Alarm Name Alarm Possible Cause Measures

Severit
y

Comp drive Major 1. The fans in the comp 1. Check the fans in the
module overheat driver are faulty. comp driver.
2. Dirt exists in the air 2. Clean the air vents of
vents of the fans in the fans in the comp
the comp driver. driver.
3. Comp drive heat sink 3. Clean the heat sink
is dirty & heat ex after power-off.
effect poor. 4. Clean the cavity after
4. ECB cavity is dirty/ power-off.
blocked & heat ex 5. Replace the drive
effect poor. module.
5. The drive module is
faulty.

Condenser temp. Major 1. Cables to the 1. Check cables to the

sensor fault condensing temp temperature sensor.
sensor are incorrectly 2. Maintain or replace
connected. the temperature
2. Cond temp sensor is sensor.
faulty.

6.4 Parts Replacement

6.4.1 Replacing Structural System Components

6.4.1.1 Replacing a Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock

Prerequisites
● Tool: Phillips screwdriver
● Material: A spare cabinet electronic clasp lock is available and functional.

Context
cabinet electronic clasp locks are installed at the front and rear doors of a cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the front or rear door of the cabinet.

Step 2 Remove the signal cables from the cabinet electronic clasp lock.

Step 3 Remove the cabinet electronic clasp lock bolts using a Phillips screwdriver.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 398

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-1 Removing a cabinet electronic clasp lock

Step 4 Install the new cabinet electronic clasp lock at the front or rear door of a cabinet.

NOTE

● Before removing a cabinet electronic clasp lock, remember the DIP switch settings on
the cabinet electronic clasp lock. Ensure that the DIP switch settings on the new cabinet
electronic clasp lock are the same as those on the old cabinet electronic clasp lock.
● The mounting holes for the new cabinet electronic clasp lock are slotted holes. If the
door cannot be properly closed after installation, adjust the lock height based on site
requirements.

Step 5 Reconnect the cables to the cabinet electronic clasp lock.

----End

6.4.1.2 Replacing a Gas Spring

Prerequisites
● Tools: Phillips screwdriver, step ladder
● Material: A spare gas spring is available and functional.

Context
Gas springs are installed on the top of a cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the front or rear door of the cabinet.
Step 2 Remove the nuts from the gas spring using an adjustable wrench.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 399

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Step 3 Remove the gas spring.

Figure 6-2 Removing a gas spring

Step 4 Tighten the new air spring using an adjustable wrench.

----End

6.4.1.3 Replacing a PDU2000

Prerequisites
● Tools: Phillips screwdriver, step ladder
● Material: A spare PDU2000 of the same model is available and functional.

Context
A PDU2000 is installed at the rear door of a cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the rear door of the cabinet.
Step 2 Switch off the output circuit breaker of the power distribution subrack for the
PDU2000. Disconnect the power cables and signal cables from the PDU2000
terminal block.
Step 3 Remove the bolts that secure the PDU2000 using a Phillips screwdriver.
Step 4 Secure the new PDU2000 to the rear door of the cabinet.
Step 5 Reconnect the power cables or signal cables to the PDU2000, and switch on the
circuit breaker of the power distribution subrack.
----End

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 400

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

6.4.2 Replacing Power Supply and Distribution System

Components

DANGER

● Only qualified personnel can replace components of the power supply and
distribution system.
● Wear protective tools such as insulation gloves and shoes before replacing a
power supply and distribution component.
● Power off the upper-level equipment before replacing a power supply and
distribution component.
● Use a multimeter and electrical tester pen to check whether the front and rear
ends of the component to be replaced are powered off after the component is
powered off.

6.4.2.1 Replacing a Surge Protection Module

Prerequisites

DANGER

● Do not replace a surge protection module during a thunderstorm.

● Before replacing a surge protection module, wear insulation gloves.

● Tools: insulation protective gloves, electroprobe

● Material: A new surge protection module of the same model is available and
functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Switch the SPD circuit breaker to OFF.
Step 2 Remove the protective panel from the SPD.

Figure 6-3 Removing the protective panel

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 401

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Step 3 Measure the L1, L2, L3, and N voltages to PE using an electroprobe, as shown in
Figure 6-4, and verify that the faulty SPD has no voltage before replacing the
faulty surge protection module.

Figure 6-4 Measuring voltages

Step 4 Hold the faulty surge protection module and pull it out, as shown in Figure 6-5.

DANGER

During replacement, do not touch the energized components in the power

distribution subrack.

Figure 6-5 Replacing a surge protection module

Step 5 Install the new surge protection module.

Step 6 Reinstall the protective panel for the SPD, and switch the SPD circuit breaker to
ON.

Step 7 Check whether there are alarms on the ECC800-Pro. If there is no alarm, the surge
protection module is functional.

----End

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 402

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

6.4.2.2 Replacing a Fuse

Prerequisites

CAUTION

When replacing a fuse, wear insulation gloves and do not touch the input copper
bar.

● Tool: insulation gloves

● Material: The new fuse of the same model is available and functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Shake the fuse terminal block gently, pull it out, and push it outwards.
NOTE

Fuses can be replaced in a similar way. The following figure is for reference only.

Figure 6-6 Opening the fuse terminal block

Step 2 Reinstall the fuse terminal block in the power distribution subrack.

Step 3 Close the fuse terminal block.

Step 4 Observe the indicator. If the indicator is on, the fuse is functional.

----End

6.4.2.3 Replacing an Indicator

Prerequisites
● Tools: electroprobe, insulation gloves, Phillips screwdriver, multimeter, step
ladder

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 403

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

● Material: A spare indicator of the same model is available and functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the rear door of the Converged Cabinet, and push out the fuse terminal
block to disconnect the circuit. For details about the fuse position and how to
remove the fuse, see 6.4.2.2 Replacing a Fuse.
Step 2 (Optional) Open the front door of the Converged Cabinet, and remove the
indicator protective panel.

Figure 6-7 Removing the indicator protective panel

Step 3 Loosen the screw at the back of the indicator using a Phillips screwdriver, and
remove the cables.
NOTE

When removing cables, label the cables with corresponding terminal ports for later connection.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 404

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-8 Replacing an indicator

Step 4 Remove the retaining ring from the indicator and remove the indicator from the
mounting hole.
Step 5 Put a new indicator into the mounting hole, secure the retaining ring, connect the
cables, and close the fuse terminal block.
Step 6 Verify that the indicator lights up properly.
----End

6.4.2.4 Replacing a UPS2000-G

Prerequisites
● Tools: electroprobe, insulation gloves, Phillips screwdriver, multimeter
● Materials: A spare UPS of the same model is available and functional.
● The UPS is damaged or faulty and cannot work.

Scenario with One UPS

Step 1 Ensure that the TN system is reliably grounded, and that the main ground cable of
the Smart Module is reliably connected.

NOTICE

After removing cables, wrap exposed terminals with insulation tape and do not
block cable labels. If cable labels are blocked, cables may be connected incorrectly
later.

Step 2 Turn off the battery switch, or remove the wiring terminal between the battery
pack and the faulty UPS.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 405

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Step 3 Open the front door of the cabinet. Remove the protective cover from the
maintenance bypass switch, and manually turn on the maintenance bypass switch
(the UPS will automatically transfer to bypass mode and generate an alarm
indicating that the maintenance bypass switch is turned on).

Step 4 Turn off the corresponding UPS input and output switches. Use a multimeter to
check whether the UPS input and output terminals and battery terminals are
disconnected.

Step 5 Remove the rear cover from the UPS, and remove the input and output power
cables, battery cables (or battery pack cables), and signal cables.

NOTICE

Wrap the exposed cable with insulation tape.

Step 6 Remove screws from the UPS front panel, and pull out the UPS.

Step 7 Install the new UPS and screw it to the cabinet.

Step 8 Connect the output power cables, signal cables, and UPS input power cables in
sequence. Check whether the cable labels are consistent with the silk screens on
the UPS, and whether all cables are connected.

NOTICE

Do not connect the manual bypass switch (MBS) signal cable to the UPS rear at
present.

Step 9 Start the UPS. When initialization is complete, the setting wizard screen is
displayed. You can set the language (the default language is English), system
parameters, and battery parameters. After you complete the settings, press .
The standby screen is displayed.

Step 10 Close the UPS input switch. When the output switch is off, start the inverter. After
checking that the UPS starts normally, shut down the inverter. The UPS transfers
to static bypass mode at this moment. After that, close the UPS output switch,
and open the manual maintenance bypass switch. Then the loads are energized by
the UPS bypass.

Step 11 Install the protective cover, and connect the MBS signal cable to the UPS rear.

Step 12 Check whether the UPS generates abnormal alarms. If there are alarms, clear
them and start the UPS.

Step 13 Connect the battery cables (or battery pack cables) and turn on the battery
switch.

----End

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 406

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Scenario with Two UPSs (One Faulty)

Step 1 Ensure that the TN system is reliably grounded, and that the main ground cable of
the smart module is reliably connected.

NOTICE

After removing cables, wrap exposed terminals with insulation tape and do not
block cable labels. If cable labels are blocked, cables may be connected incorrectly
later.

Step 2 Locate the faulty UPS between the two UPSs.

Step 3 Turn off the battery switch, or remove the wiring terminal between the battery
pack and the faulty UPS.

Step 4 Turn off the corresponding UPS input and output switches. Use a multimeter to
check whether the UPS input and output terminals and battery terminals are de-
energized.

Step 5 Remove the rear cover from the UPS, and remove the input and output power
cables, battery cables (or battery pack cables), and signal cables.

NOTICE

Wrap the exposed cable with insulation tape.

Step 6 Remove screws from the UPS front panel, and pull out the UPS.

Step 7 Install the new UPS and screw it to the cabinet.

Step 8 Connect the output power cables, signal cable, and UPS input power cables in
sequence. Check whether the cable labels are consistent with the silk screens on
the UPS, and whether all cables are connected.

Step 9 Start the UPS. When initialization is complete, the setting wizard screen is
displayed. You can set the language (the default language is English), system
parameters, and battery parameters. After you complete the settings, press .
The standby screen is displayed.

Step 10 Close the UPS input and output switches. If the UPSs are connected in parallel, set
parallel parameters before closing the switches.

Step 11 Check whether the UPS generates abnormal alarms. If there are alarms, clear
them and start the UPS.

Step 12 Connect the battery cables (or battery pack cables) and turn on the battery
switch.

----End

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 407

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Scenario with Two UPSs (Two Faulty)

Step 1 Ensure that the TN system is reliably grounded, and that the main ground cable of
the smart module is reliably connected.

NOTICE

After removing cables, wrap exposed terminals with insulation tape and do not
block cable labels. If cable labels are blocked, cables may be connected incorrectly
later.

Step 2 Turn off the battery switch, or remove the wiring terminal between the battery
pack and the faulty UPS.
Step 3 Open the front door of the cabinet. Remove the protective cover from the
maintenance bypass switch, and manually turn on the maintenance bypass switch
(the UPS will automatically transfer to bypass mode and generate an alarm
indicating that the maintenance bypass switch is turned on).
Step 4 Turn off the corresponding UPS input and output switches. Use a multimeter to
check whether the UPS input and output terminals and battery terminals are
disconnected.
Step 5 Remove the rear cover from the UPS, and remove the input and output power
cables, battery cables (or battery pack cables), and signal cables.

NOTICE

Wrap the exposed cable with insulation tape.

Step 6 Remove screws from the UPS front panel, and pull out the UPS.
Step 7 Install the new UPS and screw it to the cabinet.
Step 8 Connect the output power cables, signal cables, and UPS input power cables in
sequence. Check whether the cable labels are consistent with the silk screens on
the UPS, and whether all cables are connected.

NOTICE

Do not connect the manual bypass switch (MBS) signal cable to the UPS rear at
present.

Step 9 Start the UPS. When initialization is complete, the setting wizard screen is
displayed. You can set the language (the default language is English), system
parameters, and battery parameters. After you complete the settings, press .
The standby screen is displayed.
Step 10 Close the input switches of the two UPSs. When the output switches are off, start
the inverters. After checking that the UPSs start normally, shut down the inverters.
The UPSs transfer to static bypass mode at this moment. If the UPSs are

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 408

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

connected in parallel, set parallel parameters. After that, close the output switches
of the two UPSs, and open the manual maintenance bypass switch. Then the loads
are energized by the UPS bypass.

Step 11 Install the protective cover and connect the MBS signal cable to the UPS rear.

Step 12 Check whether the UPS generates abnormal alarms. If there are alarms, clear
them and start the UPS.

Step 13 Connect the battery cables (or battery pack cables) and turn on the battery
switch.

----End

6.4.2.5 Replacing a Lithium Battery

Prerequisites
● The protective gloves, Phillips screwdriver, and socket wrench are available.
● You have confirmed the model of the ESM to be replaced and prepared a new
ESM.
● You are authorized to enter the site with the key.

Context
ESM replacement may cause a system power failure. To prevent power failures,
ensure that other power sources, such as the mains, diesel generator, or a third-
party DC power source, provide continuous power supply.

Replacement Requirements
Conditions for the ESM to enter and exit the maintenance mode:

1. The intelligent displacement lock function has been disabled. When the
intelligent displacement anti-theft function is disabled, hold down the
MANUAL ON/OFF button for at least 15s to enter the maintenance mode.
2. Hold down the MANUAL ON/OFF button for at least 15s to exit the
maintenance mode.

Before replacing an ESM in an actual maintenance scenario, hold down the

MANUAL ON/OFF button for the old ESM to power off. After the ESM is replaced,
manually exit the new ESM from the maintenance mode.

Removing an Old ESM

Step 1 Wear protective gloves.

Step 2 Switch the BAT– battery circuit breaker on the power system to OFF or remove the
battery fuse.

Step 3 Use the MANUAL ON/OFF button on the battery to turn off the battery output.

Step 4 Disconnect the cables from the old ESM. Insulate each cable and label it
immediately after disconnecting it.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 409

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Step 5 Loosen the screws on the panel and remove the ESM.

----End

Installing a New ESM

Step 1 Install the new ESM and tighten the screws.
Step 2 Hold down the MANUAL ON/OFF button for 15s for the ESM to enter the
maintenance mode. In this mode, all indicators blink, the ESM board is activated,
but the ESM is not charged or discharged.
Step 3 Connect the cables to the new ESM based on the cable labels.
Step 4 Switch the BAT– battery circuit breaker in the power system to ON or reinstall the
battery fuse using a fuse extracting unit.
Step 5 Hold down the MANUAL ON/OFF button for 15s for the battery to exit the
maintenance mode. The ESM is automatically activated and connects to the power
system.
Step 6 Remove the protective gloves and pack up all tools.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
● Put the removed component into the ESD box or bag and then place the ESD
box or bag into the carton box with foams or the bag of the new component.
● Fill in the fault card with the information about the removed component.
● Contact your local Huawei office to handle the faulty component.

6.4.2.6 Replacing the Monitoring Board from the ATS Subrack

Prerequisites
● Tools: insulation gloves, Phillips screwdriver
● Materials: A spare monitoring of the same model is available and functional.
● The monitoring board is damaged or faulty.

Procedure
1. Remove the faulty monitoring board.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 410

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-9 Replacing the monitoring board from the ATS subrack

2. Install the spare monitoring board.

6.4.2.7 Replacing an ATS Subrack

Prerequisites
● Tools: insulation gloves, Phillips screwdriver
● Materials: A spare ATS subrack of the same model is available and functional.
● The ATS subrack is damaged or faulty and cannot work.

NOTICE

Before replacing the ATS subrack, ensure that the upstream power supply is
disconnected. Ensure that the power input is disconnected during
replacement.

Procedure
1. Ensure that the upstream circuit breaker of the ATS is switched off.
2. Remove the ATS input and output power cables and monitoring cables.
3. Remove the faulty ATS subrack.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 411

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-10 Replacing an ATS subrack

4. Install the spare ATS subrack.

5. Connect the ATS input and output power cables and monitoring cables.

6.4.3 Replacing Cooling System Components

6.4.3.1 Replacing Indoor Unit Components

Figure 6-11 and Figure 6-12 show the components of an indoor unit.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 412

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-11 Indoor unit components (rear)

(1) Electric control box (2) Water inlet solenoid valve (3) High liquid level detector

(4) Low liquid level detector (5) Condensate pump (6) Low pressure sensor

(7) Electronic expansion valve (8) Wet film humidifier

(optional)

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 413

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-12 Indoor unit components (front)

(1) Fan (2) Electric heater (optional) (3) Evaporator

6.4.3.1.1 Replacing an Indoor Fan

Prerequisites
● Tools: Phillips screwdriver, diagonal pliers or scissors.
● An indoor fan needs to be replaced.
● A spare indoor fan of the same model is available and functional.

Context
● The fan is maintained from the front.
● When there are more than six cabinets in the cold aisle, the indoor fan is
configured with an air director. When replacing the fan, the air director needs
to be removed.

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product over the EMS.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 414

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information,
choose Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to changes with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supply from the smart cooling product control unit after the
smart cooling product shuts down over the EMS.
Step 3 (Optional) Remove the screw from the air director in the cabinet using a Phillips
screwdriver, and pull out the air director, as shown in Figure 6-13.

Figure 6-13 Removing the air director

NOTICE

In a scenario with two smart cooling products, if the fan needs to be maintained
or replaced for the lower smart cooling product, both the upper and low air
directors need to be removed.

Step 4 Remove the four M4 screws from the fan baffle plate using a Phillips screwdriver,
and remove the fan baffle plate, as shown in Figure 6-14.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 415

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-14 Removing a fan baffle plate

Step 5 (Optional) Cut the cable tie securing the NTC sensor on fan 3 using scissors or
diagonal pliers, and remove the NTC sensor.
NOTE

The NTC sensor bound to fan 3 needs to be removed when only fan 3 is replaced.

Step 6 Cut the cable tie securing the fan terminal using scissors or diagonal pliers and
pull out the fan terminal.
Step 7 Remove the four M4 screws from the fan using a Phillips screwdriver, and remove
the fan guard and fan, as shown in Figure 6-15.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 416

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-15 Removing the fan

Step 8 Install a new fan in the original position by performing the preceding steps in
reverse order, and install the air director and fan baffle plate (if any).

Step 9 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as
user admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls >
Control Information, set Startup/Shutdown control to ON, and click Submit.

Step 10 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Enter, and click
Submit.

Step 11 Choose Running Parameters > Diagnostic Mode Parameters, set Indoor fan
manual control to 50%, and click Submit. If the indoor fan works properly and
there is no alarm, the indoor fan is functional. Set Indoor fan manual control to
0% and click Submit.

Step 12 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Exit, and click
Submit.

Step 13 Clear up the indoor fan total runtime.

● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.
c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > Perf Maint, and clear up the indoor fan total
runtime.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Performance
Maintenance Control, and clear up the indoor fan total runtime.

----End

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 417

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

6.4.3.1.2 Replacing a Condensate Pump

Prerequisites
● Tool: Phillips screwdriver
● A condensate pump needs to be replaced.
● A spare condensate pump of the same model is available and functional.

Context
The condensate pump is maintained from the rear.

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product over the EMS.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.
c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information,
choose Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to changes with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supply from the smart cooling product control unit after the
smart cooling product shuts down over the EMS.
Step 3 Remove the top metal sheet of the condensate pump, as shown by in Figure 6-16.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 418

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-16 Removing a condensate pump

Step 4 Remove the hose clamps at the water inlet and outlet hoses of the condensate
pump using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the hoses and take out the pump, as
shown in Figure 6-16.

Step 5 Install the new condensate pump in the original position by performing the
preceding steps in reverse order, connect the hoses, and install hose clamps.

Step 6 Power on the smart cooling product.

Step 7 Lift the low liquid level detector for 5 seconds. The condensate pump starts
automatically, and you can hear the water pump starting sound with little
vibration. If there is no exception, release the low liquid level detector.
NOTE

It is normal if a condensate pump faulty alarm is generated during the pump operation
when there is no water in the pan. The condensate pump generates this alarm for self-
protection. The alarm needs to be cleared manually.

Step 8 Clear up the condensate pump total runtime.

● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.
c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > Perf Maint, and clear up the condensate pump
total runtime.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 419

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose

Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Performance
Maintenance Control, and clear up the condensate pump total runtime.

----End

6.4.3.1.3 Replacing a PSU, Rectifier, or Main Control Module

Prerequisites
● A PSU, rectifier, or main control module needs to be replaced.
● A spare PSU, rectifier, or main control module of the same model is available
and functional.

Context
● The PSU, rectifier, and main control module can be replaced in the same way.
This section describes how to replace a PSU.
● To replace the main control module, download the software and ACC
Software Upgrade Guide from Huawei websites, and upgrade it on the PAD or
ECC.
● Figure 6-17 shows the front panel of a smart cooling product control unit.

Figure 6-17 Front panel of the smart cooling product control unit

(1) Ground point (2) Rectifier (3) PSU

(4) FE_2 port for connecting a (5) FE_1 port for connecting a (6) CAN_IN (input port of the
smart ETH gateway PoE or smart ETH gateway PoE or teamwork CAN and
LAN ports on the ECC LAN ports on the ECC northbound RS485 port)

(7) RS485/12 V port for (8) USB port (9) DP (display port)
connecting the T/H sensor

(10) COM/FE (northbound (11) CAN_OUT (output port of (12) Main control module
RS485 port and FE port) the teamwork CAN and
northbound RS485 port)

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product over the EMS.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 420

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information,
choose Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to changes with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supply from the smart cooling product control unit after the
smart cooling product shuts down over the EMS.

Step 3 Flip the clip on the PSU leftwards, as shown by (1) in Figure 6-18.

Figure 6-18 Removing a PSU

Step 4 Take out the handle and pull out the PSU from the subrack, as shown by (2) in
Figure 6-18.

Step 5 Insert the spare PSU into the corresponding slot, and flip the clip up to lock the
PSU.

Step 6 Start the smart cooling product over the EMS.

● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.
c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > ON.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information,
choose Startup/Shutdown control > ON, and then click Submit.

Step 7 Ensure that no alarm is generated for the smart cooling product after it runs for
30 minutes.

----End

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 421

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

6.4.3.1.4 Replacing an NTC Temperature Sensor

Prerequisites
● Tools: Phillips screwdriver (optional, required for removing the air director and
fan baffle plate), diagonal pliers or scissors.
● An NTC temperature sensor needs to be replaced.
● A spare NTC temperature sensor of the same model is available and
functional.

Context
● The NTC temperature sensor is maintained from the front.
● The NTC temperature sensor is bound to fan 3. Figure 6-12 shows the
position of the sensor.

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product over the EMS.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.
c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as admin. Choose Monitoring >
Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information, choose
Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to changes with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supply from the smart cooling product control unit after the
smart cooling product shuts down over the EMS.

Step 3 Remove the air director and fan baffle plate by referring to Figure 6-13 and
Figure 6-14.

Step 4 Remove the interconnection terminal from the NTC temperature sensor.

Step 5 Use scissors or diagonal pliers to cut off the cable tie securing the NTC
temperature sensor to fan 3, and remove the NTC temperature sensor.

Step 6 Install a new NTC temperature sensor in the original position by performing the
preceding steps in reverse order, and install the air director and fan baffle plate (if
any).

Step 7 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as
an admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control
Information, set Startup/Shutdown control to ON, and click Submit.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 422

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Step 8 Choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Running Info > T/H Sensor
Information, read the value of supply-air temperature sensor, and determine
whether the value is proper.

----End

6.4.3.1.5 Replacing a Low Pressure Sensor

Prerequisites
● Tools: an 11# solid wrench and a 27# solid wrench (or two adjustable
wrenches), Phillips screwdriver, diagonal pliers or scissors, refrigerant retrieval
device (required based on local conditions), nitrogen injection and pressure
preservation tool, vacuumization tool, refrigerant injection tool, cable tie,
sealant
● A low pressure sensor needs to be replaced.
● A spare low pressure sensor of the same model is available and functional.

Context
The low pressure sensor is maintained from the rear.

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product over the EMS.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.
c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as admin. Choose Monitoring >
Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information, choose
Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to changes with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supply from the smart cooling product control unit after the
smart cooling product shuts down over the EMS.

Step 3 Reclaim the refrigerant.

Step 4 Remove the interconnection terminal from the low pressure sensor. Figure 6-11
shows the position of the low pressure sensor.

Step 5 Use diagonal pliers to cut off the cable ties that secure the low pressure sensor
cable, and remove the low pressure sensor cable.

Step 6 Remove the low pressure sensor using adjustable wrenches.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 423

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

1. When replacing the low pressure sensor, use one adjustable wrench to fix the
bottom needle valve of the sensor, and use another adjustable wrench to
rotate the sensor counter-clockwise.
NOTE

If it is difficult to remove the sensor, use a heat gun to heat the threads.
2. After removing the sensor, clear the sealant remaining on the threads.

Step 7 Apply sealant to the threads to be connected. Install a new low pressure sensor in
the original position using an adjustable wrench and connect the cable.

Step 8 Install the interconnection terminal of the low pressure sensor, and secure the low
pressure sensor cable using cable ties.

Step 9 Inject nitrogen and preserve the pressure. After checking that the low pressure
sensor and system do not leak, perform vacuumization and inject refrigerant.

Step 10 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as
an admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control
Information, set Startup/Shutdown control to ON, and click Submit.

Step 11 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Enter, and click
Submit

Step 12 Choose Running Parameters > Diagnostic Mode Parameters, set Comp manual
control to 3000 rpm, and click Submit. Choose Running Info > Compressor
Information and read Suction pressure. Check that the suction pressure of the
compressor is within the proper range. The proper range of the air suction
pressure is 0.7–1.6 MPa.

Step 13 Set Comp manual control to 0 rpm and click Submit.

Step 14 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Exit, and click
Submit.

----End

6.4.3.1.6 Replacing a Fuse

Prerequisites
● Tool: Phillips screwdriver
● A fuse needs to be replaced.
● A spare fuse of the same model is available and functional.

Context
The fuse is maintained from the rear.

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product over the EMS.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as user admin.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 424

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.
c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information,
choose Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to changes with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supply from the smart cooling product control unit after the
smart cooling product shuts down over the EMS.
Step 3 Remove the cover from the electric control box using a Phillips screwdriver, open
the compartment that houses the fuse, as shown in Figure 6-19, and remove the
fuse.

Figure 6-19 Removing a fuse

Step 4 Install a new fuse in the original position by performing the preceding steps in
reverse order.
Step 5 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as
user admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls >
Control Information, set Startup/Shutdown control to ON, and click Submit.
Step 6 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Enter, and click
Submit.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 425

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Step 7 Choose Running Parameters > Diagnostic Mode Parameters, set Indoor fan
manual control to 50%, and click Submit. If the indoor fan works properly for 5
minutes and there is no alarm, the indoor fan is functional. Set Indoor fan
manual control to 0% and click Submit.

----End

6.4.3.1.7 Replacing a Contactor

Prerequisites
● Tools: Phillips screwdriver, small-sized flat-head screwdriver.
● A contactor needs to be replaced.
● A spare contactor of the same model is available and functional.

Context
The contactor is maintained from the rear.

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product over the EMS.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.
c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information,
choose Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to changes with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supply from the smart cooling product control unit after the
smart cooling product shuts down over the EMS.
Step 3 Remove the cover from the electric control box using a Phillips screwdriver,
remove the cable from the contactor using a small-sized flat-head screwdriver,
and remove the contactor, as shown in Figure 6-20.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 426

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-20 Removing a contactor

Step 4 Install a new contactor in the original position by performing the preceding steps
in reverse order, and connect the cable.

Step 5 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as
user admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls >
Control Information, set Startup/Shutdown control to ON, and click Submit.

Step 6 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Enter, and click
Submit.

Step 7 Choose Running Parameters > Diagnostic Mode Parameters, set Elec heater
manual control to ON, and click Submit. If hot air blows out from the air exhaust
vent of the fan after a period of time, the electric heater runs properly. Set Elec
heater manual control to Closed and click Submit. No hot air blows out after a
period of time.

Step 8 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Exit, and click
Submit.

----End

6.4.3.1.8 Replacing an EEV and Coil

Prerequisites
● Tools: flat-head screwdriver, welding tool, refrigerant retrieval device (required
based on local conditions), nitrogen injection and pressure preservation tool,
vacuumization tool, refrigerant injection tool.
● An EEV and its coil need to be replaced.
● A spare EEV and a coil of the same model are available and functional.

Context
● The EEV and coil are maintained from the rear.
● The silk screen of the electronic expansion valve is EEV.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 427

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product over the EMS.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.
c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information,
choose Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to changes with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supply from the smart cooling product control unit after the
smart cooling product shuts down over the EMS.
Step 3 Reclaim the refrigerant.
Step 4 Pry the EEV coil off using a flat-head screwdriver, as shown in Figure 6-21.

Figure 6-21 Removing the EEV and coil

Step 5 Weld the two ends of the EEV using a welding torch, as shown in Figure 6-21.
Then, remove the EEV.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 428

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Step 6 Weld a new EEV, and install the coil for the EEV.

NOTICE

Protect the surrounding components during the welding process.

Step 7 Inject nitrogen and preserve the pressure. After checking that the EEV and system
do not leak, perform vacuumization and inject refrigerant.

Step 8 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as
user admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls >
Control Information, set Startup/Shutdown control to ON, and click Submit.

Step 9 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Enter, and click
Submit.

Step 10 Choose Running Parameters > Diagnostic Mode Parameters, set Comp manual
control to 3000 rpm, and click Submit. Choose Running Info > Compressor
Information and read the air suction pressure and air exhaust pressure. Check
that the air suction/exhaust pressure of the compressor is within the proper range.
Choose Running Info > Electronic Expansion Valve Information. Check that the
EEV suction overheating degree is within the proper range.
NOTE

● The proper range of the suction pressure is 0.7–1.6 MPa, and the pressure ratio
(discharge pressure to suction pressure) is greater than 1.4.
● Table 6-9 lists the proper ranges of the air exhaust pressure.
● The proper range of the air suction superheat degree is 4°C to 15°C.

Table 6-9 Proper ranges of the air exhaust pressure

Outdoor Ambient Temperature Exhaust Pressure Range

Below 15°C 1.5–2.5 MPa

15–35°C 1.5–3.1 MPa

35–45°C 2.5–3.8 MPa

Above 45°C 3.1–4.0 MPa

Step 11 Set Comp manual control to 0 rpm and click Submit.

Step 12 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Exit, and click
Submit.

Step 13 Clear up the EEV total runtime.

● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 429

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > Perf Maint, and clear up the EEV total
runtime.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Performance
Maintenance Control, and clear up the EEV total runtime.

----End

6.4.3.2 Replacing Outdoor Unit Components

CAUTION

Do not maintain or replace outdoor units during thunderstorms. Otherwise, your

personal safety will be in danger.

NOTICE

● You are not advised to maintain or replace outdoor units in rainy days. If
unavoidable, take protective measures to prevent water from entering the
outdoor unit.
● When opening the electric control box cover, clear water from the cover.

The following figures show the components of the NetCol500-A018, NetCol500-

A020 and NetCol500-A021.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 430

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-22 NetCol500-A018 components

(1) Outdoor fan blade (2) Safety valve (3) High pressure switch

(4) Low pressure switch (5) High pressure sensor (6) Compressor

(7) Oil heating belt

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 431

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-23 NetCol500-A020 components

(1) Outdoor fan (2) Handle (3) Control board

(4) Suction temperature sensor (5) High pressure switch (6) Low pressure switch

(7) High pressure sensor (8) Filter dryer (9) Safety valve

(10) Discharge temperature (11) Compressor (12) Oil heating belt

sensor

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 432

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-24 NetCol500-A021 components

(1) Outdoor fan blade (2) Freon pump (3) Oil heating belt

(4) Compressor (5) Low pressure switch (6) High pressure sensor

(7) High pressure switch

Figure 6-25 NetCol500-A020 components (top view)

(1) Inductor (2) Module board (3) Ambient temperature

sensor

(4) Condensate temperature (5) Control board (6) Capacitor

sensor

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 433

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

(7) Transformer

Figure 6-26 NetCol500-A018 components (top view)

(1) Circuit breaker (2) Surge protection board (3) Outdoor unit control board
(SPD)

(4) PFC board (5) Large capacitor (6) Compressor drive (IPM)
board

(7) Transformer

Figure 6-27 NetCol500-A021 components (top view)

(1) Inductor (2) High pressure container (3) Control board

(4) Capacitor (5) Module board

6.4.3.2.1 Replacing an Outdoor Fan

Prerequisites
● An outdoor fan needs to be replaced.
● A spare outdoor fan of the same model is available and functional.

Context
● Tools: Phillips screwdriver, small wrench, cable tie, diagonal pliers.
● Preparation: Power off the outdoor unit.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 434

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product over the EMS.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.
c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information,
choose Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to changes with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supplies from the smart cooling product control unit and
the outdoor unit after the smart cooling product shuts down over the EMS.
Step 3 Remove the top cover, front panel, and left front panel using a Phillips screwdriver,
as shown in Figure 6-28, Figure 6-29, or Figure 6-30.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 435

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-28 Removing panels (for NetCol500-A018)

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 436

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-29 Removing panels (for NetCol500-A020)

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 437

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-30 Removing panels (for NetCol500-A021)

Step 4 Cut the cable ties on the fan cable using diagonal pliers and take out the outdoor
fan cable from the electric control box.
Step 5 Remove the screw from the fan using a small wrench, and remove the outdoor fan
blades, as shown in Figure 6-31, Figure 6-32, or Figure 6-33.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 438

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-31 Removing the outdoor fan blades (for NetCol500-A018)

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 439

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-32 Removing the outdoor fan blades (for NetCol500-A020)

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 440

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-33 Removing the outdoor fan blades (for NetCol500-A021)

Step 6 If the motor of the outdoor fan needs to be replaced, use a socket wrench to
remove the four screws that secure the motor, and remove the motor.
Step 7 Install the new outdoor fan by performing the preceding steps in reverse order,
and connect the fan cable to the corresponding position in the electric control box.
Step 8 Secure the outdoor fan cable using cable ties.
Step 9 Install the top cover, front panel, and left front panel.
Step 10 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as
user admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls >
Control Information, set Startup/Shutdown control to ON, and click Submit.
Step 11 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Enter, and click
Submit.
Step 12 Choose Running Parameters > Diagnostic Mode Parameters, set Outdoor fan
output man ctrl to 50%, and click Submit. If the outdoor fan works properly and

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 441

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

there is no alarm, the outdoor fan is functional. Set Outdoor fan manual control
to 0% and click Submit.
Step 13 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Exit, and click
Submit.
Step 14 Clear up the outdoor fan total runtime.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.
c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > Perf Maint, and clear up the outdoor fan total
runtime.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Performance
Maintenance Control, and clear up the outdoor fan total runtime.

----End

6.4.3.2.2 Replacing a Compressor

Prerequisites
● Tools: diagonal pliers or scissors, Phillips screwdriver, 8 mm and 13 mm socket
wrenches, welding tool, refrigerant retrieval device (required based on local
conditions), nitrogen injection and pressure preservation tool, vacuumization
tool, refrigerant injection tool, protective gloves.
● A compressor needs to be replaced.
● A spare compressor of the same model is available and functional.

Context
● Before replacing the compressor, disconnect the power supply and discharge
refrigerant from the system.
● After the replacement, perform the leakage test with nitrogen, then
vacuumize again and charge refrigerant.
● Reclaim or dispose of the refrigerant in accordance with the local laws and
regulations.
● Remove the left front panel and left rear panel from the outdoor unit when
replacing the compressor.

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product over the EMS.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 442

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information,
choose Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to changes with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supplies from the smart cooling product control unit and
the outdoor unit after the smart cooling product shuts down over the EMS.
Step 3 Reclaim all the refrigerant from the system using a refrigerant retrieval device to
ensure that there is no pressure inside the system.
NOTE

Discharge the refrigerant if the local laws and regulations allow.

Step 4 Remove the left front panel and right rear panel of the outdoor unit, and remove
the thermal insulation cover to expose the compressor completely.
Step 5 Remove the nut from the connection box on top of the compressor using an 8 mm
socket wrench, and disconnect the cable.
Step 6 Remove the inductor cable and oil heating belt from the compressor.
Step 7 Weld from the suction and discharge pipe welding points shown in Figure 6-34,
Figure 6-35, or Figure 6-36. Remove the discharge pipe that connects the
compressor to the oil separator, and then remove the suction pipe.

NOTICE

To avoid burning the internal components, other pipes, thermal insulation foam,
power cables, and labels, take protective measures, such as spreading wet cloth,
around the welding position.

Step 8 Remove the three bolts from the compressor base using a 13 mm socket wrench,
and remove the compressor.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 443

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-34 Position of the compressor (for NetCol500-A018)

(1) Welding point for the (2) Compressor (3) Bolts on the compressor
suction pipe base

(4) Oil separator (5) Welding point for the

discharge pipe

Figure 6-35 Position of the compressor (for NetCol500-A020)

(1) Welding point for the (2) Welding point for the (3) Oil separator
suction pipe discharge pipe

(4) Compressor (5) Bolts on the compressor

base

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 444

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-36 Position of the compressor (for NetCol500-A021)

(1) Oil separator (2) Bolts on the compressor (3) Compressor

base

(4) Welding point for the (5) Welding point for the
discharge pipe suction pipe

Step 9 Remove the rubber plugs from the suction and discharge pipes of the new
compressor, and use a 13 mm socket wrench to tighten the bolts on the base to
secure the new compressor bound with an oil heating belt to the base.
Step 10 Weld the suction and discharge pipes again using a welding tool and reconnect
the compressor cable and ground cable.

NOTICE

The connection box cover is marked U, V, and W. Connect cables according to the
cable sequence and color (red for U, black for V, and blue for W).

Step 11 Reinstall the oil heating belt, secure it using cable ties, and put a thermal
insulation cover on the compressor.
Step 12 Perform a leakage test with nitrogen again. After checking that the smart cooling
product does not leak, vacuumize the smart cooling product and charge
refrigerant.
Step 13 Reinstall the left front panel and right rear panel.
Step 14 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as
user admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls >
Control Information, set Startup/Shutdown control to ON, and click Submit.
Step 15 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Enter, and click
Submit.
Step 16 Choose Running Parameters > Diagnostic Mode Parameters, set Comp manual
control to 3000 rpm, and click Submit. Choose Running Info > Compressor

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 445

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Information and read the air suction pressure and air exhaust pressure. Check
that the air suction/exhaust pressure of the compressor is within the proper range.
Choose Running Info > Electronic Expansion Valve Information. Check that the
EEV suction overheating degree is within the proper range.
NOTE

● The proper range of the suction pressure is 0.7–1.6 MPa, and the pressure ratio
(discharge pressure to suction pressure) is greater than 1.4.
● Table 6-10 lists the proper ranges of the air exhaust pressure.
● The proper range of the air suction superheat degree is 4°C to 15°C.

Table 6-10 Proper ranges of the air exhaust pressure

Outdoor Ambient Temperature Exhaust Pressure Range

Below 15°C 1.5–2.5 MPa

15–35°C 1.5–3.1 MPa

35–45°C 2.5–3.8 MPa

Above 45°C 3.1–4.0 MPa

Step 17 Set Comp manual control to 0 rpm and click Submit.

Step 18 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Exit, and click
Submit.

Step 19 Clear up the compressor total runtime.

● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.
c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > Perf Maint, and clear up the compressor total
runtime.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Performance
Maintenance Control, and clear up the compressor total runtime.

----End

6.4.3.2.3 Replacing a Filter Dryer

Prerequisites
● A filter dryer needs to be replaced.
● A spare filter dryer of the same model is available and functional.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 446

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Context
● Tools: welding tool, refrigerant retrieval device (required based on local
conditions), nitrogen injection and pressure preservation tool, vacuumization
tool, refrigerant injection tool, Phillips screwdriver, protective gloves.
● Preparation: Power off the outdoor unit and empty system of the refrigerant.

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product over the EMS.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as user admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.
c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as user admin. Choose
Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information,
choose Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to changes with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supplies from the smart cooling product control unit and
the outdoor unit after the smart cooling product shuts down over the EMS.
Step 3 Reclaim all the refrigerant from the system using a refrigerant retrieval device to
ensure that there is no pressure inside the system.
NOTE

Discharge the refrigerant if the local laws and regulations allow.

Step 4 Loosen the screws using a Phillips screwdriver and remove the left front panel and
left rear panel from the outdoor unit to expose the filter dryer completely.
Step 5 Cut off the cable ties for the filter dryer using diagonal pliers, weld from the
welding point shown in Figure 6-37, Figure 6-38, or Figure 6-39 using a welding
tool, and remove the filter dryer.

NOTICE

To avoid burning the internal components, other pipes, thermal insulation foam,
power cables, and labels, take protective measures, such as spreading wet cloth,
around the welding position.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 447

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-37 Position of the filter dryer (for NetCol500-A018)

(1) Filter dryer (2) Welding point

Figure 6-38 Position of the filter dryer (for NetCol500-A020)

(1) Filter dryer (2) Welding point

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 448

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-39 Position of the filter dryer (for NetCol500-A021)

(1) Filter dryer (2) Welding point

Step 6 Weld the new filter dryer to the pipe.

Step 7 Secure the new filter dryer using cable ties.

Step 8 Perform a leakage test with nitrogen again. After checking that the smart cooling
product does not leak, vacuumize the smart cooling product and charge
refrigerant.

Step 9 Reinstall the left front panel and left rear panel.

Step 10 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as
user admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls >
Control Information, set Startup/Shutdown control to ON, and click Submit.

Step 11 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Enter, and click
Submit.

Step 12 Choose Running Parameters > Diagnostic Mode Parameters, set Comp manual
control to 3000 rpm, and click Submit. Choose Running Info > Compressor
Information and read the air suction pressure and air exhaust pressure. Check
that the air suction/exhaust pressure of the compressor is within the proper range.
Choose Running Info > Electronic Expansion Valve Information. Check that the
EEV suction overheating degree is within the proper range.
NOTE

● The proper range of the suction pressure is 0.7–1.6 MPa, and the pressure ratio
(discharge pressure to suction pressure) is greater than 1.4.
● For details about the proper ranges of the air exhaust pressure, see 6.4.3.1.8 Replacing
an EEV and Coil.
● The proper range of the air suction superheat degree is 4°C to 15°C.

Step 13 Set Comp manual control to 0 rpm and click Submit.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 449

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Step 14 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Exit, and click
Submit.

----End

6.4.3.2.4 Replacing a High Pressure Sensor

Prerequisites
● A high pressure sensor needs to be replaced.
● A spare high pressure sensor of the same model is available and functional.

Context
● Tools: Phillips screwdriver, refrigerant retrieval device (required based on local
conditions), nitrogen injection and pressure preservation tool, vacuumization
tool, refrigerant injection tool, adjustable wrench, sealant.
● Preparation: Power off the outdoor unit.
● Figure 6-22, Figure 6-23, or Figure 6-24 shows the position of the high
pressure sensor.

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product over the EMS.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.
c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as admin. Choose Monitoring >
Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information, choose
Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to changes with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supplies from the smart cooling product control unit and
the outdoor unit after the smart cooling product shuts down over the EMS.
Step 3 Open the top cover and right rear panel.
Step 4 Cut the cable ties on the high pressure sensor cable using diagonal pliers and take
out the high pressure sensor cable from the electric control box.
Step 5 Reclaim all the refrigerant from the system using a refrigerant retrieval device to
ensure that there is no pressure inside the system.
NOTE

Discharge the refrigerant if the local laws and regulations allow.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 450

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Step 6 Remove the high pressure sensor using an adjustable wrench.

Step 7 Apply sealant to the threads of the new high pressure sensor. Install a new high
pressure sensor in the original position using an adjustable wrench and connect
the cable.

Step 8 Secure the high pressure sensor cable using cable ties.

Step 9 Perform a leakage test with nitrogen again. After checking that the smart cooling
product does not leak, vacuumize the smart cooling product and charge
refrigerant.

Step 10 Reinstall the right rear panel and top cover.

Step 11 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as
an admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control
Information, set Startup/Shutdown control to ON, and click Submit.

Step 12 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Enter, and click
Submit.

Step 13 Choose Running Parameters > Diagnostic Mode Parameters, set Comp manual
control to 3000 rpm, and click Submit. Choose Running Info > Compressor
Information and read the air suction pressure and air exhaust pressure. Check
that the air suction/exhaust pressure of the compressor is within the proper range.
Choose Running Info > Electronic Expansion Valve Information. Check that the
EEV suction overheating degree is within the proper range.
NOTE

● The proper range of the air suction pressure is 0.7–1.6 MPa, and the pressure ratio (air
exhaust pressure to air suction pressure) is greater than 1.4.
● For details about the proper ranges of the air exhaust pressure, see 6.4.3.1.8 Replacing
an EEV and Coil.
● The proper range of the air suction superheat degree is 4°C to 15°C.

Step 14 Set Comp manual control to 0 rpm and click Submit.

Step 15 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Exit, and click
Submit.

----End

6.4.3.2.5 Replacing a Pneumatic Switch

Prerequisites
● The pneumatic switch needs to be replaced.
● A spare pneumatic switch of the same model is available and functional.

Context
● This section describes how to replace a high pressure switch or a low pressure
switch at the outdoor side. Identify and replace the switch that is damaged.
The positions of the high pressure and low pressure switches are shown in
Figure 6-22, Figure 6-23, or Figure 6-24.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 451

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

● Tools: Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver, socket wrench, diagonal

pliers, welding tool, refrigerant retrieval device (required based on local
conditions), nitrogen injection and pressure preservation tool, vacuumization
tool, refrigerant injection tool.
● Preparation: Power off the outdoor unit and retrieve the refrigerant in the
system.

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product over the EMS.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.
c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as admin. Choose Monitoring >
Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information, choose
Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to changes with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supplies from the smart cooling product control unit and
the outdoor unit after the smart cooling product shuts down over the EMS.

Step 3 Reclaim all the refrigerant from the system using a refrigerant retrieval device to
ensure that there is no pressure inside the system.
NOTE

Discharge the refrigerant if the local laws and regulations allow.

Step 4 Open the top cover and right rear panel.

Step 5 Cut the cable ties on the pneumatic switch cable using diagonal pliers and take
out the pneumatic switch cable from the electric control box.

Step 6 Remove the pneumatic switch using a welding torch.

NOTICE

To avoid burning the internal components, other pipes, thermal insulation foam,
power cables, and labels, take protective measures, such as spreading wet cloth,
around the welding position.

Step 7 Weld the new pneumatic switch using a welding torch and connect cables.

Step 8 Secure the pneumatic switch cable using cable ties.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 452

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Step 9 Perform a leakage test with nitrogen again. After checking that the smart cooling
product does not leak, vacuumize the smart cooling product and charge
refrigerant.

Step 10 Reinstall the right rear panel and top cover.

Step 11 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as
an admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control
Information, set Startup/Shutdown control to ON, and click Submit.

Step 12 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Enter, and click
Submit.

Step 13 Choose Running Parameters > Diagnostic Mode Parameters, set Comp manual
control to 3000 rpm, and click Submit. Choose Running Info > Compressor
Information and read the air suction pressure and air exhaust pressure. Check
that the air suction/exhaust pressure of the compressor is within the proper range.
Choose Running Info > Electronic Expansion Valve Information. Check that the
EEV suction overheating degree is within the proper range.
NOTE

● The proper range of the air suction pressure is 0.7–1.6 MPa, and the pressure ratio (air
exhaust pressure to air suction pressure) is greater than 1.4.
● For details about the proper ranges of the air exhaust pressure, see 6.4.3.1.8 Replacing
an EEV and Coil.
● The proper range of the air suction superheat degree is 4°C to 15°C.

Step 14 Set Comp manual control to 0 rpm and click Submit.

Step 15 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Exit, and click
Submit.

----End

6.4.3.2.6 Replacing a Safety Valve

Prerequisites
● A safety valve needs to be replaced.
● A spare safety valve of the same model is available and functional.

Context
● Tools: Phillips screwdriver, torque wrench, 557 glue, refrigerant retrieval device
(required based on local conditions), nitrogen injection and pressure
preservation tool, vacuumization tool, refrigerant injection tool.
● Preparation: Power off the outdoor unit and empty the system of refrigerant.
● Figure 6-22 or Figure 6-23 shows the position of the safety valve.

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product over the EMS.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as admin.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 453

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.
c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.
● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as admin. Choose Monitoring >
Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information, choose
Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to changes with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supplies from the smart cooling product control unit and
the outdoor unit after the smart cooling product shuts down over the EMS.

Step 3 Reclaim all the refrigerant from the system using a refrigerant retrieval device to
ensure that there is no pressure inside the system.
NOTE

Discharge the refrigerant if the local laws and regulations allow.

Step 4 Remove the top cover, front panel, and left front panel.

Step 5 Remove the safety valve using a torque wrench.

Figure 6-40 Removing the safety valve

Step 6 Apply 557 glue to the threads of the new safety valve.

Step 7 Tighten the safety valve to a torque of 60 N·m using a torque wrench.

Step 8 Perform a leakage test with nitrogen again. After checking that the smart cooling
product does not leak, vacuumize the smart cooling product and charge
refrigerant.

Step 9 Reinstall the front panel, left front panel, and top cover.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 454

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Step 10 After powering on the smart cooling product, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as
an admin, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control
Information, set Startup/Shutdown control to ON, and click Submit.

Step 11 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Enter, and click
Submit.

Step 12 Choose Running Parameters > Diagnostic Mode Parameters, set Comp manual
control to 3000 rpm, and click Submit. Choose Running Info > Compressor
Information and read the air suction pressure and air exhaust pressure. Check
that the air suction/exhaust pressure of the compressor is within the proper range.
Choose Running Info > Electronic Expansion Valve Information. Check that the
EEV suction overheating degree is within the proper range.
NOTE

● The proper range of the air suction pressure is 0.7–1.6 MPa, and the pressure ratio (air
exhaust pressure to air suction pressure) is greater than 1.4.
● For details about the proper ranges of the air exhaust pressure, see 6.4.3.1.8 Replacing
an EEV and Coil.
● The proper range of the air suction superheat degree is 4°C to 15°C.

Step 13 Set Comp manual control to 0 rpm and click Submit.

Step 14 Choose Controls > Control Information, set Diagnostic mode to Exit, and click
Submit.

----End

6.4.3.2.7 Replacing a Switch for the Outdoor Unit

Prerequisites
● This section applies only to the NetCol500-A020 outdoor unit.
● A switch for the outdoor unit needs to be replaced.
● A spare outdoor unit switch of the same model is available and functional.

Context
● Tools: flat-head screwdriver, Phillips screwdriver.
● Preparation: Power off the outdoor unit.

Procedure
Step 1 Shut down the smart cooling product over the EMS.
● Method 1: Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as admin.
a. Choose Home.
b. Tap the cabinet that houses the smart cooling product in the micro-
module view.
c. Tap the smart cooling product to be set in the cabinet layout diagram.
d. Choose Real-time Data > OFF.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 455

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

● Method 2: Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as admin. Choose Monitoring >

Cooling > NetCol5000-A1 > Controls > Control Information, choose
Startup/Shutdown control > OFF, and then click Submit.
NOTE

1 in NetCol5000-A1 is variable and subject to changes with the smart cooling product
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.

Step 2 Disconnect the power supplies from the smart cooling product control unit and
the outdoor unit after the smart cooling product shuts down over the EMS.

Step 3 Open the side panel using a Phillips screwdriver.

Figure 6-41 Opening the side panel

(1) Switch for the outdoor unit

Step 4 Remove the cables from the switch using a flat-head screwdriver.

Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the card slot that secures the switch.

Step 6 Remove the switch.

Step 7 Install a new switch in the original position by performing the preceding steps in
reverse order, and install a handle.

Step 8 Power on the smart cooling product, turn on the outdoor unit switch. Remove the
top cover and left front panel, as shown in Figure 6-29. If the running light on the
control board (as shown in Figure 6-25) is turned on, the switch for outdoor unit
runs properly.

Step 9 Install the top cover and left front panel.

----End

6.4.4 Replacing Management System Components

After replacing a component of the management system, set parameters for the
new component to ensure normal communication.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 456

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

6.4.4.1 Replacing an ECC800-Pro Main Control Module

Prerequisites

NOTICE

● The ECC800-Pro main control module is hot-swappable.

● Before disconnecting cables from the ECC800-Pro main control module, label
the cables based on the corresponding ports.

● Tools: ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves, Phillips screwdriver, labels, marker
● Materials: A spare undamaged and undeformed ECC800-Pro main control
module of the same model is available.

Procedure
Step 1 Use the Back Up Current Settings function to record the ECC800-Pro
configuration information or manually record the information.

Path: Maintenance > Configuration File > Back Up Current Settings

NOTE

If the main control module is damaged, login may fail and backup cannot be performed.

Step 2 Label each cable and antenna based on the corresponding ports on the ECC800-
Pro main control module.

Step 3 Remove the cables and antenna from the ECC800-Pro main control module.

Step 4 Loosen the captive screws on both sides of the ECC800-Pro main control module
and pull the handles on both sides of the module to remove the module.

Figure 6-42 Removing an ECC800-Pro main control module

Step 5 (Optional) Remove the Micro-SD card and SIM card from the corresponding slots
of the ECC800-Pro main control module.

Step 6 (Optional) Install the removed Micro-SD and SIM card in the corresponding slot of
the new ECC800-Pro main control module.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 457

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-43 Installing the Micro SD and SIM card

Step 7 Install the spare ECC800-Pro main control module in the ECC800-Pro subrack and
tighten the screws on both sides of the ECC800-Pro main control module.

Step 8 Connect the communications cables and antennas to the ECC800-Pro main control
module.

Step 9 Choose Maintenance > Configuration File and import the backup configuration
file, or set parameters for the devices that connect to the ECC800-Pro to ensure
normal communication.

----End

6.4.4.2 Replacing an ECC800-Pro PSU

Prerequisites

DANGER

Do not touch the terminals in the rear of a removed PSU to avoid electric shocks.

● Tool: insulation gloves

● Materials: a reserved undamaged and undeformed PSU of the appropriate
model.

Context
The PSU is hot-swappable.

Procedure
Step 1 Push the locking latch in the upper right corner of the PSU panel leftwards.

Step 2 Pull out the handle of the PSU to remove the PSU from the subrack.

Step 3 Gently push the reserved PSU into the subrack along guide rails, and push the
locking latch rightwards to secure the handle.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 458

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-44 Replacing a PSU

----End

6.4.4.3 Replacing an ECC800-Pro Antenna

Prerequisites
● Tools: ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves
● Materials: A spare ECC800-Pro antenna of the same model is available and
functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the 4G antenna.

Step 2 Install the spare 4G antenna cable in the original position and connect it to the
ECC800-Pro.

Figure 6-45 Replacing an antenna

----End

6.4.4.4 Replacing a SIM Card and MicroSD Card

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 459

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Prerequisites
● Tools: ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves
● Materials: A spare SIM card of the same model is available and functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Record the positions of the signal cables connected to the panel of the ECC800-
Pro main control module, and then disconnect the signal cables.
Step 2 Loosen the screws on both sides of the panel of the ECC800-Pro main control
module.
Step 3 Pull the handles on both sides of the panel of the ECC800-Pro main control
module, and remove the main control module.

Figure 6-46 Removing the ECC800-Pro main control module

Step 4 Remove the SIM card from the card slot.

Figure 6-47 Removing a SIM card

Step 5 Insert the new SIM card into the card slot.

Figure 6-48 Installing a SIM card

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 460

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Step 6 Insert the ECC800-Pro main control module into the slot.
Step 7 Tighten the screws on both sides of the panel of the ECC800-Pro main control
module.
Step 8 Connect the signal cables to the panel of the new ECC800-Pro main control
module based on the recorded information.

----End

6.4.4.5 Replacing a Smart ETH Gateway

Prerequisites
● Tools: ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves, Phillips screwdriver, step ladder, labels,
marker
● Material: A spare smart ETH gateway of the same model is available and
functional.

Context
A smart ETH gateway can be installed in the following two positions based on the
project conditions:
● If M-shaped cable troughs are deployed for the module, install the smart ETH
gateway on the M-shaped cable trough on the top of the Converged Cabinet.

NOTICE

● If two smart ETH gateways are configured, install them in positions shown
in Figure 6-49.
● If three smart ETH gateways are configured, install two of them in
positions shown in Figure 6-49, and install the remaining one on the M-
shaped cable trough of an adjacent cabinet.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 461

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-49 Position 1 for installing a smart ETH gateway

(1) Smart ETH gateway

● If M-shaped cable troughs are not deployed for the module, install the smart
ETH gateway on the top of the Converged Cabinet, as shown in Figure 6-50.

Figure 6-50 Position 2 for installing a smart ETH gateway

(1) Smart ETH gateway

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 462

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Procedure
Step 1 Label each cable based on the corresponding ports on the smart ETH gateway.

Step 2 Disconnect cables from the smart ETH gateway.

Step 3 Remove the faulty smart ETH gateway from the guide rail, as shown in Figure
6-51.

Figure 6-51 Removing the smart ETH gateway

Step 4 Install a new smart ETH gateway in the original position and connect the cables.

Step 5 Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800-Pro > Controls and delete the device
failing in communication.

Step 6 Check whether the status indicator of the smart ETH gateway is blinking slowly. If
yes, the smart ETH gateway is functional.

Step 7 Choose Home > Plan View and add a new smart ETH gateway in the appropriate
position.

----End

6.4.4.6 Replacing an ETH Converter

Prerequisites
A spare ETH converter of the same model is available and functional.

Impact on the System

The device at the rear of the ETH converter is disconnected.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 463

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Preparations
Tools: ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves, step ladder, label, marker
Material: ETH converter
Documents: none
Skill requirement: ELV engineer

Procedure
Step 1 Label each cable based on the corresponding ports on the ETH converter.
Step 2 Disconnect cables from the ETH converter.
Step 3 Remove the faulty ETH converter.
Step 4 Install the spare ETH converter in the original position and connect the cables.

----End

6.4.4.7 Replacing a Camera

Prerequisites
● Recommended tools and materials: inner hexagon screwdriver (delivered with
the product package), step ladder (2 m)
● A camera needs to be replaced.
● A spare camera of the same model is available and functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the front cover of the camera in the direction shown in Figure 6-52, and
remove the screws on the front cover.

Figure 6-52 Removing the front cover

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 464

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Step 2 Remove the inner cover, as shown in Figure 6-53.

Figure 6-53 Removing the inner cover

NOTE

In the scenario with an SD card, remove the SD card and install it to a new camera.

Step 3 Remove the screws securing the camera base from the camera mounting plate, as
shown in Figure 6-54.

Figure 6-54 Removing the camera base

Step 4 Disconnect the camera network cable and remove the dome camera.
Step 5 Install a new camera, reconnect the network cable, and secure the network
camera to the base using screws.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 465

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Step 6 Commission the camera by referring to the ECC800-Pro user manual of the
appropriate version.

Step 7 Check whether the new camera works properly and adjust the camera angle. If
video images are properly displayed on the video screen of the management
system client, the new camera works properly.

----End

6.4.4.8 Replacing an IVS1800

Prerequisites
● Recommended tool: Phillips screwdriver
● An IVS1800 needs to be replaced.
● A spare IVS1800 of the same model is available and functional.

Context

NOTICE

Videos cannot be recorded during the replacement of the IVS1800.

DANGER

Do not operate with power on. Take appropriate insulation measures.

Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the power switch of the IVS1800, disconnect the power supply of the
IVS1800, remove the cables from the IVS1800, label the cables, and record the
original connection positions of the cables.

NOTICE

After removing cables, wrap exposed terminals with insulation tape and do not
block cable labels. If cable labels are blocked, cables may be connected incorrectly.

Step 2 Remove the faulty IVS1800 from the cabinet.

Step 3 Carry the device to the cabinet. Ensure that the mounting ears at both sides of the
device are tightly attached to the mounting bars in front of the cabinet. Use one
hand to hold the device. Use the other hand to thread M6 screws through the
slotted holes on the mounting ears. Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the M6
screws on the mounting ears. Each mounting ear uses two M6 screws.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 466

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-55 Installing a device

Step 4 Reconnect the cables to the new IVS1800.

Step 5 Turn on the power switch of the IVS1800.
Step 6 Commissioning the IVS1800. If the video recording function works properly after
commissioning, the IVS1800 is functional.

----End

6.4.4.9 Replacing a Hard Disk for the IVS1800

Prerequisites
● A hard disk needs to be replaced.
● Data in the hard disk has been backed up.
● A spare hard disk of the same model is available and functional.
● Before replacing a faulty disk, ensure that the power switch on the rear panel
is off and disconnect the power cable to power off the device.

Context
Recommended tools and materials: Phillips screwdriver, ESD wrist strap (or ESD
gloves).

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap (or ESD gloves) and insert the ground terminal into the
ESD jack in the cabinet.
Step 2 Remove the faulty hard disk.
1. Use a PH2 screwdriver to remove the two black screws on the rear of the
chassis cover, and take off the chassis cover.

Figure 6-56 Removing the chassis cover

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 467

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

2. Remove two black screws on each side of the chassis and the silvery white
one on top of the hard disk tray, raise the hard disk tray by 45 degrees, and
take out the upper and then lower layers of hard disk tray.

Figure 6-57 Removing the hard disk tray

Step 3 Install a new hard disk.

1. Place the hard disk with ports facing upwards and align the screw holes on
the hard disk tray with the hard disk and fasten the screws. Before the
installation, ensure that the fastener of the hard disk tray is on a different
side from the hard disk port, as shown in the lower left figure.

Figure 6-58 Installing hard disks

2. Insert the hard disk tray back at 45 degrees with the opening of its locking
buckle facing downwards, hold the screw in the red-framed part to lower the
hard disk tray until it is level, and fasten the black screws on the left and right
sides and the white screw on the top.

Figure 6-59 Fastening the screw on the panel and the screws on the hard disk
tray

3. Connect data and power cables to hard disks. Connect hard disk cable ports
P0–P3 to hard disks on the lower-layer hard disk tray and ports P4–P7 to hard
disks on the upper-layer.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 468

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-60 Connecting data and power cables to hard disks

4. Close the chassis cover, and use a PH2 screwdriver to fasten the rear screws.

Figure 6-61 Closing the chassis cover

Step 4 Observe the hard disk indicator to check whether the hard disk works properly.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
If the hard disk works abnormally, contact Huawei technical support.

6.4.4.10 Replacing an Aisle T/H Sensor (02312PBL)

Prerequisites
● Recommended tools: Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver
● A T/H sensor needs to be replaced.
● A spare T/H sensor of the same model is available and functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the front door of the cabinet.

Step 2 Remove the cables from the T/H sensor.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 469

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

NOTICE

After removing cables, wrap exposed terminals with insulation tape and do not
block cable labels. If cable labels are blocked, cables may be connected incorrectly
later.

Step 3 Remove the T/H sensor from its base, as shown in Figure 6-62.

NOTICE

Before removing a T/H sensor, remember the DIP switch setting on it. When you
install a new T/H sensor, you need to set the same DIP switch setting for the new
one.

Figure 6-62 Removing a T/H sensor

Step 4 Install the new T/H sensor on its base.

Step 5 Reconnect the cables to the T/H sensor.

Step 6 Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Controls and delete the device failing
in communication.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 470

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Step 7 Choose Monitoring > Aisle > T/H Sensor Group and check whether the T/H
sensor works properly. If yes, the T/H sensor is functional.

Step 8 Choose Home > Plan View and add a new T/H sensor in the appropriate position.

----End

6.4.4.11 Replacing a Remote T/H Sensor (33010516)

Prerequisites
● A T/H sensor needs to be replaced.
● A spare T/H sensor of the same model is available and functional.

Context
A T/H sensor can be maintained only from the rear door.

Procedure
Step 1 Tap Shutdown on the controller home screen.

NOTICE

Exercise caution because the device is still energized after it is shut down on the
controller home screen.

Step 2 Remove the cables from the T/H sensor.

NOTICE

After removing cables, wrap exposed terminals with insulation tape and do not
block cable labels. If cable labels are blocked, cables may be connected incorrectly
later.

Step 3 Remove the faulty T/H sensor.

Step 4 Attach the new T/H sensor to an appropriate position on the IT cabinet door
frame based on site requirements.

Step 5 Reinstall the cable removed from the T/H sensor.

NOTE

Before removing a T/H sensor, remember the DIP switch setting on it. When you install a
new T/H sensor, you need to set the same DIP switch setting for the new one.

----End

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 471

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

6.4.4.12 Replacing a Temperature Sensor

Prerequisites
● Recommended tools and materials: diagonal pliers, insulation tape, cable tie,
step ladder (2 m)
● A temperature sensor needs to be replaced.
● Spare temperature sensors of the same model are available and functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Cut the cable ties on the temperature sensor using diagonal pliers, and remove
the network cable from the temperature sensor.

Figure 6-63 Removing a temperature sensor

Step 2 Install the spare temperature sensor, bind it to the original position using cable
ties, and connect cables to it.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 472

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

NOTICE

● When installing temperature sensors, bind the cables behind the sensors to the
cable bridge, keeping them 20 mm away from the sensor probes.
● Temperature sensors must not be in touch with metal parts or cabinets.
● Keep the temperature sensors facing the inside of the cabinets to ensure
accurate measurement of cabinet interior temperatures.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Check whether the new temperature sensor works properly. If its status is
displayed on the WebUI of the ECC800-Pro, the new temperature sensor works
properly.

6.4.4.13 Replacing a Smoke Sensor

Prerequisites
● Recommended tools and materials: Phillips screwdriver, insulation tape, step
ladder (2 m)
● A smoke detector needs to be replaced.
● A spare smoke detector of the same model is available and functional.

Context
The smoke detector is installed in the Converged Cabinet, as shown by (1) in
Figure 6-64.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 473

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-64 Sensor positions

(1) Smoke detector

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the smoke detector from the base.

Step 2 Remove the cables from the smoke detector and apply insulation measures such
as wrapping the cables with insulation tape to avoid hazards.

Step 3 Install the new smoke detector and reconnect the cables to the new smoke
detector.

Step 4 Install the smoke detector on the base.

Step 5 Blow smoke towards the smoke detector using a smoke pistol until the smoke
detector indicator changes from blinking once every 6s to steady on. If a smoke
detector fire alarm is triggered, the smoke detector is functional.

----End

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 474

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

6.4.4.14 Replacing a WLDS900 Water Sensor and Water Detection Rope

Prerequisites
● Recommended tools and materials: Phillips screwdriver, crimping tool
● A water sensor needs to be replaced.
● A spare water sensor of the same model is available and functional.

Context
The water detector is installed in the Converged Cabinet and bound to the rack
rail using cable ties. The binding position is 5 U away from the cabinet bottom.

Figure 6-65 Sensor positions

(1) Smoke detector

A water sensor consists of a water detection rope, water detector, and conversion
cable. The water detection rope is laid out on the floor and connected to the
water detector placed near the collector by the conversion cable.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 475

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-66 Water sensor components

(1) Water detector (2) Conversion cable end A, (3) Conversion cable
connected to the water detector

(4) Conversion cable end B, (5) Water detection cable end A, (6) Water detection cable
connected to water the connected to the conversion cable
detection cable

Procedure
Step 1 Replace the water detector.
1. Remove the conversion cable at the conversion port for the water detector
and conversion cable.
2. Remove the cover from the water detector.

Figure 6-67 Removing the cover from the water detector

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 476

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

3. Remove the bottom plate of the water detector from the Converged Cabinet.

Figure 6-68 Removing the bottom plate of the water detector

4. Install a new water detector in the Converged Cabinet by referring to the

preceding steps.
5. Connect the new water detector to the conversion cable.

Figure 6-69 Connecting a conversion cable to a water detector

Step 2 Replace a water detection cable.

1. Remove the faulty water detection cable from the port.
2. Install a new water detection cable.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 477

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-70 Connecting a new water detection cable

(1) Conversion cable end B, connected to the (2) Water detection cable end A, connected to
water detection cable the conversion cable

NOTE

The water detection cable and conversion cable are interconnected through the male and
female connectors.

Step 3 Connect the network cable between the water detector and ECC800-Pro, immerse
the water detection rope in water, and check whether an alarm is generated. If an
alarm is generated, the component is functional.

----End

6.4.4.15 Replacing an Electrode Water Sensor

Prerequisites
● Recommended tools and materials: Phillips screwdriver, crimping tool
● A water sensor needs to be replaced.
● A spare water sensor is available.

Procedure
Step 1 Disconnect the cable between the water sensor and the ECC800-Pro.

Step 2 Remove the faulty water sensor.

Step 3 Place the new water sensor in the correct position.

Step 4 Connect the water sensor cable connected to the ECC800-Pro to the new water
sensor.

----End

6.4.4.16 Replacing an eLight Strip Light

Impact on the System

The eLight strip light is off during replacement.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 478

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Preparations
● Tool: ESD gloves
● Material: eLight strip light

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the fastener from the strip light to be replaced.

Step 2 Remove the strip light.

Step 3 Take out the new strip light and reserve the end with a wiring terminal on the top
of the IT cabinet at an end of the row.

Step 4 Route the new strip light from the top of the cabinet at one end to the top of the
cabinet at the other end, and secure the strip light using the fastener.

----End

6.4.4.17 Replacing an eLight Actuator

Impact on the System

The eLight strip light is off during replacement.

Prerequisites
● Tools: ESD gloves, Phillips screwdriver, step ladder, label, marker
● Material: eLight actuator

Figure 6-71 Positions of the eLight actuator and power module

(1) eLight actuator (2) eLight power module

Procedure
Step 1 Label each cable based on the corresponding ports on the eLight actuator.

Step 2 Remove cables from the eLight actuator.

Step 3 Remove the old eLight actuator from guide rails.

Step 4 Install the new eLight actuator in the correct position and connect the cables.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 479

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Step 5 On the ECC800-Pro WebUI, choose Monitoring > Aisle > eLight Actuator Group
> eLight Actuator, and check the parameters and communication status of the
eLight actuator to ensure that the device communication is normal.

----End

6.4.4.18 Replacing an eLight Power Supply

Impact on the System

The eLight strip light is off during replacement.

Prerequisites
● Tools: ESD gloves, Phillips screwdriver, step ladder, label, marker
● Material: eLight actuator

Figure 6-72 Positions of the eLight actuator and power module

(1) eLight actuator (2) eLight power module

Procedure
Step 1 Disconnect the upstream fuse for the eLight power supply.

Step 2 Label each cable based on the corresponding ports on the eLight actuator.

Step 3 Remove cables from the eLight actuator.

Step 4 Remove the old eLight actuator from guide rails.

Step 5 Install the spare eLight actuator in the original position and connect the cables.

Step 6 Connect the upstream fuse for the eLight power supply.

----End

6.4.4.19 Replacing an Access Actuator

Prerequisites
● Recommended tool: Phillips screwdriver
● An access actuator needs to be replaced.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 480

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

● A spare access actuator of the same model is available and functional.

Context

Figure 6-73 Access actuator

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the cover from the waterproof box.

Figure 6-74 Removing the cover of a waterproof box

Step 2 Remove the cable connected to the power over Ethernet (PoE) port on the access
actuator.

Step 3 Remove other cables connected to the access actuator, and label the cables.

Step 4 Replace the faulty access actuator with a new one.

Step 5 Connect cables to the new access actuator.

Step 6 Reinstall the cover for the waterproof box of the access actuator.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 481

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Step 7 Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800-Pro > Controls and delete the device
failing in communication.

Step 8 Refer to the section about commissioning the in-room access control system in the
installation guide and check that the access actuator functions properly.

Step 9 Choose Home > Plan View and add a new access actuator in the appropriate
position.

----End

6.4.4.20 Replacing a Fingerprint and Card Reader with a Keypad

Prerequisites
● Recommended tool: Phillips screwdriver
● A fingerprint and card reader with a keypad needs to be replaced.
● A spare fingerprint and card reader with a keypad of the same model is
available and functional.

Context

Figure 6-75 Fingerprint and card reader with a keypad

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screws that secure the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad, and
remove the cable, as shown by (1), (2), and (3) in Figure 6-76.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 482

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Figure 6-76 Replacing a fingerprint and card reader with a keypad

Step 2 Remove the original bottom plate, as shown by (4) in Figure 6-76.
Step 3 Take out the bottom plate of the new fingerprint and card reader with a keypad
and secure it.
Step 4 Connect the cable.
Step 5 Secure the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad to the bottom plate.
Step 6 Configure the new fingerprint and card reader with a keypad by following the
instructions provided in the document delivered with it.
Step 7 Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800-Pro > Controls and delete the device
failing in communication.
Step 8 Refer to the section about commissioning the in-room access control system in the
installation guide and check that the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad
functions properly.

----End

6.4.4.21 Replacing a Fingerprint and Card Reader

Prerequisites
● Recommended tool: Phillips screwdriver
● A fingerprint and card reader needs to be replaced.
● A spare fingerprint and card reader of the same model is available and
functional.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 483

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Context

Figure 6-77 Fingerprint and card reader

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screws that secure the fingerprint and card reader, and remove the
cable, as shown by (1), (2), and (3) in Figure 6-78.

Figure 6-78 Removing the bottom plate

Step 2 Remove the original bottom plate, as shown by (4) in Figure 6-78.

Step 3 Take out the bottom plate of the new fingerprint and card reader and secure it.

Step 4 Connect the cable.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 484

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Step 5 Secure the fingerprint and card reader to the bottom plate.

Step 6 Configure the new fingerprint and card reader by following the instructions
provided in the document delivered with it.

Step 7 Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800-Pro > Controls and delete the device
failing in communication.

Step 8 Refer to the section about commissioning the in-room access control system in the
installation guide and check that the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad
functions properly.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Configure the new fingerprint and card reader by following the instructions
provided in the document delivered with the ECC800-Pro.

6.4.4.22 Replacing a Card Reader with a Keypad

Prerequisites
● Recommended tool: Phillips screwdriver
● A card reader with a keypad needs to be replaced.
● A spare card reader with a keypad of the same model is available and
functional.

Context

Figure 6-79 Card reader with a keypad

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 485

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screw that secures the card reader with a keypad, and remove the
cable, as shown by (1), (2), and (3) in Figure 6-80.

Figure 6-80 Removing the bottom plate

Step 2 Remove the original bottom plate, as shown by (4) in Figure 6-80.

Step 3 Take out the bottom plate of the new card reader with a keypad and secure it.

Step 4 Connect the cable.

Step 5 Secure the card reader with a keypad to the bottom plate.

Step 6 Configure the new card reader with a keypad by following the instructions
provided in the document delivered with it.

Step 7 Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Controls and delete the device failing
in communication.

Step 8 Refer to the section about commissioning the in-room access control system in the
installation guide and check that the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad
functions properly.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Configure the new card reader with a keypad by following the instructions
provided in the document delivered with the ECC800-Pro.

6.4.4.23 Replacing an Emergency Door Release Button

Prerequisites
● Recommended tool: Phillips screwdriver
● An emergency door release button needs to be replaced.
● A spare emergency door release button of the same model is available and
functional.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 486

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

Context

Figure 6-81 Emergency door release button

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the emergency door release button.
1. Remove the screw that secures the emergency door release button, as shown
by (1) in Figure 6-82.
2. Remove the glass panel of the emergency door release button, as shown by
(2) and (3) in Figure 6-82.
3. Remove the screws that secure the base, as shown by (4) in Figure 6-82.
4. Disconnect cables and remove the emergency door release button.

Figure 6-82 Removing an emergency door release button

Step 2 Install a new emergency door release button.

1. Connect cables.
2. Tighten screws on the base, as shown by (1) in Figure 6-83.
3. Install the glass panel, as shown by (2) and (3) in Figure 6-83.

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 487

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 6 O&M

4. Tighten the screw, as shown by (4) in Figure 6-83.

Figure 6-83 Installing an emergency door release button

Step 3 Close the room door, and open the protection box of the emergency door release
button.
Step 4 Remove the cover of the emergency door release button using a Phillips
screwdriver and remove the glass. If the room door can be opened normally, the
emergency door release button is functional.
Step 5 Install the emergency door release button.

----End

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 488

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 7 Technical Specifications

7 Technical Specifications

Table 7-1 Key technical specifications

Item Asia, Europe, and Africa Version Specifications

Module Cold and hot aisle containment: 2000 x L x 1350, L ≤ 7400

dimensions
(H x W x D)
(mm)

Number of IT ≤ 4 (a maximum of one network cabinet)

cabinets

Number of IT power 8.5 kW or 17 kW: ≤ 5

cabinets

Power system 380V/400V/415V 3Ph +N 50Hz/60Hz

Voltage range 342–456 V

Voltage 50/60 Hz (± 3 Hz)

frequency
range

Total IT ≤ 8.5kW
equipment
power

Maximum ≤ 7 kW (high temperature condition: ≤ 6 kW)

power of a
single cabinet

IP rating IP20

Altitude 0-4000 m (derated when the altitude exceeds 1000 m)

Installation Installed on a concrete floor, a raised floor, or an ESD floor.

mode

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 489

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual 7 Technical Specifications

Item Asia, Europe, and Africa Version Specifications

Cable and ● Pipes are routed from the top or bottom.

pipe routing ● Input power cables of the Converged Cabinet can be routed
in from the top or bottom, and other power cables can be
routed out from the top.
● Signal cables can be routed out from the top or bottom.

Operating Indoor: 0°C to +40°C

temperature
outdoor: – –40°C to outdoor: –10°C to +55°C (high
20°C to +45°C +45°C (low temperature version)
(normal temperature
temperature version)
version)

Storage Without refrigerant: –40°C to +70°C

temperature With refrigerant: –40°C to +55°C

Storage ≤ 95% RH (non-condensing)

humidity

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 490

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual A Fluorine Pump Principles

A Fluorine Pump Principles

Working principles of fluorine pump:

● The fluorine pump is efficient and energy-saving. When the ambient
temperature is lower than –8°C (switches back to the compressor system
when the outdoor temperature is higher than –5°C), the cooling system
automatically switches to the fluorine pump for circulation through valve
control. The compressor is stopped, and a low-power refrigerant pump is used
for forced convection circulation of refrigerant. In this way, the indoor
evaporator provides cooling and the outdoor condenser dissipates heat
continuously. This mode ensures the cooling capacity equal to that of the
compressor, shortens the compressor runtime, and saves energy.
● The fluorine pump mode also provides 12.5 kW cooling capacity when the
outdoor temperature (lower than –5°C outdoor) is low. The total power of the
equipment is 2.6 kW when the compressor is running, and it is about 1.2 kW
when the fluorine pump is running. The cooling capacity in 1.2 kW fluorine
pump mode is basically equal to that in 2.6 kW compressor mode.

Figure A-1 Cooling system layout (with fluorine pump)

(1) Compressor (2) High pressure (3) Oil separator (4) High pressure
sensor 1 switch 1

(5) Compressor (6) Condenser (7) Filter dryer (8) Liquid storage
discharge check valve tank

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 491

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual A Fluorine Pump Principles

(9) Fluorine pump (10) High pressure (11) Fluorine pump (12) High pressure
bypass check valve sensor 2 sensor 3

(13) Fluorine pump (14) Outdoor unit (15) Indoor unit (16) Electronic
outlet solenoid valve liquid pipe stop valve liquid pipe stop valve expansion valve

(17) Evaporator (18) Suction sensor (19) Indoor unit gas (20) Outdoor unit gas
pipe stop valve pipe stop valve

(21) Low pressure (22) Gas-liquid (23) Pre-compressor (24) Compressor

sensor separator solenoid valve bypass check valve

(25) Low pressure

switch

Figure A-2 Refrigerant flow diagram (compressor mode)

Figure A-3 Refrigerant flow diagram (fluorine pump mode)

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 492

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual B Equipment Derating Coefficients

B Equipment Derating Coefficients

NOTE

The coefficients listed in the Table B-1 are based on the dry air density being 1.225 kg/m3
(sea level +15ºC).

Table B-1 Derating coefficients of the UPS2000-G

Altitude (Unit: m) Derating Coefficients

1000 1.0

1500 0.95

2000 0.91

2500 0.86

3000 0.82

3500 0.78

4000 0.74

4500 0.7

5000 0.67

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 493

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual C Acronyms and Abbreviations

C Acronyms and Abbreviations

A
AC alternating current
ATS auto transformer switch
ATSE auto transformer switch equipment
ASIC application-specific integrated circuit

B
BIM battery interface module

C
CAN control area network
CIM communication interface module
CPLD complex programmable logical device

D
DC direct current
DSP digital signal processing

E
ECO economy control operation
EOD end of discharge
EPO emergency power-off
ESM energy storage module
ESMU energy storage management unit
ESN equipment serial number

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 494

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual C Acronyms and Abbreviations

H
HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure

L
LCD liquid crystal display
LSI large-scale integrated
LUI LCD user interface

M
MIB management information base

N
NMS network management system

P
PE protective earthing
PFC power factor correction
PL parallel load

R
RS232 Recommended Standard 232
RS485 Recommended Standard 485

S
SELV safety extra-low voltage
SOC state of charge
SOH state of health
SPD surge protective device
SSH Secure Shell

T
THDv total harmonic distortion of output voltage
TNV telecommunication network voltage

U
UPS uninterruptible power system
USB Universal Serial Bus

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 495

FusionModule800 Smart Small Data Center
User Manual C Acronyms and Abbreviations

V
VRLA valve regulated lead acid

Issue 01 (2021-02-05) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 496